expo rail operations and maintenance · pdf file01 78 43 spare parts and replacement...

EXPO RAIL OPERATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE FACILITY

EXPOSITION METRO LINE CONSTRUCTION AUTHORITY

Santa Monica, CA

100% Construction Documents

Issued For Bid, Not For Construction Volume 3 of 6

Specifications Group - Facility Construction Subgroup, Divisions 9 - 14

February 8, 2013

PREPARED BY

MAINTENANCE DESIGN GROUP

16 North Marengo Avenue, Suite 716 Pasadena, California 91101

(626) 389-2440

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility TABLE OF CONTENTS Santa Monica, CA 00 01 10 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility

1955 Centinela Avenue Santa Monica, CA 90404

Vol 1 of 6: Procurement and Contracting Requirements Group - Division 00, Specifications Group,

General Requirements Subgroup - Division 01

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 05 CERTIFICATIONS PAGE 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 72 23- GENERAL CONDITIONS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY [RNL]

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES [EXPO]

01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION [RNL] 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS [EXPO] 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION [EXPO - RNL] 01 32 13 COST LOADED CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE [EXPO]

01 32 23 PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM [EXPO] 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION [EXPO] 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES [EXPO] 01 35 23 WORKSITE SECURITY REQUIREMENTS [EXPO] 01 35 25 WORKSITE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS [EXPO] 01 35 42 ENVIRONMENTALLY RESTRICTED WORK [EXPO]

01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETYPROGRAM [EXPO] 01 35 44 LEAD-RELATED CONSTRUCTION WORK [EXPO]

01 35 45 IMPORTED FILL AND SOIL RE-USE CRITERIA [EXPO] 01 35 94 HISTORIC, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, PALEONTOLOGICAL AND CULTURAL COORDINATION [EXPO] 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS [EXPO]

01 42 00 REFERENCES [RNL] 01 45 16 CONCRETE MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION AND pH TESTING [RNL] 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS [EXPO - RNL] 01 56 24 TRAFFIC CONTROL [W2D] 01 57 21 POLLUTION CONTROL [EXPO] 01 57 23 CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL [EXPO] 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS [RNL] 01 71 23 PRE- POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY [EXPO] 01 73 00 EXECUTION [RNL] 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING [RNL] 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL [RNL] 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES [RNL] 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA [RNL] 01 78 39 AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND CURRENT STATUS DOCUMENTS [EXPO] 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS [EXPO] 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING [RNL] 01 81 13 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS [RNL] 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS [RNL]


Vol 2 of 6: Specifications Group, Facility Construction Subgroup - Divisions 02 - 08

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK [NYA] 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT [NYA] 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE [NYA] 03 37 13 SHOTCRETE [NYA]

03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE [RNL] 03 45 01 PRECAST INSULATED ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE [RNL] 03 53 14 QUARTZ-AGGREGATE CONCRETE TOPPING - LIGHT REFLECTIVE [RNL]

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 22 00 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS [NYA & RNL] DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL [NYA] 05 12 05 METAL POLES [HNTB] 05 12 13 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING [NYA]

05 15 19 STAINLESS-STEEL WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES [RNL] 05 31 00 STEEL DECK [NYA]

05 40 40 COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING [NYA] 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS [RNL] 05 51 00 STEEL STAIRS [NYA] 05 51 19 METAL GRATING STAIRS [RNL] 05 52 14 STEEL TUBE RAILINGS [RNL] 05 53 00 METAL GRATINGS [RNL] 05 58 13 DECORATIVE FORMED ALUMINUM COLUMN COVERS [RNL] 05 71 00 DECORATIVE METAL STAIRS [RNL] 05 73 00 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS [RNL] 05 73 11 GLASS SUPPORTED RAILINGS [RNL] 05 73 13 ILLUMINATED GLASS SUPPORTED METAL RAILINGS [RNL] 05 75 00 DECORATIVE WIRE MESH PANELS [RNL]

DIVISION 06 - WOODS PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY [RNL] 06 16 43 GYPSUM WALL SHEATHING [RNL] 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK [RNL] 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING [RNL] 06 74 13 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS [RNL]

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 13 COLD-APPLIED EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING [RNL] 07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING [RNL] 07 14 16 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING [RNL] 07 21 16 BLANKET INSULATION [RNL] 07 21 29 SPRAYED INSULATION [RNL] 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS [RNL] 07 26 16 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS [RNL] 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS [RNL] 07 42 15 PERFORATED METAL WALL PANELS [RNL]


Vol 2 of 6: Specifications Group, Facility Construction Subgroup - Divisions 02 - 08 (Cont.)

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (Cont.) 07 54 16 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING [RNL] 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM [RNL] 07 71 29 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS [RNL] 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES [RNL] 07 76 16 PEDESTAL PAVING [RNL] 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING [RNL] 07 84 46 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS [RNL] 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS [RNL] 07 95 00 EXPANSION CONTROL [RNL]

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES [RNL] 08 14 16 VENEER FACED SOLID CORE FLUSH DOORS [RNL] 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES [RNL] 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS [RNL] 08 33 25 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER DOORS [RNL]

08 34 19 INDUSTRIAL FOUR-FOLD DOORS [RNL] 08 36 14 POLYCARBONATE GLAZED ALUMINUM SECTIONAL DOORS [RNL] 08 38 13 TRANSPARENT STRIP DOORS [RNL] 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES [RNL]. 08 42 26 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES [RNL]

08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS [RNL] 08 44 26 STRUCTURAL GLASS CURTAIN WALL [RNL] 08 45 13 STRUCTURED-POLYCARBONATE-PANEL ASSEMBLIES [RNL] 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS [RNL] 08 56 59 SERVICE WINDOW UNITS [RNL] 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS [RNL] 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE [RNL] 08 80 00 GLAZING [RNL] 08 83 00 MIRRORS [RNL] 08 84 14 DECORATIVE MONOLITHIC CO-POLYESTER RESIN GLAZING [RNL] 08 87 00 GLAZING SURFACE FILMS [RNL]

Vol 3 of 6: Specifications Group, Facility Construction Subgroup - Divisions 09 - 14

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 00 TILING 09 30 35 CAST STONE TILING 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 54 43 STRETCHED FABRIC CEILING 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 19 RUBBER TILE FLOORING 09 65 36 STATIC-DISSIPATIVE VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 06 65 66 RUBBER ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 67 11 FLUID APPLIED CONCRETE SEALER 09 67 23 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING 09 84 33 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS


Vol 3 of 6: Specifications Group, Facility Construction Subgroup - Divisions 09 - 14 (Cont.) DIVISION 09 - FINISHES (Cont.)

09 84 53 SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM CAP [RNL] 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING [RNL] 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING [RNL] 09 96 23 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS [RNL] 09 96 33 HIGH-TEMPERATURE RESISTANT COATINGS [RNL]

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 14 00 SIGNAGE [RNL] 10 14 55 RAILROAD SIGNAGE [RPI]

10 21 13 SOLID POLYMER TOILET COMPARTMENTS [RNL] 10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS [RNL] 10 22 26 MANUALLY OPERATED ACOUSTICAL PANEL PARTITIONS [RNL] 10 26 11 WALL PROTECTION [RNL] 10 26 13 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS [RNL] 10 28 13 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES [RNL]. 10 28 19 SHOWER DOORS [RNL] 10 41 16 FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOX [RNL] 10 44 13 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS [RNL] 10 44 16 PORTABLE MULTIPURPOSE DRY-CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS [RNL] 10 51 23 METAL UNIFORM EXCHANGE LOCKERS [RNL] 10 51 26 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS [RNL] 10 56 00 STORAGE EQUIPMENT [MDG] 10 56 13 METAL STORAGE SHELVING [RNL] 10 71 13 FIXED SUN SCREENS [RNL] 10 75 16 GROUND-SET ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES [RNL] 10 81 00 AUDIBLE BIRD DETERRENT [RNL]

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 11 00 VEHICLE SERVICE EQUIPMENT [MDG] 11 11 26 VEHICLE WASH EQUIPMENT [MDG] 11 11 29 SHOP EQUIPMENT [MDG] 11 12 00 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT [RNL] 11 24 19 VACUUM EQUIPMENT [MDG] 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES [RNL]

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES [RNL] 12 36 13 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS [RNL] 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES [RNL]

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 23 PREFABRICATED BUILDING [MDG]

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 24 23 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR [METRO]

14 45 00 VEHICLE LIFTS [MDG]

Vol 4 of 6: Specifications Group, FacilityServices Subgroup - Divisions 21-28

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION. 21 12 00 STANDPIPE SYSTEMS [HAI] 21 13 00 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION [HAI]


Vol 4 of 6: Specifications Group, FacilityServices Subgroup - Divisions 21-28 (Cont.)

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS – PLUMBING (WITH SEISMIC) [GLU] 22 05 01 PLUMBING [GLU] 22 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR PLUMBING, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT [GLU] 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION [GLU] 22 11 23 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT [GLU] 22 11 25 SOLAR HOT WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT [GLU] 22 21 13 PLUMBING PIPING AND VALVES [GLU] 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES [GLU]

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING HVAC

23 05 00 BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS [GLU] 23 05 03 HVAC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR LEED VERSION 2.0/2.1 PROJECTS [GLU] 23 05 14 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) [GLU] 23 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND EQUIPMENT [GLU] 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING [GLU] 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION [GLU] 23 08 00 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING [AEI]

23 09 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS [GLU] 23 21 13 HVAC PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES [GLU] 23 21 23 PUMPS AND HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES [GLU] 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT [GLU] 23 31 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION [GLU] 23 34 13 FANS AND VENTS [GLU] 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS [GLU] 23 41 00 AIR FILTRATION [GLU] 23 52 33 GAS FIRED PACKAGED CONDENSING BOILER [GLU] 23 55 23 INFRARED GAS RADIANT HEATERS [GLU] 23 64 00 AIR COOLED CHILLERS [GLU] 23 73 13 MODULAR AIR HANDLER [GLU] 23 73 33 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS [GLU] 23 81 25 MINI-SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS [GLU] 23 81 45 SPLIT HEAT PUMP UNITS [GLU] 23 82 14 TRENCH HEATERS [GLU] 23 82 19 SMALL CABINET FAN COIL UNITS [GLU] 23 83 16 RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEMS [GLU]

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 01 00 ELECTRICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR LEED PROJECTS [GLU] 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS [GLU] 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES [GLU] 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 30 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS [GLU] 26 05 34 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 41 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY [GLU] 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [GLU] 26 05 70 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION [GLU]


Vol 4 of 6 Specifications Group, FacilityServices Subgroup - Divisions 21-28 (Cont.)

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL (Cont.) 26 08 00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING [AEI] 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES [GLU] 26 09 26 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELBOARDS [GLU] 26 09 52 MOTOR CONTROLS [GLU] 26 10 00 TRANSFORMERS [GLU] 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS [GLU] 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS [GLU] 26 27 13 ELECTRICITY METERING [GLU] 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES [GLU] 26 28 15 SWITCHES DISCONNECT AND SAFETY [GLU] 26 32 15 EMERGENCY GENERATORS [GLU] 26 33 53 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY [GLU] 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES [GLU] 26 43 13 TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS [GLU]

26 51 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING [GLU] 26 56 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING [GLU]

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS [AVS] 27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLE SYSTEM [AVS] 27 31 00 TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT [AVS]

27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM [AVS] DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 00 00 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL [TRC] 28 13 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL/ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM [TRC] 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM [TRC] 28 23 23 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INFRASTRUCTURE [TRC] 28 26 00 SECURITY INTERCOM SYSTEM [TRC] 28 31 00 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS [HAI]

Vol 5 of 6: Specifications Group, Site and Infrastructure Subgroup - Divisions 31 - 34 and Process Equipment Subgroup - Divisions 41 - 48

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 11 00 SITE CLEARING [W2D] 31 13 00 TREE PROTECTION AND RELOCATION [PBC] 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING [W2D] 31 23 01 EXCAVATION BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT [W2D] 31 23 02 EXCAVATION BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR STRUCTURES [W2D] 31 23 03 EXCAVATION BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES [W2D]

31 23 23 GEOFOAM [RM:]

31 26 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION [W2D] DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 01 90 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING [PBC] 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING [W2D]

32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING [W2D]

32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS [W2D] 32 14 13 CONCRETE PAVERS [W2D]


Vol 5 of 6: Specifications Group, Site and Infrastructure Subgroup - Divisions 31 - 34 and Process Equipment Subgroup - Divisions 41 - 48 (Cont.) DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (Cont.)

32 17 13 WHEEL STOPS, PAVEMENT MARKINGS, & TRAFFIC SIGNING [W2D] 32 31 16 WELDED WIRE FENCES AND HORIZONTAL SWING GATES [RNL] 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION [PBC] 32 90 00 PLANTS [PBC]

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 05 23 NON-METALLIC PIPE CASING [W2D]

33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES [W2D] 33 16 20 RAINWATER HARVESTING [W2D] 33 16 21 NON-POTABLE CISTERN WATER PUMP & CONTROLS [W2D] 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES [W2D] 33 40 00 STORM DRAIN UTILITIES [W2D]

33 46 00 UNDERDRAINS [W2D] 33 49 02 STORM WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM [W2D] 33 49 23 STORM WATER DE TENTION [W2D]

33 49 02 STORM WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM [W2D] 33 49 04 GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELLS [W2D] 33 49 23 STORM WATER RETENTION [W2D]

33 79 00 SYSTEMS GROUNDING [RPI]

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION 34 05 00 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS [HNTB] 34 11 16 FIELD WIELDED RAIL [RPI] 34 11 24 DIRECT FIXATION TRACK [RPI] 34 11 26 BALLAST [RPI] 34 11 27 SUB-BALLAST AND AGGREGATE BASE [RPI] 34 11 30 EMBEDDED TRACK [RPI] 34 11 33 CONCRETE RAILROAD TIES [RPI] 34 11 33.13 CONCRETE TRACK CROSS TIES [RPI] 34 11 36 TRACK RAIL FASTENERS [RPI] 34 11 93 TRACK RAIL BOOT [RPI] 34 11 93.13 BUMPING POST [RPI] 34 11 94 WAYSIDE RAIL LUBRICATION APPLICATORS [RPI] 34 20 18 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS [HNTB] 34 20 52 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION SYSTEM INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS [HNTB]

34 21 40 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION BLUE LIGHT - ETS [HNTB] 34 23 00 OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM [HNTB] 34 23 01 CATENARY FITTINGS AND HARDWARE [HNTB] 34 23 02 CATENARY SUPPORT AND REGISTRATION ASSEMBLIES [HNTB] 34 23 04 OCS BALANCE WEIGHT AND MIDPOINT ANCHOR ASSEMBLIES [HNTB] 34 23 10 OCS WIRE AND WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES [HNTB] 34 23 11 OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM UNINSULATED CONDUCTORS [HNTB] 34 23 40 DISCONNECT SWITCHES [HNTB] 34 23 42 OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM INSULATORS [HNTB] 34 23 44 OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM SECTION INSULATORS [HNTB] 34 23 50 OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM LIGHTNING PROTECTION [HNTB] 34 23 80 POLE IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING SIGNS [HNTB] 34 23 90 OVERHEAD CONTACT SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE [HNTB] 34 30 10 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION SHOP DC DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM [HNTB] 34 30 25 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION CABLE AND WIRE [HNTB]


Vol 5 of 6: Specifications Group, Site and Infrastructure Subgroup - Divisions 31 - 34 and Process

Equipment Subgroup - Divisions 41 - 48 (Cont.) DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION (Cont.)

34 30 30 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS [HNTB] 34 30 35 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION DC POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE FEEDER CABLES [HNTB] 34 30 40 TRACTION ELECTRIFICATION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING [HNTB] 34 42 00 GENERAL TRAIN CONTROL REQUIREMENTS [RPI]

34 42 16 TRAIN CONTROL WIRES AND CABLES [RPI] 34 42 24 TRAIN CONTROL BUNGALOW EQUIPMENT 34 42 33 YARD CONTROL PANEL [RPI] 34 42 42 SIGNAL LAYOUT, STRUCTURES AND FOUNDATIONS [RPI] 34 42 46 TRAIN CONTROL BUNGALOWS [RPI] 34 42 48 YARD SWITCH MACHINES [RPI] 34 42 54 TRACK CONNECTIONS AND RAIL BONDING [RPI] 34 42 58 TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING [RPI] 34 42 60 MISCELLANEOUS TRAIN CONTROL PRODUCTS [RPI] 34 72 00 TRACKWORK [RPI]

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 12 19 PNEUMATIC CONVEYING EQUIPMENT [MDG] 41 22 00 HOISTS AND CRANES [MDG]

DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

44 41 00 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION [W2D] DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

45 39 00 FABRICATED SHOP EQUIPMENT [MDG] Vol 6 of 6: Appendices

APPENDIX A - GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION APPENDIX B - DRAINAGE REPORT APPENDIX C - PHOTO SURVEY REPORT APPENDIX D - STANDARD URBAN STORMWATER MITIGATION PLAN APPENDIX E - STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN APPENDIX F - UTILITY REPORT APPENDIX G - ASBESTOS, LEAD-BASED PAINT AND UNIVERSAL HASARDOUS MATERIAL

SURVEY REPORT APPENDIX H – NOT USED APPENDIX I - RAINWATER HARVESTING REPORT APPENDIX J – ONSITE METHANE REPORT APPENDIX K – LOS ANGELES COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH


APPENDIX L – ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT REPORT APPENDIX M – CITY OF SANTA MONICA MUNICIPAL CODE – APPLICABLE TO OFFSITE

CONDITIONS ONLY APPENDIX N - CONTAMINATION REPORT APPENDIX O - METRO GRAPHIC STANDARDS APPENDIX P – EXISTING SITE ASBUILTS APPENDIX Q - SRJV DRAWINGS PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE

END OF SECTION 00 01 10

SECTION 09 22 16

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-

bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from

ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Santa Monica, CA 09 22 16 - 1

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of

finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

1) ClarkDietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and

contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ClarkDietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. b. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. c. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. d. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.

G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized

steel.

H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.


1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall

attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in

diameter.

C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

2.04 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,

holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for

installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that


apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in

ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in

ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that

apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel

framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.04 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to

structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-

inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as

required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated.


5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

D. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation (specified in Section 07 21 16 "Blanket Insulation") vertically and

hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 16 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to

wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not

more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.05 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated

by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces

hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling

loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards and California requirements.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to

inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger

inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.


D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid

suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in

12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD



1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels

Gypsum Board Type Room Name & Number Comply with partition type for

thickness and fire resistance using one of the following

INTERIOR & SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

Gypsum Board As indicated on partition type unless noted otherwise in column below

Gypsum Board, Type X, 5/8 inch Thickness

Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board Toilet and Bath Rooms

Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board, 5/8 inch thick Core, Type X

TILE BACKING PANELS

Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board Bathtub surrounds

Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board, 5/8 inch thick, Type X, Mold Resistant

Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board

Toilet and Bath Rooms Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board, 5/8 inch thick Core, Type X


1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples: For the following products:

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility GYPSUM BOARD Santa Monica, CA 09 29 00 - 1

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on

exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and

conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.02 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles


of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each

area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.03 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. Lafarge North America Inc. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With

moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X, except where 1/2 inch, regular type is indicated on Drawings.

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D

3274. 2.04 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X, except where 1/2 inch, regular type is indicated on

Drawings. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D 3274. 2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel shee.


2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability

properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish

materials specified. 2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping

compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members

from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.


2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane

facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly. 2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.



a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Blanket Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Blanket Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,

and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and

ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.


D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where

intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum

panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or

smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is

attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are

readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.03 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawing. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.


2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate

courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.04 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to

produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.05 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Authority for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.


B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically

indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise

indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." Level 5 is suitable for surfaces receiving gloss and semigloss enamels and other surfaces subject to severe lighting. It is considered a high-quality gypsum board finish.

E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



SECTION 09 30 00

TILING



1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Crack isolation membrane.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 13 26 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing under

thickset mortar beds. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control,

and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board. 4. Section 09

8 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives and grouts, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit MR4: For tiling products, documentation including statement of recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths,

details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

D. Samples for Verification:

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility TILING Santa Monica, CA 09 30 00 - 1

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend.

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

H. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform

quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products

specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Joint sealants. 5. Cementitious backer units. 6. Metal edge strips.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.

1.05 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with


protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry

location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent

coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise

indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore

Standard.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Tile flooring systems shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory

and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.


F. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-

mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

G. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type,

protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.02 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Tile Type CT-1: Unglazed floor tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. d. Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc. e. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. f. Florim USA. g. Laufen. h. Grupo Porcelanite. i. Portobello America, Inc. j. Seneca Tiles, Inc. k. United States Ceramic Tile Company.

2. Composition: Porcelain. 3. Face Size: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: As indicated. 6. Finish: Mat, opaque. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation on Finish

Legend. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Authority from manufacturer's full range 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable[ and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base Cove: Cove, module size same as adjoining flat tile.

B. Tile Type WT-1: Glazed wall tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. d. Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc. e. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. f. Florim USA. g. Laufen.


h. Grupo Porcelanite. i. Portobello America, Inc. j. Seneca Tiles, Inc. k. United States Ceramic Tile Company.

2. Module Size: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 5. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation on Finish

Legend. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Authority from manufacturer's full range. 8. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 9. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with

manufacturer's standard white silicone rubber. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size as indicated on

Finish Legend. b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module

size matching adjacent flat tile. c. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile

wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile.

d. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile.

e. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.03 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch

above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

2.04 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on

both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.

C. PVC Sheet: Two layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of

nonwoven polyester; 0.040-inch nominal thickness.

1. Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold.


D. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-

inch nominal thickness.


a. Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.

E. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS-modified-

bituminous sheet with woven reinforcement facing; 0.040-inch nominal thickness.


a. National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex.

F. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber

or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing

and Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane with

Glass Fabric. c. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210. d. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture

Membrane. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh. g. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Hydro-Guard 2000.

G. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.



a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 644 Membrane Waterproofing System.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane. c. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. d. C-Cure; Pro-Red Waterproofing Membrane 63. e. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention

Membrane. f. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. g. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latapoxy 24hr HydroProofing. h. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and

Waterproofing. j. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack

Isolation Membrane.

H. Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive.




a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 323 Cement Based Waterproofing, Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane.

b. C-Cure; UltraCure 971. c. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic (PRP 315). d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100. e. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; Triple Flex Waterproofing, Crack

Isolation Membrane & Mortar.

I. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.



a. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Ultra-Set . 2.05 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on

both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness.


a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-

inch nominal thickness.


a. Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.

D. Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations

and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16-inch nominal thickness.


a. Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA.

E. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, modified-bituminous

sheet with fabric reinforcement facing; 0.040-inch nominal thickness.



a. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic SM. b. National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex.

F. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber

or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.


a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing

and Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane with

Glass Fabric. c. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210. d. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture

Membrane. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh. g. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Hydro-Guard 2000.

G. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.



a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. b. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention

Membrane. c. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. d. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Fracture-Guard 5000. e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and

Waterproofing. f. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack

Isolation Membrane.

H. Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive.



a. C-Cure; UltraCure 971. b. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic (PRP 315). c. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; Triple Flex Waterproofing, Crack

Isolation Membrane & Mortar.

I. Urethane Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.



a. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Ultra-Set.


2.06 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for

nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 2.07 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.



a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to

protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.


1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming

tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does

not change color or appearance of grout.


a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer. e. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer. f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed

Grout and Tile. g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile

Sealer. i. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone

Grout Sealer. 2.09 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing

time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been


mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or

grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Authority.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced

mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended

and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to

prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.03 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form

complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without

marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed


tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints

within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be

same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining

tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions

indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly

above them.

I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in

dry-set portland cement or latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on cleavage membrane or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant.

J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to[ cementitious] grout joints[ in tile floors] according

to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.04 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured

and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.05 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.


B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Removelatex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's

written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction

period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is

completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.07 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113.

a. Tile Type: CT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

2. Tile Installation F122: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA F122.

a. Tile Type: CT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

3. Tile Installation F125A: Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane;

TCA F125A.

a. Tile Type: CT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs

1. Tile Installation B420: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane on coated glass-

mat, water-resistant backer board; TCA B420.

a. Tile Type: WT-1.


b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

2. Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCA W243.

a. Tile Type: WT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.



SECTION 09 30 35

CAST STONE TILING



1. Cast stone tile and related setting materials applied to floors. 2. Cleavage membrane.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified

for tile substrates. 2. Section 07 13 26 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing under

thickset mortar beds. 3. Section 09 30 00 - "Tiling" for stone thresholds installed with cast stone tiling.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives and grouts, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of stone tile and tile pattern. Show

widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in substrates and finished stone tile surfaces. Show stone thresholds.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type of cast stone tile.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Maintenance Data: For cast stone tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Sole Source Requirement: Provide Cast Stone Tiling, Pedestal Pavers, and Interior and Exterior Concrete Pavers from same manufacturer.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility CAST STONE TILING Santa Monica, CA 09 30 35 - 1

B. Supplier Qualifications: A firm experienced in supplying products similar to those indicated for the Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a

uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products

specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Waterproof membrane. 2. Cleavage membrane. 3. Joint sealants.

E. Dry-Laid Mockups: Lay out tiles in dry-laid mockups to verify selections made under

sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Lay out mockup of each type of cast stone floor tile installation. 2. Maintain dry-laid mockups in an undisturbed condition until equivalent areas of

the completed Work are approved to serve as mockups.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.04 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cast Stone Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each

type, color, and pattern of cast stone tile installed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

B. Store cast stone tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover,

and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stone tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A. Sequence cast stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAST STONE PRODUCTS

A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, cast stone products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated.

B. Regional Materials: Provide stone tiles that have been manufactured within 500

miles of Project site from stone that has been extracted within 500 miles of Project site.

C. Abrasion Resistance of Stone Tile for Floors: Provide stone with a value of not less

than 12, as determined per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241.

D. Provide cast stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated, including cracks, seams, and starts.

E. Cast Stone Tile Type PAV-2:

1. Basis of Design: Subject to requirements, provide Prest Pavers by Hanover 2. Module Size: As indicated on Finish Legend. 3. Joint Width: Hand tight

2.02 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.

1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.

2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062 inch in diameter; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M except for minimum wire size.

2.03 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.



a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc.


g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Protective Coating: Liquid grout-release coating that is formulated to protect exposed

surfaces of stone tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with stone, mortar, and grout products; easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or stone tile; and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for stone tile.

1. Floor sealer complying with "Floor Sealer" Paragraph below may be used

provided it is recommended by manufacturer for use as a grout release.

C. Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile producers and grout manufacturers.

D. Floor Sealer: Colorless, stain- and slip-resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical

properties of stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile producers for application indicated.



a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Hillyard, Inc. d. HMK Stone Care System. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Facial Dimensions of Cast Stone Tiles with Honed Faces: Do not vary facial dimensions from specified dimensions by more than plus or minus 1/64 inch.

B. Joint Surfaces: Except for specified beveled or eased edges if any, dress joint

surfaces square for full depth of stone tile.

C. Thresholds: Fabricate to size and profile as indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges of thresholds at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with

adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.


2.06 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and with mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where cast stone tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed stone tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting cast stone tile are firm, dry, clean, and free of

coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, and that they comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind stone tile has been completed.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in stone tile substrates are coordinated with stone tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Authority.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for stone tile floors installed with adhesives with trowelable patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a

reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Lay out stone tiles on substrates or on an adjacent surface to establish placement of

individual stone tiles for balance of color and pattern variations.

1. Notify Authority seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done.

2. Authority may relocate specific stone tiles with other stone tiles of same type and will determine final location of each stone tile within indicated patterns.

3. Identify each stone tile with a temporary number marked on face of stone tile that corresponds with an identical number marked on a layout drawing, and obtain Authority's approval before starting stone tile installation.


D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under cast stone tile type or

needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed stone tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed stone tile surfaces.

3.03 CAST STONE TILE INSTALLATION

A. Do not use cast stone units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.

B. Mix cast stone units from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce

uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Cut cast stone units with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

D. Joint Pattern: Match and continue exterior unit paver joint pattern.

E. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including

control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and cast stone tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing cast stone tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in stone tile surfaces

directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in

Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

F. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above

adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 2. Do not extend cleavage membrane under thresholds set in dry-set portland

cement or latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining stone tile set on cleavage membrane with elastomeric sealant.

3.04 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane

has cured. 3.05 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level or slope indicated when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.


B. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 3/16 inch difference between faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to stone tiled surface

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch or one-fourth

of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

D. Hand-Tight Joints: Do not exceed 1/64 inch. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace material that is stained or otherwise damaged or that does not match adjoining stone tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean stone tile surfaces so they

are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from stone tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from cast stone tile according to stone tile and

grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by cast stone tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of stone tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and acceptable to stone tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. Do not remove floor sealer if used as protective coating.

C. Apply sealer to cleaned cast stone tile flooring according to sealer manufacturer's

written instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cast stone tile floors with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by stone tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed stone tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from stone tiled floors for at least seven days after

grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from stone tile surfaces.



SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS


A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6

inches in size.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and

texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long

Samples of each type, finish, and color.

F. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Santa Monica, CA 09 51 13 - 1

5. Perimeter moldings.

G. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

H. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

I. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor

and fastener type, from ICC-ES.

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity

installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal

to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 4. Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a

stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.


1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting

suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 71 percent.

D. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

E. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which

face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

F. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated

for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Authority from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

2.03 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACT-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product Optima Open Plan by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:


1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. Tectum Inc. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and

pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, cloth.

2. Pattern: E (lightly textured.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.90.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.95.

F. AC: Not less than 190.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 3/4 inch

I. Modular Size: As indicated on Finish Legend.

J. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

K. Suspension System: Silhouette XL specified below.

2.04 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACT-2

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Optima Capz or comparable product by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. Tectum Inc. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Color: White.

C. LR: Not less than 0.90.

D. NRC: Not less than 0.90.

E. Edge/Joint Detail: Reverse Tecular.

F. Thickness: 7/8 inch

G. Modular Size: As indicated on Finish Legend.


H. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

I. Suspension System: 15/16 inch T-Bar with caps.

2.05 EGGCRATE LOUVER PANELS AET-1

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Flat Blade Aluminum Eggcrate Lover Ceiling Tile FB1000 by Edee Aiken.

B. Color: Black

C. Thickness: 1 inch

D. Suspension System: Typical T-Bar with caps.

2.06 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung

metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for

"Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in

ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or

loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition. c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with

ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.

d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following

requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.


4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-

thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

G. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to

accommodate seismic forces.

H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure

acoustical panels in place.

J. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.

K. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system

designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels. 2.07 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACT-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Silhouette XL by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Narrow-Face, Uncapped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross

runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized; to produce structural members with 9/16-inch- wide faces.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Face Design: With 9/16-inch- wide, slotted, box-shaped flange. Flanges formed

in stepped design with a center protrusion projecting 19/64 inch below flange surfaces supporting panel faces and forming 1/4-inch- wide reveals between edges of protrusion and those of panels.

3. Face Finish: Painted white. 4. Reveal Finish: Painted to match flange color.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum

of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.


D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area

and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-

system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by

flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with

bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped

flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.

5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

7. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Compliance of seismic design.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections

and prepare test reports.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations show compliance with requirements.

1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on

each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.


a. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.

b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

D. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered

defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



SECTION 09 54 43

STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS


A. Section includes site-upholstered ceiling systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise reduction coefficient.

B. SAA: Sound absorption average. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for stretched-fabric systems.

2. Include furnished specialties and accessories.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For installation adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite wood products used in stretched-fabric systems, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

C. Shop Drawings: For each stretched-fabric system. Include installation and system

details; details joints and corners; and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with walls. Indicate frame edge and core materials.

1. Include reflected ceiling plans showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave

and pattern matching. 2. Show sewn-seam locations, types, and methods.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products prepared on Samples of size

indicated below.

1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch-long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS Santa Monica, CA 09 54 43 - 1

2. Frame System: 12-inch- square Sample(s) showing each edge profile and corner.

3. Core Material: 12-inch- square Sample at corner. 4. Assembled System: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and seams

in mockup.

E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Suspended ceiling components above stretched-fabric systems. 3. Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached. 4. Items penetrating or covered by stretched-fabric systems including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels.

5. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to

stretched-fabric systems.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of stretched-fabric system.

H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

I. Maintenance Data: For stretched-fabric systems to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching, and reupholstering recommendations.

1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, furnish length equal to 2

percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards. 2. Framing and Related Installation Items: Furnish manufacturer's full-length units

equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units, including unopened adhesives.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of systems required for this Project.


B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as directed by Authority. Include intersection

of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Authority specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Comply with fabric and stretched-fabric system manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry

place with adequate air circulation. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until a lighting level of not less than

50 fc is provided on surfaces to receive stretched-fabric systems.

C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect stretched-fabric systems from exposure to airborne odors such as tobacco smoke, and install systems under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of stretched-fabric systems that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide stretched-fabric systems meeting the following requirements as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.02 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS

A. Stretched-Fabric Ceiling System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of facing material stretched taught over a frame and secured in the frame.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Newacoustic custom fabricated ceiling membrane with concealed rails as distributed by Newmat USA Ltd.

C. Components:

1. Rails:

a. As indicated on the Drawings: Concealed, Tubing and Visible (PVC for

concealed and Aluminum for any exposed rails unless noted otherwise on drawings)

2. Ceiling Membrane/Aesthetic: A PVC ceiling membrane for each system will be

custom fabricated according to exact field measurements.

a. NewAcoustic: Microperforated ceiling membrane: ACM15 – Perfo 4 - white micro-perforated.

3. Ceiling Membrane/Technical:

a. Composition: Polyvinyl chloride b. Dimensional Stability: From –20oF to 150oF c. Thickness: Between 5 mil and 8 mil depending on membrane finish d. Weight: Between .59 ounces to 1.05 ounces per sq. foot depending on

membrane finish. e. Tensile Strength: Between 2,000 pounds and 2,500 pounds per sq. inch f. Width: From 54” to 84”, depending upon colors/finishes. g. CAUTION: The membrane is like a diaphragm; it will react to the changes of

pressure within the space, and/or the plenum. HVAC must be balanced in order to have the same pressure above and below the membrane.

4. Harpoon: A semi-rigid PVC harpoon is pre-welded onto the perimeter of each

ceiling membrane.

a. Concealed


5. Rings: PVC or Sintra reinforcement rings (circular, square, rectangular, etc.) are to be used for perforations through the membrane for lighting fixtures, sprinkler heads, HVAC registers, etc.

6. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fabric, materials, substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of stretched-fabric systems.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of uniform size with balanced borders at opposite edges within a given area.

B. Before installation, allow fabric to adjust and become stable in spaces where it will be

installed in accordance with stretched-fabric system manufacturer's written instructions. Acclimatize fabric for minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature and humidity conditions indicated for spaces when occupied for their intended use.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install stretched-fabric systems in accordance with system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Provide continuous perimeter frames of each profile indicated, designed to be

inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing.

2. Install framing around penetrations. 3. Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate. 4. Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of stretched-fabric system

frame. 5. Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners or both to support

system and prevent deformation of components. 6. Install stretched-fabric systems vertical and plumb, unless otherwise indicated;

true in plane; and with fabric square to the grain with straight, parallel seams. 7. Install jointed panels with butt joints and reveals as indicated.

B. Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without

joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated.

1. Fabric Direction: Run fabric as indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabric Sequence: Maintain sequence of fabric drops; match and level fabric

pattern and grain. 3. Fabric Alignment: Install fabric with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or

weave aligns with adjacent panels. 4. Fabric Seams: Manufacturer's standard sewn seams; seam dimensions and

locations as indicated on Drawings.


5. Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated.

6. Stretch fabric taught and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Acclimatize and restretch if recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging.

3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Edge Straightness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

B. Variation from Alignment with Surfaces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

C. Variation from Level or Slope: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

D. Variation of Panel-Joint Width: Not more than 1/16 inch from hairline. 3.05 CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.



SECTION 09 65 13

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES



1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient stair accessories. 3. Resilient molding accessories.


1. Section 09 65 19 "Rubber Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile. 2. Section 09 65 36 “Static Dissipative Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring” designed to

control electrostatic discharge. 3. Section 09 68 13 “Tile Carpeting” 4. Section 09 65 66 "Rubber Athletic Flooring" for resilient floor coverings for use in

athletic-activity or support areas. 1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's

standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings. 1.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of

each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Santa Monica, CA 09 65 13 - 1

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg For more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermoset Rubber Wall Base by Johnsonite or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. f. Flexco, Inc. g. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. h. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. i. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. j. PRF USA, Inc. k. Roppe Corporation, USA. l. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Straight (flat or toeless).

C. Minimum Thickness0.080 inch


D. Height: 4 inches

E. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long

F. Outside Corners: Preformed

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: Matte

I. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the Finish Legend.

2.02 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES

A. Resilient Stair Treads:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Norament Resilient Round Stair treads by Nora or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. d. Flexco, Inc. e. Johnsonite. f. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. g. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. h. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. i. PRF USA, Inc. j. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). k. Roppe Corporation, USA. l. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset)

2. Surface Design:

a. Class 1, Smooth (flat). b. Class 2, Pattern: Raised-disc design.

3. Manufacturing Method: Group 2, tread with contrasting color for the visually

impaired.

C. Nosing Style: Square.

D. Nosing Height: 1.77”.

E. Thickness: 0.18” maximum overall thickness.

F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.

G. Risers: Smooth, flat, toeless, height and length to cover risers

1. Thickness: < 0.16 inch.


H. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.

I. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the Finish Legend.

2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), except that adhesive for rubber stair treads shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less.

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread

manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by

resilient stair tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to

ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.


2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.

Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where

they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately

before installation. 3.03 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with

tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.04 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:


1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread

contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint

between units.

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product

installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from

construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive and surface blemishes from resilient stair

treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply three coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



SECTION 09 65 19

RUBBER TILE FLOORING


A. Section Includes rubber floor tile.


1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.

2. Section 09 65 36 "Static-Control Resilient Flooring" for resilient floor coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and chemical-bonding compounds, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives and chemical-bonding compounds, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient tile flooring, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard.

C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,

doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

F. Product Schedule: For floor tile.

G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

H. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or

certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility RUBBER TILE FLOORING Santa Monica, CA 09 65 19 - 1

1.04 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS


1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,

color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:


B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

2.02 RUBBER FLOOR TILE

A. Basis of Design: Subject to requirements, provide Noraplan-Degree Rubber Floor Tile by Nora.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class I- homogeneous rubber compound 913 with a

random scattered design.

C. Hardness: Not less than 85 as required by ASTM F 1344, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240.

D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

E. Thickness: 0.12 inches.


F. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

G. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the Finish Legend. 2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and

substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:

1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.

a. Color: As selected by Authority from manufacturer's full range to contrast

with floor tile. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION



specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and

hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.


Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer[ and as follows].

Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method

recommended by access flooring manufacturer.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to

be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately

before installation. 3.03 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same

sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and

permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend

floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint

covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.


H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to

substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with

welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from


D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



Expo Operations and Maintenance Facility RUBBER TILE FLOORING Santa Monica, CA 09 65 19 - 6

SECTION 09 65 36

STATIC-DISSIPATIVE VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING


A. Section Includes static-dissipative, vinyl composition floor tile.


1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with static-control resilient floor coverings.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage.

a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms

when test specimens are tested surface to ground. b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms

when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.

2. Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent relative humidity with conductive footwear.

3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD-101C/4046.1.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For static-control adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts,

edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns. 2. Submit grounding diagram showing location of grounding strips and connections.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of floor covering indicated and of size

indicated below:

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility STATIC-DISSIPATIVE VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING Santa Monica, CA 09 65 36 - 1

1. Floor Tile: Full-size units.

F. Product Schedule: For floor covering

G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for floor coverings.

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance

manuals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,

color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or

certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.



A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods:



B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F .

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STATIC-DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

A. Static-Dissipative, Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: ASTM F 1066 (vinyl composition floor tile, nonasbestos formulated), Class 2 (through-pattern tile).



a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Static Dissipative SDT.

2. Thickness: Not less than 0.125 inch. 3. Size: 12 by 12 inches. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Authority from full range of industry colors.

2.02 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Static-Control Adhesive: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type that maintains

electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.

C. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

D. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that

maintains electrical continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.

E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, static-control liquid floor polish products as recommended by floor covering manufacturer.





specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion or static-control characteristics of floor coverings.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings and electrical continuity of floor covering systems.



hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor

covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method

recommended by access flooring manufacturer.

1. Seal between access floor tiles and room perimeter.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they

are to be installed.

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately

before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install static-control resilient floor covering according to manufacturer's written instructions and with oversight by manufacturer's representative.


B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond

perimeter of static-control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground connections.

C. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

Extend floor covering to center of door openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items

in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of static-control adhesive

applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.04 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half floor tile at perimeter.

1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting floor tiles from cartons in same

sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles.

1. Lay static-dissipative, vinyl composition floor tiles with grain direction alternating

in adjacent floor tiles (basket-weave pattern). 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to test electrical resistance of static-control resilient floor covering systems for compliance with requirements.

1. Arrange for testing after installation static-control adhesives have fully cured and

floor covering systems have stabilized to ambient conditions and after ground connections are completed.

2. Arrange for testing of floor coverings after performing floor polish procedures.

B. Static-control resilient floor coverings will be considered defective if they do not pass


tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering

installation:

1. Remove static-control adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from


1. Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings. 2. If recommended in writing by manufacturer, apply protective static-control floor

polish formulated to maintain or enhance floor covering's electrical properties to floor covering surfaces that are free from soil, static-control adhesive, and surface blemishes.

a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved by

manufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces floor coverings' effectiveness for static control.

D. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.



SECTION 09 65 66

RUBBER ATHLETIC FLOORING


A. Section Includes interlocking, rubber floor tile.


1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed with flooring.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient athletic flooring, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore Standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following:

1. Border tiles. 2. Floor patterns. 3. Locations of floor inserts for athletic equipment installed through flooring.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of flooring indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, and pattern of flooring indicated, 6-

inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.

F. Maintenance Data: For flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish no fewer than 2 percent of each type, color, pattern, and size

of floor tile installed, but no less than one box of each. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility RUBBER ATHLETIC FLOORING Santa Monica, CA 09 65 66 - 1

B. Store materials to prevent deterioration. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Adhesively Applied Products:

1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. 4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer

recommends longer period in writing.

B. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with floor inserts for gymnasium equipment.


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient athletic flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.02 RUBBER FLOOR TILE: RBF-1

A. Basis of Design: Subject to requirements, provide Triumph Multi-Functional and Sport Rubber Tile Flooring by Johnsonite, or a comparable product by

1. Amarco Products. 2. American Floor Products Company, Inc. 3. ECORE International. 4. Flexco. 5. Horner Flooring Company, Inc. 6. Mondo America Inc. 7. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division.

B. Description: Athletic flooring consisting of modular rubber tiles with precision cut,

interlocking edges, for free-lay installation.

C. Material: Recycled-rubber compound with minimum 50 percent recycled content.

D. Traffic-Surface Texture: Smooth.

E. Size: 24 inches square.


F. Thickness: 3/8 inch.

G. Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on Finish Legend.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for

substrate and conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of flooring.



hardeners. 2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Proceed with

installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5. 3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

1) Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and

perform no fewer than two tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed


with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions

in substrates.

E. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing.

1. Do not install flooring until they are same temperature as space where they are to

be installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.

C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

3.04 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

B. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as

manufactured and packaged if so numbered.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

D. Adhered Flooring: Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering


at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in

writing by manufacturer.

B. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with

plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring.



SECTION 09 67 11

FLUID APPLIED CONCRETE SEALER


A. This Section includes the following:

1. Clear penetrating liquid floor treatment formulated to seal, densify and harden finished concrete slab surfaces in interior locations identified on Drawings.

2. Protection of concrete slab surfaces prior to sealer application.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for placing and finishing cast-in-place concrete receiving sealer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Including product specifications; preparation and application instructions; recommendations, storage and handling requirements; and maintenance instructions.

B. Certification: By the manufacturer that products supplied comply with regulations

controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Installer shall be capable of providing an adequate number of skilled workers

trained and familiar with application requirements. 2. Installer shall provide manufacturer's field technician on site to advise on

application procedures.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of air-pollution regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing and application.

B. Store materials in cool, dry area. Protect from freezing.


A. Concrete Slab Curing and Protection:

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility FLUID APPLIED CONCRETE SEALER Santa Monica, CA 09 67 11 - 1

1. Concrete flatwork indicate to receive finish sealer shall be cured with new and unwrinkled, nonstaining, high-quality curing paper in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, or other method approved in writing by the concrete finish coating material manufacturer.

a. Coordinate concrete curing method with areas indicated to receive concrete

finish sealer. b. Do not use liquid curing materials over concrete surfaces to receive concrete

finish sealers.

2. Protect concrete surfaces receiving finish sealer in a manner acceptable sealer manufacturer and applicator, that ensures that surface of concrete is maintained in condition without damage, deterioration, discoloring or other surface imperfections that would impair aesthetic effect of final finish.

3. Close spaces to traffic during concrete finish coating application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

4. Where partitions, equipment, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, and other items are indicated for installation on top of coated concrete finishes, apply finish coats before these items are installed.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Maintain a temperature of not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F in

spaces to receive concrete finish coatings for at least 48 hours before application, during application, and for at least 48 hours after application, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After post-application period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

2. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for moisture content, humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting coatings performance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sealer: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. Comply with the following:

1. Aqueous blend of silicates complying with ASTM D-4060-90. 2. Penetrating sealer must not exhibit a wear index greater than 0.6 when 500

cycles of abrasion with abrasive wheel number C-18 are recorded. 3. Product shall be approved by USDA for food handling facilities and for resistance

to chemical staining. 4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may


a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Intraseal.

b. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. d. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal.



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with applicator present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting application of concrete sealer. Do not proceed with application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Notify the Authority of problems anticipated prior to application of concrete

sealer. 2. Start of application will be construed as the applicator's acceptance of surfaces

within that particular area. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of concrete sealer. Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could prevent penetration of concrete sealers.

B. Fill voids and cavities in concrete slabs using materials compatible with concrete and

sealer, and that will not delay construction schedule.

C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of concrete sealer. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of concrete sealer being deposited on surfaces.

D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply concrete sealer until sealants for joints

adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion

and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, concrete sealer, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants

and complete surface repairs. 2. Apply to concrete as soon as feasible but not until concrete has cured for at least

28 days. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms;

rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Minimum Application Rate: Apply at no less than the manufacturer's recommended

coating rate. 3.04 CLEANING


A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas.

B. Immediately clean concrete sealer from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or

damaged by sealer application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by sealer application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION 09 67 11.01


SECTION 09 67 23

RESINOUS FLOORING



1. Industrial resinous flooring systems.


1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at joints in resinous flooring systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For liquid-applied flooring components,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.

E. Product Schedule: For resinous flooring.

F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

specified requirements.

G. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.

H. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system.

I. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of flooring systems required for this Project.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer

as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility RESINOUS FLOORING Santa Monica, CA 09 67 23 - 1

C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 48-inch- square floor area selected by Authority.

a. Include 48-inch length of integral cove base with inside and outside corner.

2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Authority's review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate

permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.


A. VOC Content of Liquid-Applied Flooring Components: Not more than 100 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.02 INDUSTRIAL RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Basis of Design: Provide Rhino Extreme FR 21-50 by Rhino Linings Corporation

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As indicated by product designation listed on Finish Legend. 2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance. 3. Overall System Thickness: 1/16 inch minimum.

C. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following

minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Shore Hardness: 45, plus or minus 5, per ASTM D-2240. 2. Tensile Strength: 1400-1600 per ASTM D-412. 3. Specific Gravity: 1.10 - 1.12 grams/cc per ASTM D-792. 4. Elongation: 250 - 300 percent per ASTM D-412 5. Water Absorption: 1.0 percent per ASTM D-570.


6. Flammability:

a. Pass per FMV-302 b. Pass per Cal 117 c. V-O per UL-94

7. Dielectric Strength: 300 volts/mil per ASTM D-149 8. Volume Resistancy: 6 x 10 ohm/inches per ASTM D-257 9. Dielectric Constant: 5.4 MHz per ASTM D-150 10. Dissipation Factor: 0.058 MHz per ASTM D-150 11. Cathodic Disbonding: Pass per ASTM G-8 12. Eclometer Adhesion Pull Test: Pass per ASTM D-4541

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.

B. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and primer and body coats indicated.

1. Formulation Description: High solids.

C. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring

manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,

efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface,

contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring

manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within

acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours.

b. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.

c. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed


with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within

acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous

flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from

reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.02 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous

flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.

D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring.

Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: Height indicated on Drawings.

E. Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is

cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

F. Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.

G. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids

in surface of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.

H. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.



A. Core Sampling: At the direction of Authority and at locations designated by Authority, take one core sample per 1000 sq. ft. of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each sample that fails to comply with requirements, take two additional samples. Repair damage caused by coring and correct deficiencies.

B. Material Sampling: Authority may at any time and any number of times during

resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.

1. Authority will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials

being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data.

3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.



SECTION 09 68 13

TILE CARPETING


A. Section includes modular, carpet tile.


1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.

2. Section 09 69 00 "Access Flooring" for installation of tile carpeting on access flooring system.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3:

a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

b. For installation adhesive, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations

where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required.

Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample, adhered to access flooring panel. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long

Samples.

E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility TILE CARPETING Santa Monica, CA 09 68 13 - 1

F. Sustainability: Provide the Statement of the Achievement Level the carpet has attained for Gold, 52 to 70 points, based on specific Sustainable Attribute Performance for all product stages according to ANSI/NSF 140.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer.

H. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency.

I. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

J. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal

products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.



1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type

indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of

assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are

sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of

carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.


1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual

traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling,

snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET TILE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

B. Color: Match Authority's samples.

C. Pattern: Match Authority's samples.

D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.

E. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials.

F. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.

G. Size: As indicated on Finish Legend.

H. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

I. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

J. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to

ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646. 4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 3 lbf according to ASTM D 1335. 5. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 lbf/in. according to ASTM D 3936. 6. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as

determined by physical measurement. 7. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 8. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 9. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to

AATCC 165. 10. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units)

according to AATCC 16, Option E. 11. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive

bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.

12. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 13. Emissions: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product


requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. 14. Emissions: Provide carpet tile that complies with the product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesion: Use LokDots adhesion system by Shaw.

C. Rubber Transition Strips: Vinyl transitions to match carpet of profile and width shown,

of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the

following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. For raised access flooring systems, verify the following:

1. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any. 2. Underlayment surface is flat, smooth, evenly planed, tightly jointed, and free of

irregularities, gaps greater than 1/8 inch, protrusions more than 1/32 inch, and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.


C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are

incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive

manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing

carpet tile. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Install carpet tiles with LokDots system.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-

in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,

removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor

Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



SECTION 09 69 00

ACCESS FLOORING



1. Access flooring panels and understructure. 2. Sealants.

B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:

1. Static-dissipative VCT, furnished under Section 09 65 36

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for sealers and curing compounds

applied to concrete floor or deck surface receiving access flooring support pedestals.

2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants applied to joints and penetrations abutting access flooring and in plenum spaces.

3. Division 09 Section “Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for carpet edging and resilient wall base.

4. Division 09 Section “Tile Carpeting” for carpeting installed over access flooring. 5. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for pressure

testing of underfloor plenum. 6. Division 23 Section "Underfloor Airway Distribution System” for variable air

volume diffusers (VAV terminal units) and constant air volume diffusers (CV terminal units) installed in access floor panels.

7. Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for connection to ground of access flooring understructure.

8. Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" for coordination with understructure.

9. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices” for power outlet and voice and data communication outlet box and cover modules installed in access floor panels.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C1048 - Standard specification for heat-treated glass-kind HS, kind FT coated and uncoated.

2. ASTM C1172-91 - Standard application for laminated architectural flat glass 3. ASTM C1036 - Type 1, transparent quality Q3-glazing select quality

B. Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA):

1. A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors."

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. UL-410 - Anti-slip certifications.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility ACCESS FLOORING Santa Monica, CA 09 69 00 - 1

A. Access Flooring System with Sealed HVAC Plenum: Assemblies composed of modular floor panels on pedestals with or without stringers where the space beneath the access floor panels will be used as a conditioned air delivery plenum.

1. Penetrations and joints separating the plenum and spaces above the access floor

panels are sealed to prevent air leakage from being detected, as determined by testing method indicated.

2. The air plenum is delivered substantially clean, as determined by inspection method indicated.


A. Structural Performance: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by testing manufacturer's current standard products according to referenced procedures in CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors":

1. Concentrated Loads: Provide floor panels, including those with cutouts, capable

of withstanding a concentrated design load of not less than that indicated in Part 2 Articles for each Type of access flooring indicated, with a top-surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.10 and 0.010 inch according to CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated Loads."

2. Ultimate Loads: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding a minimum ultimate concentrated load indicated in Part 2 Articles for each Type of access flooring indicated, without failing, according to CISCA A/F, Section II, "Ultimate Loading."

3. Rolling Loads: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding rolling loads of the magnitude indicated in Part 2 Articles for each Type of access flooring indicated, with a combination of local and overall deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch after exposure to rolling load over CISCA A/F Path A or B, whichever path produces the greatest top-surface deformation, according to CISCA A/F, Section III, "Rolling Loads."

4. Stringer Load Testing: Provide stringers, without panels in place, capable of withstanding a concentrated load of not less than that indicated in Part 2 Articles for each Type of access flooring indicated, at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch, as determined per CISCA A/F, Section IV, "Stringer Load Testing."

5. Pedestal Axial Load Test: Provide pedestal assemblies, without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding a 5000 lbf axial load per pedestal, according to CISCA A/F, Section V, "Pedestal Axial Load Test."

6. Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: Provide pedestal assemblies, without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding an overturning moment per pedestal of 1000 lbf x inches, according to CISCA A/F, Section VI, "Pedestal Overturning Moment Test."

B. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: Provide access flooring system capable of

withstanding an impact load of not less than that indicated in Part 2 Articles for each Type of access flooring indicated, when dropped from 36 inches onto a 1-sq. in. area located anywhere on panel, without failing. Failure is defined as collapse of access flooring system.

C. Seismic Performance: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding the

effects of seismic motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

1. See Structural Drawings for seismic load requirements.


1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For pedestal installation adhesive, and joint and penetration sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3: For carpet and installation adhesive, documentation indicating compliance with specified requirements.

3. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For steel products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Include layout of access flooring system and relationship to

adjoining Work based on field-verified dimensions.

1. Details and sections with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, and understructure.

2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

a. CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors." shall be

used as a guideline for presenting load performance product information for comparable product manufacturers.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of flooring material and exposed floor

finish indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of flooring material and exposed finish indicated.

1. Resilient Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories but not less than 12

inches in length. 2. Exposed Metal Accessories: 12 inches in length. 3. Provide one complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for

each type of access flooring system required.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of access flooring system, signed by product manufacturer.


H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, or performed by access flooring manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of flooring material and exposed finish.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain access flooring system through one source from a single manufacturer.


C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide structural access flooring system components that are classified as noncombustible in compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C.

1. For access flooring system components not classified as noncombustible,

comply with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:

1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and install access flooring to comply with

NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.

E. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their underside with panel type and concentrated-load rating and country of manufacture.

F. Preliminary Access Flooring Coordination Conference: Before starting preparation of

shop drawings, conduct conference at location determined by Contractor for purpose of coordinating building mechanical, electrical, walls, partitions and other building systems and elements with access flooring construction. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to access flooring construction and systems including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Allow not less than 4 hours for conference. 2. Engage access flooring manufacturer’s representative to present an educational

program the includes, but is not limited to, the following topics:

a. Scheduling work of lower tier contractors. Issues addressed shall include access flooring flatness tolerances; coordinating, laying out and marking location of critical building elements; sequencing construction installation operations; protecting installed work; and cleaning.

b. Do’s and don’ts. c. Construction loads including static, rolling, ultimate and impact loads.

3. Meet with Authority; Architect; Authority's insurer if applicable; testing and

inspecting agency representative; plumbing systems Installer, HVAC systems Installer, high and low voltage electrical systems installers; exterior and interior wall and partition Installers; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects access flooring, including installers of access flooring.

4. Review methods and procedures related to access flooring installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to access flooring system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review connection with mechanical and electrical systems. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,


Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Include multiple conferences to address work of trades prior to and after installation of access floor panels.

4. Meet with Authority; Architect; Authority's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; plumbing systems Installer, HVAC systems Installer, high and low voltage electrical systems installers; exterior and interior wall and partition Installers; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects access flooring, including installers of access flooring.

5. Examine the following substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and anchoring.

a. Concrete slab and deck prior to pedestal installation. b. Access flooring after panel installation.

6. Review structural loading limitations of access flooring during all phases of the

Work. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for access flooring system during and

after installation. 8. Review access flooring understructure and panel repair procedures after

installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install access flooring until spaces are enclosed, subfloor has been sealed, ambient temperature is between 35 and 95 deg F, and relative humidity between 20 and 80 percent.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction

contiguous with access flooring by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to prevent interference with access flooring pedestals.

B. Mark pedestal locations on subfloor by use of a grid, with a module equal to the width

of one floor panel in both directions, to enable mechanical and electrical work to proceed without interfering with access flooring pedestals.

C. Proceed with installation only after completion of other construction within affected

spaces.

D. Coordinate size of cutouts in access panels with covers, boxes, grilles, diffusers and other floor set components specified in other sections and furnished by other manufactures.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective coverings for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Not less than 2 percent of each type, but not less than 3, of each of the following:

a. Each type of access panel without finish or cutouts. b. Each type of access panel with factory laminated finish.


c. Each type of access panel with each type of diffuser and electrical devices cutout.

d. Each type of stringer.

2. Not less than 2 percent of each type, but not less than 20, of each of the following:

a. Each type of pedestal and head. b. Each type of fastener.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide steel access floor panel and understructure products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 30 percent.

2.02 FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE

A. Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels complying with the following requirements

1. One person, using a portable lifting device, can interchange modular panels with

other field panels without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure: 2. Nominal Panel Size: 24 by 24 inches. 3. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with

squareness tolerances expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from corner to corner:

a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.010 inch of required size, with a

squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.015 inch. b. Flatness:

1) Plus or minus 0.035 inch, measured on a diagonal on top of panel. 2) Plus or minus 0.025 inch, measured along edges on top of panel.

4. Comply with following additional requirements for each Type of access flooring

system indicated Part 2 Articles below for:

a. Method of attachment. b. Performance requirements.

5. Floor panels shall be permanently marked with manufacturer’s name, product

identification, manufacturing date and country-of-origin. Removable Product ID stickers are not acceptable

B. Cementitious-Filled, Formed-Steel Panels: Fabricated with die-cut flat top sheet and

die-formed and stiffened bottom pan formed from cold-rolled steel sheet joined together by resistance welding to form an enclosed assembly, with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish. Fully grout internal spaces of completed units with manufacturer's standard cementitious fill.

C. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height

adjustment, and head (cap); made of steel.


1. Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications. 2. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 36 sq. in. of bearing area. 3. Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated.

Permanently attach to base plate. 4. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine

adjustments in height over a range of not less than 2 inches and for locking at a selected height, so deliberate action is required to change height setting and vibratory displacement is prevented.

5. Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated and complying with requirements for each Type of access flooring system indicated below.

D. Stringer Systems: Where indicated in Part 2 Articles below for each Type of access

flooring system, provide modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with pedestal heads and form a grid pattern placing stringers under each edge of each floor panel and a pedestal under each corner of each floor panel. Protect steel components with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant paint finish.

1. Bolted Stringers: System of main and cross stringers connected to pedestals

with threaded fasteners accessible from above. 2.03 ACCESS FLOORING SYSTEM (STEEL PANELS)

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with the requirements provide Tate Access Floors, Inc.; ConCore 1000/Posilock with Type 5EF Pedestals, or comparable products by one of the following manufacturers:

1. InterfaceAR. 2. Maxcess Technologies, Inc.

B. Floor Panels: Provide cementitious-filled, formed-steel panels complying with the

following:

1. Method of Panel Attachment to Understructure: By bolting to pedestal heads. Provide panels with holes drilled in corners to align precisely with threaded holes in pedestal heads and to accept countersunk screws with heads flush with top of panel.

a. Provide fasteners held captive to panels.

2. Concentrated-Load Performance: 1000 lbf. 3. Ultimate-Load Performance: 3250 lbf. 4. CISCA A/F Wheel 1 Rolling Load: 800 lbf. 5. CISCA A/F Wheel 2 Rolling Load: 600 lbf. 6. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: 150 lbf.

C. Pedestal Heads:

1. Supporting As-Manufactured Panel Corners: Designed for direct, bolted support

of floor panels.

a. Provide head with four holes aligned with holes in floor panels for positive bolting of panels to pedestals.

2. Supporting Cut Portion of Panels: Designed for direct, nonbolted support of

panels.


a. Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and panels.

2.04 ACCESS FLOORING SYSTEM (GLASS PANELS)

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with the requirements provide Tate Access Floors, Inc.; ConCore 1000/Bolted Stringer (less floor panels) with Type 5EF Pedestals for 1st Floor or comparable products by another manufacturer:

B. Floor Panels: See Article “Glass Floor Panels” below. Comply with the following:

1. Method of Panel Attachment to Understructure: By gravity.

C. Pedestals:

1. Head: Designed for direct, bolted support of stringers.

a. Provide head with holes for attachment of stringers.

D. Stringer: Bolted.

1. Stringer Concentrated-Load Performance: 350 lbf. 2. Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers to

deaden sound, to seal off underfloor cavity from above, and to maintain panel alignment and position.

3. Provide stringers that support each edge of each panel. 2.05 GLASS FLOOR PANELS

A. Provide glass floor panels by Jockimo Advanced Architectural Products for access flooring in locations indicated on Drawings.

1. Panel Material: Clear tempered laminated glass as follows:

a. Top Layer: Tempered Jockimo Anti-Slip GlassGrit. b. Second Layer: Polylam (urethane) or EVA. c. Third Layer: Tempered glass. d. Fourth Layer: Polylam (urethane) or EVA. e. Fifth Layer: Tempered glass f. No opaque materials on top surface.

2. Performance: Outside surfaces shall have scratch resistant coating. 3. Panel Edge Treatment:

a. Edges: Polished smooth. b. Vertical Corners: Radiused with protective edge.

2.06 FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS

A. Where carpet tiles are indicated on Drawings provide bare panels without factory-applied floor covering on traffic surfaces.

B. Where resilient tiles are indicated on Drawings provide factory-applied floor tiles of

type indicated that are laminated by access flooring manufacturer to tops of floor panels.

1. See Division 09 Section “Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring” for static

dissipative floor tile furnished for installation under this Section.


C. Edging: Where carpet tile meets resilient flooring and glass flooring panels, see

Division 09 Section “Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for carpet and tile or sheet flooring joiner.

D. Resilient Wall Base: See Division 09 Section “Resilient Wall Base and Accessories."

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor.

1. Provide adhesive with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24.)

B. Sealants:

1. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories

that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

a. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). b. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant

manufacturer.

2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of exposed materials adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets.

Provide reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements.

1. Number, Size, Shape, and Location: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seal cutouts to prevent concrete core from releasing mineral dust. 3. Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, if size of

cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. Furnish removable covers for grommets.

4. Provide foam-rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables.

D. Electrical Power and Voice and Data Communication Outlet Box and Cover Modules: See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices”

1. Locate cutouts in center of panel quadrant, unless otherwise indicated.

E. HVAC Diffusers: See Division 23 air distribution sections.

1. Locate cutouts in center of panel quadrant, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cavity Dividers: Provide manufacturer's standard metal dividers located where

indicated to divide underfloor cavities or create air highways.

G. Vertical Closures (Fasciae): Where underfloor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls or other construction, provide manufacturer's standard metal-closure plates with factory-applied finish

H. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type required

for specified panels. Provide four lifting devices of each type required.


I. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for

supporting panel edge and forming transition between access flooring and adjoining floor coverings at same level as access flooring.


A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits, and debris that might interfere with adhesive attachment of pedestals.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Preinstallation Adhesive Field Test: Before installing pedestals, field test their

adhesion to subfloor surfaces as follows:

1. In areas representative of each subfloor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same adhesive and methods required for completed work.

2. Allow test installation to cure for 30 days, with a pressure of 25 lbf applied vertically to pedestals during this period.

3. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 2 inches into pedestal stems. Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base.

4. Proceed with installation only after tests show compliance with performance requirement specified for pedestals' capability to resist overturning moment.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean subfloor to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.

B. Do not install access flooring system components until they are same temperature as

space where they are to be installed.

1. Move floor access flooring panel components and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 24 hours in advance of installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.

B. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended in writing by access flooring

manufacturer to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.

C. Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat, level, and to proper


height.

D. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do

not force panels into place.

1. Resilient Tiled Panels: Install panels with patterns oriented in basket weave pattern.

F. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids

greater than 1/8 inch where panels abut vertical surfaces.

G. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities at a remote location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring already installed.

1. Seal cut edges to prevent concrete core from releasing mineral dust. Use sealer

complying with manufacturer's recommendations.

H. Scribe and install underfloor-cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces, and seal with mastic.

I. Scribe vertical closures (fascia) to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finished-

floor surfaces. Set in mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.

J. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum

subfloor area, as installation of floor panels proceeds.

K. Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams, penetrations, and perimeter to control air leakage as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

L. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and

within the following tolerances:

1. In any 10-foot distance as follows:

a. Carpeted Floors: Plus or minus 1/9 inch. b. Tiled Floors: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

2. From a level plane over entire access flooring area as follows:

a. Carpeted Floors: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. b. Tiled Floors: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.

B. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous

sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or

that do not comply with specified requirements.


SECTION 09 84 33

SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS


A. Section includes shop-fabricated sound absorbing panel units tested for acoustical performance.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of core material, and mounting indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For installation adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

C. Shop Drawings: For sound-absorbing wall units. Include mounting devices and

details; details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge and core materials.

1. Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave and pattern

matching.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Core Material: 12-inch- square Sample at corner. 2. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and

mounting methods.

E. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by sound-absorbing wall units including the

following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels.

3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to

sound-absorbing wall units.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS Santa Monica, CA 09 84 13 - 1

F. Product Certificates: For each type of sound-absorbing wall unit, from manufacturer.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

H. Maintenance Data: For sound-absorbing wall units to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.


A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to 2

percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards. 2. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but no

fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sound-absorbing wall units from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sound-absorbing wall units meeting the

following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and

authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Authority 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the



A. Comply with fabric and sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-

controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until a lighting level of not less

than 50 fc is provided on surfaces to receive the units.

C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect sound-absorbing wall units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

D. Field Measurements: Verify locations of sound-absorbing wall units and actual

dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication. 1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound-absorbing wall units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Acoustical performance. b. Warping of core.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL PANEL TW-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product Sound Silencer Porous Expanded Polypropylene (PEPP) Acoustical Wall Panels by Acoustical Surfaces Inc. or comparable PEPP product by another manufacturer:

1. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard adhesive, secured to

substrate. 2. Edge Profile: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 3. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of 0.45 according to

ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. 4. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Panel Height: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Color: As indicated on Drawings.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General: Use manufacturer's standard construction.

B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:

1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width.


4. Squareness from corner to corner. 5. Chords, radii, and diameters.


A. Examine fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of sound-absorbing wall units.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install sound-absorbing wall units in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for

installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.

C. Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch wide. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.



SECTION 09 84 33

SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM CAP


A. Section includes sound barrier mullion trim caps prviding sound transmission control at curtain wall.


1. Section 07 90 00 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealing. 2. Section 08 44 13 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall" for curtain wall construction. 3. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior wall construction..

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sound barrier wall end cap system.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include typical dimensioned cross-sections at location where gypsum board

partition terminates at perimeter curtain wall, indicating:

a. Dimensions b. Finishes.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12

inches long.

D. Qualification Data: For installer.

E. Product Test Reports: For each sound barrier mullion trim cap assembly, for ASTM E 90 tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of aluminum extrusions and anodizing shall be ISO-9001 certified.

B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are

trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: ASTM E 90 testing to be performed by laboratory accredited by IAS as complying with ISO/IEC Standard 17025.


A. Do not deliver sound barrier mullion trim caps until spaces to receive them are clean,

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM CAP Santa Monica, CA 09 84 53 - 1

dry, and ready for their installation.

B. Store sound barrier mullion trim caps in original undamaged packaging inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sound barrier mullion trim caps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years limited warranty from date of Substantial

Completion. 2. Limited warranty does not cover adjacent products or improper installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sound barrier mullion trim cap system by Mull-it-Over Products. No known equal.

2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide sound barrier mullion trim caps of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.

1. Furnish units with sufficient additional length to allow for field trimming to required

length to match variations in construction tolerances of adjacent systems 2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sound Transmission:

1. Single Sided Installations: STC 51 or better. 2. Double Sided Installations: STC 57 or better.

2.04 SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM CAP

A. Sound Barrier Mullion Trim Cap:

1. Product: MULL-it-OVER Products, Mullion Trim Cap.

B. Profile: As shown in Drawings. 2.05 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Extrusions:

1. Thickness: 0.125 inches 2. Profile: As selected and approved by Authority to allow solid attachment and

fastening to partition wall framing.

B. Sound Absorbing Foam:


1. Resistant to smoke, flame, and microbial growth. 2. Fire Rating: ASTM E 84, Class 1. 3. Fungi Resistance: zero rating per ASTM G 21.

C. Compressible Foam: Between edge of extrusion and interior face of curtain wall

glass.

1. Thickness: Standard 5/16 inch, compressible to 1/4 inch, or larger thickness to accommodate larger mullion deflection.

D. Fasteners:

1. Self tapping or appropriate threaded fastener 2. Compatible with all materials with which fasteners will come into contact such

that they will not cause galvanic corrosion.

E. Snap Cover: Snap-on fastener cover.

F. Acoustical Sound Sealant: Acrylic latex based. 2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide necessary and related parts and tools for complete installation. 2.07 FABRICATION

A. Extrusions and generic profiles to be shipped in custom lengths as required to meet project requirements or shipped in standard incremental foot lengths and cut to exact length on jobsite.

2.08 FINISHES

A. Exposed surfaces: Match glazed aluminum curtain wall finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls nad adjacent curtain wall for suitable conditions where sound barrier

wall end cap will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Measure and cut sound barrier wall end cap to proper lengths.

B. Notch around horizontal mullions, sills, or other obstructions leaving appropriate gap for differential movement between sound barrier wall end cap and the obstruction.

C. Apply continuous bead of acoustical sealant to acoustical foam surface that will be in

contact with edge of gypsum board.

D. Place sound barrier wall end cap on vertical surface of gypsum board partition wall


and loosely install fasteners in top and bottom slotted holes of the wall end cap.

E. Plum wall end cap, leaving recommended gap spacing of minimum 5/16 inch between interior glass surface and aluminum return leg of wall end cap. Closed cell foam gasket material will be in contact with glass surface, allowing for differeintial movement between mullion cap and curtain wall. Increase gap spacing if recommended by engineer of record or by curtain wall manufacturer.

F. Tighten top and bottom fasteners to secure end cap.

G. Install additional fasteners at 12 inches on center, minimum.

H. Install snap cover to conceal fasteners.

I. Apply sealant at joints of dissimilar materials as needed.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After work of adjacent areas is completed, clean exposed surfaces with suitable cleaner that will not harm or attack finish.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect sound barrier wall end caps from damage prior to completion of construction.



SECTION 09 91 13

EXTERIOR PAINTING


A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal.


1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates

with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of

paint systems on interior substrates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of

topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility EXTERIOR PAINTING Santa Monica, CA 09 91 13 - 1

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Paint: 2 percent, but not less than 1 gal of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Authority will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Authority will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Authority at no added cost to Authority.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Authority specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


A. Basis of Design: Subject to requirements, provide paints and coatings by Glidden Professional, or a comparable product by one of the following:


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. Frazee Paint. 4. ICI Paints. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 7. Vista Paint.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

2.02 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As indicated on Drawings. 2.03 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4. 2.04 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Galvanized, for fluoropolymer topcoat. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Authority reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Authority will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint

materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Authority may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:

1. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are

removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using

methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates Not Galvanized: Clean field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.


G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory

primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until

cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and

Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Authority may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.



A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded

materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage

to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Authority, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.

B. Steel Substrates, High-Performance System:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System, MPI EXT 5.1C:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel

Framing" where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #161. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163. f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #164.

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by

topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.


2. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by

topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.

e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #164.



SECTION 09 91 23

INTERIOR PAINTING


A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Steel. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Gypsum board.


1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates

with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings" for high-performance and

special-use coatings. 3. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of

paint systems on exterior substrates. 4. Section 09 96 33 "High-Temperature Resistant Coatings."

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85

degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed

statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility INTERIOR PAINTING Santa Monica, CA 09 91 23 - 1

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss

of topcoat.


E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content.



1. Paint: 2 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.


application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Authority will designate items or areas required.











A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less

than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Glidden Professional by Glidden Co., or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. California Paints. 2. Frazee Paint. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 6. Vista Paint.


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

2.02 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."


1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and

product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


E. Colors: As indicated on Drawings

2.03 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4. 2.04 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. 2.05 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107. 2.06 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.

B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44.

C. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52

D. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43.

E. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54. 2.07 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS

A. Dry Fall, Water Based, for Galvanized Steel, Flat (Gloss Level 3): MPI #133. 2.08 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Epoxy Block Filler: MPI #116

B. Epoxy High Build (Gloss Level 6): MPI #98 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Authority reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Authority will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint

materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Authority may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with

existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.




reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.


apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if

moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using

methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."


G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple

coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until

cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and

Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation

covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Authority.

2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Authority may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing


and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage

to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Authority, and leave in an undamaged condition.


or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43.

2. Epoxy Coating System:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, , MPI #116. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy coating, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy High Build (Gloss), MPI #98.

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.

b. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133.


2. Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss

Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.


a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #154.

D. Steel Substrates, High-Performance System, MPI 5.1C:


a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel

Framing" where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #161. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163. f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #164.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System:

a. Prime Coat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133.

b. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #133.

2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss


Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss

Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65

units at 60 degrees), MPI #114.



.SECTION 09 96 23

GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS


A. This Section includes sacrificial clear graffiti-resistant coatings for the following vertical surface materials:

1. Precast concrete. 2. Metal surfaces including uncoated, field painted and prefinished.

B. Application:

1. Outside perimeter walls of building, as shown on Drawings.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete.” 2. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry” for concrete masonry units. 3. Division 07 Section "Water Repellents." 4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants. 5. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for field paints and coatings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for graffiti-resistant coating for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements.

B. Applicator Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the applicator complies

with requirements.

C. Certification by graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of VOCs.

D. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of graffiti-

resistant coating with requirements indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who employs only persons trained and approved by graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control

regulatory agency having jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOCs and use of hydrocarbon solvents.

C. Field Samples: Authority will select one representative surface for each substrate to

receive graffiti-resistant coating. Apply graffiti-resistant coating to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage as directed. Comply with application requirements of this Section.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS Santa Monica, CA 09 96 23 - 1

1. Obtain Authority's approval of field samples before applying graffiti-resistant coating.

2. Maintain field samples during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.


A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of graffiti-resistant coating under any of the following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer:

1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F. 2. Ambient temperature not more than 90 deg F. 3. Concrete masonry surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. 4. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted within 24 hours. 5. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 6. Windy condition exists that may cause graffiti-resistant coating to be blown onto

vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated.

B. Protect freshly coated surfaces from rain for two hours following application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEM

A. General: Provide products with no VOC’s.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. ProSoCo, Inc., Defacer Eraser, water-thin liquid for spray application. 2. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.; Sacrificial Graffiti Guard System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of graffiti-resistant coating. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface is sufficiently dry.

B. Test each type of surface according to graffiti-resistant coating manufacturer's written

instructions, to ensure suitability and desired results.

C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of graffiti-resistant coating. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of graffiti-resistant coating being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.

D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply graffiti-resistant coating until sealants for

joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion

and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, graffiti-resistant coating, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work.


E. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase

and delivery of products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by Authority to demonstrate the final effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned application. Proceed with work only after Authority approves test application or as otherwise directed.

1. Revisions of planned application, if any, as requested by Authority, will be by

Change Order if they constitute a departure from requirements of Contract Documents at the time of contracting.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Apply a spray, roller or brush applied coating of graffiti-resistant coating on surfaces indicated for treatment using equipment complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply a second coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized technical service representative to inspect and approve the substrate before application and to instruct the applicator on the product and application method to be used.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas.

B. Immediately clean graffiti-resistant coating from adjoining surfaces and surfaces

soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.



SECTION 09 96 33

HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS


A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-temperature-resistant coating systems on steel substrates.


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified

in this Section. 2. Division 09 painting Sections for special-use coatings and general field painting.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior coatings, documentation including

printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.



A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.


application of each coating system specified in Part 3.

a. Surfaces Greater Than 200 Sq. Ft.: Provide mockups of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Surfaces: Authority will designate items or areas required.



Expo Operations and Maintenance Facility HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS Santa Monica, CA 09 96 33 - 1








A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 104 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures

less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Glidden Professional or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. Cloverdale Paint. 4. Columbia Paint & Coatings. 5. Coronado Paint. 6. Diamond Vogel Paints. 7. Frazee Paint. 8. General Paint. 9. ICI Paints. 10. Insl-x. 11. Kwal Paint. 12. M.A.B. Paints. 13. Mills Paint. 14. PARA Paints. 15. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc. 16. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 17. Rodda Paint Co. 18. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the category indicated.

2.02 HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS, GENERAL


A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are

listed in "MPI Approved Products List."


1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 2. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 3. High Temperature Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 420 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior coatings shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors: Refer to Finish Legend.

2.03 HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS

A. Primer, Zinc-Rich, Inorganic: MPI #19.

B. Heat Resistant Enamel (Gloss Level 5 or 6): MPI #21.

C. Aluminum Paint, Heat-Resistant: MPI #2.

D. Aluminum Paint, High Heat: MPI #22. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Coating Materials: Authority reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Authority will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating

materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Authority may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with

existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates

and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.




reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.


apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 2. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-temperature-resistant coating systems according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.


3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until

cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Authority will engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with

coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage

by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Authority, and leave in an undamaged condition.


or defaced coated surfaces. 3.06 HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATING SCHEDULE

A. Heat-Resistant Enamel System:

1. Prime Coat: Primer recommended in writing for use in coating system and under conditions indicated by manufacturer of topcoat.

2. Top Coat(s): Heat resistant enamel (Gloss Level 5 or 6), MPI #21. Provide number of topcoats recommended in writing for use in coating system and under conditions indicated by manufacturer but not less than two.

B. Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coating System:

1. Prime Coat: Primer, zinc-rich, inorganic, MPI #19. 2. Top Coat(s): Primer, zinc-rich, inorganic, MPI #19. Provide number of topcoats

recommended in writing for use in coating system and under conditions indicated by manufacturer but not less than two.

C. Aluminum Heat-Resistant Paint System:

1. Prime Coat: Primer recommended in writing for use in coating system and under


conditions indicated by manufacturer of topcoat. 2. Top Coat(s): Aluminum paint, heat-resistant, MPI #2. Provide number of

topcoats recommended in writing for use in coating system and under conditions indicated by manufacturer but not less than two.

D. High-Heat-Resistant Coating System:

1. Prime Coat: Primer recommended in writing for use in coating system and under

conditions indicated by manufacturer of topcoat. 2. Top Coat(s): Aluminum paint, high heat, MPI #22. Provide number of topcoats

recommended in writing for use in coating system and under conditions indicated by manufacturer but not less than two.



SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE



1. Panel signs.


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.

2. Division 22 plumbing sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.

3. Division 23 HVAC sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.

4. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs. 5. Division 26 sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 6. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:

1. Aluminum. 2. Acrylic sheet. 3. Polycarbonate sheet. 4. Fiberglass sheet. 5. Die-cut vinyl characters and graphic symbols. Include representative samples of

available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:

1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional

character (letter, number, and graphic element). 2. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- long sections of

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SIGNAGE Santa Monica, CA 10 14 00 - 1

extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches. 3. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 4. Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 5. Fiberglass Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 6. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square[ including border]. 7. Photoluminescent Signs: Full-size sign. 8. Trim: 6-inch- long sections of each profile. 9. Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate

products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a

single manufacturer.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.


b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet:

1. Tensile Strength: 9600 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 638. 2. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 425,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 790. 3. Heat Deflection: 196 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 648. 4. Refractive Index: 1.49 per ASTM D- 542 5. Light Transmission: 90 percent per ASTM D-1003 6. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 3.8 x 10-5 in./in deg. F. per ASTM D-696

B. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with

pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. 2.02 PANEL SIGNS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Light Blocks Palette by Light Blocks

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat

under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 1/8 inch thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.

5. Custom Colors: Match Authority's samples. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above

surface with contrasting colors.

C. Exterior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.050 inch thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: As indicated.

a. Wall mounted.

5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Authority's sample.

D. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and

symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or


rounded shape.

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.

E. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic

devices into panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.

1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel. 2. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.

F. Subsurface Copy: Apply minimum 4-mil- thick vinyl copy to back face of clear acrylic

sheet forming panel face to produce precisely formed opaque image. Image shall be free of rough edges.

G. Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic

sheet. Fill resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

H. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with

pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to exposed face of panel sign.

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.

I. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended.

1. Custom Paint Colors: Match Authority's sample.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

2.05 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a


strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.06 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

A. Custom color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that item, including anchor inserts and electrical power, are sized and located to

accommodate signs.


A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of

distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where

applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except

where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered

surfaces. 5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- thick, concealed aluminum shim plates

with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.

6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

7. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.


ExpSanta Mon

o Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SIGNAGE ica, CA 10 14 00 - 6

C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.

1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface

indicated. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Authority.

1.01 SIGN SCHEDULE

(See following page)

Sign Type/Location Location/Mounting Message Size Letters/Braille Color Remarks Building Entrance Approximately 5 feet

above entrance landing immediately adjacent to door on strike side; in a position that is readily visible when the door is in either the open or closed position.

Pictogram International Symbol of Accessibility at Accessible Entrances

6- by 6-inch minimum

6- by 6-inch Pictogram

Pictogram on contrasting background

Comply with CalDAG Chapter 7, Articles 23 and 58.

Toilet Rooms Doors On door, centered 60-inch from the floor.

Pictogram International Symbol of Accessibility with either of the following placed directly below: MEN'S TOILET ROOM or WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM or UNISEX TOILET ROOM

Men's: Equilateral triangle 1/4-inches thick with edges 12-inches long and vertex pointing upward. Women's: 12-inch diameter circle 1/4-inch thick. Unisex: 12-inch diameter circle 1/4-inch thick with 1/4-inch triangle superimposed within circle.

Pictogram and letters sized to fit.

Pictogram and letters on contrasting background

Comply with CalDAG Chapter 7, Articles 42 and 58.

Permanent Rooms and Spaces

Centered 60-inches from the floor, on wall adjacent to door on strike side.

Sign shall identify room number

No less than 18 square inches area.

5/8-inch minimum, 2-inches maximum height, Arabic (sans serif block) letters and numerals with corresponding Grade II Braille

Letters on contrasting background

Comply with CalDAG Chapter 7, Article 58.

Expo Operations and Maintenance Facility SIGNAGE Santa Monica, CA 10 14 00 - 7

Sign Type/Location Location/Mounting Message Size Letters/Braille Color Remarks Exit Doors using key locking hardware in lieu of exit devices.

Mount on locking side of door.

THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS

1-inch high minimum block letters


Comply with CBC

Fire Doors, one-hour fire protection rating or greater

Mount on both sides of door.

FIRE DOOR - KEEP CLOSED - DO NOT OBSTRUCT



Comply with CBC

Stairway Identification

Approximately 5 feet above floor landing immediately adjacent to door on strike side; in a position that is readily visible when the door is in either the open or closed position.

signs shall identify the stairway location, indicate the upper and lower terminus of the stairway

12- by 12-inches minimum

1-inch high minimum Arabic (sans serif block) letters and numerals with corresponding Grade II Braille


Comply with CalDAG Chapter 7, Articles 22 and 58; and CBC.

Emergency Shutoff Valves for flammable fuels

Mount at each shutoff valve

[insert type of fuel] SHUTOFF VALVE



Comply with CBC

No Smoking (See Notes 2 & 3)

Mount at each door into space. Provide one additional sign for each 500 SF of floor area in space.

NO SMOKING 1-inch high minimum block letters


Comply with CBC

Room Capacity Locate at any room used for assembly purpose. Mount at each exit doorway.

ROOM CAPACITY - [insert number] OCCUPANTS



Comply with CBC

Notes: 1. Final message content, letter height, color and location shall be confirmed by Authority and Authorities having jurisdiction. Table indicates general requirements; see references cited for detailed requirements. 2. Caution sign at areas containing or dispensing flammable gasses or liquids. 3. Caution sign at storage areas.


Expo Operations and Maintenance Facility SIGNAGE Santa Monica, CA 10 14 00 - 8

SECTION 10 14 55

RAILROAD SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Metro Light Rail Operations Rule Book.

B. Metro Rail Engineering Standard Drawings

C. Metro Rail Directive Drawings.

D. Referenced Standards

Organization Number Title

ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)

CMUTCD California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Work shall consist of providing and installing Operations and Maintenance Signs including aluminum signs, traffic buttons, painted ties, sign posts, foundations, brackets and hardware; providing final camera-ready artwork for each sign; providing spares; providing all materials and labor required for complete sign and equipment installation in accordance with these specifications and other installation methods as shown on the Contract Drawings. The locations and details are shown in Appendix 1, and the Contract Drawings.

B. All Sign legends shall be computer generated and machine cut.

C. Sign colors, lettering, symbols and borders shall conform to the details shown in the specifications unless otherwise noted. All the signs shall conform to the CMUTCD, Standard Highway Sign Design and Standard Alphabets for Highway Signs and Pavement Markings.

D. The sign manufacturer shall be an established firm, which is regularly engaged in the fabrication and installation of signs and approved by the Authority.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be provided to the Authority for review and approval.

B. Required Submittals:

1. Technical Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for sign materials and designs

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility RAILROAD SIGNAGE SANTA MONICA, CA 10 14 55 - 1

shall be provided. Provide installation details and instructions for each type of sign and mounting required.

2. Samples: The Contractor shall provide samples of the color and finish of aluminum materials and accessories required for the signs. The Authority’s review of samples will be for color, texture, and materials only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Furnish full-size samples of sign materials, when required by the Authority.

a. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the characteristics of the product. Include related parts and attachment devices and full range color, texture and pattern.

3. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall provide shop drawings of all sign panels, components, parts and fittings. Provide installation procedures showing layout, jointing, complete anchoring and support systems for the various applications and mounting details for all signs. Drawings shall clearly show provisions for all performance functions described herein. Shop drawings shall provide all details, sections, sign panels and signs at full size scale.

4. Certifications: Provide Manufacturer or Supplier’s certifications stating that the Materials delivered to the site are in compliance with these Specifications.

5. QA/QC: All Quality Assurance/Quality Control documentation for each sign shall be delivered with each sign and after inspection, shall be turned over to the Authority.

6. Inspection Procedures: Provide Manufacturer or Supplier’s installation procedures.

7. Installation and Inspection Procedures: The Contractor shall provide installation and inspection procedures to the Authority, including all forms required and used, for field installation and associated inspections.

8. Installation and Inspection Forms: All installation and inspection forms, including factory inspections, shall be provided to the Authority.

9. Any other submittal called out in the specifications.


A. Each sign shall be inspected prior to shipment. Inspection shall conform to the Suppliers inspection procedure.

B. Each sign shall be inspected after it has been installed in the field. This inspection shall conform to the Contractor’s Installation and Inspection Procedure as approved by the Authority. Installation shall not be considered complete until all installation defects have been corrected to the Authority’s satisfaction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Signs, Posts and Fasteners


1. All sign panels shall be made of aluminum, unless otherwise noted.

2. Cut edges or drilled holes shall be deburred and smoothed.

3. Signposts and anchors must be square, 12 gauge galvanized steel Unistrut, or Authority approved equal, with 1/2-inch perforation on 1 inch centers. Signposts shall be 2 inches square. Anchor posts into the ground using a two-piece breakaway anchor consisting of a 2-1/4 inches square, 3 feet long base, and 2-1/2 inches square, 1-1/2 feet long sleeve. Utilize connecting bolts, fittings and hardware as shown on Contract Drawings.

4. Concrete Grout shall be used for signpost anchor base installed in core-drilled concrete paving. Grout between anchor and concrete paving with concrete grout, fast setting, rapid strength gain 1000+ psi in eight hours, and 5000+ psi in 24 hours. Grout shall be shrinkage compensating, contain no chloride, and comply with ASTM C 1107 Types B and C. Use TXI Zip Crete as provided by Texas Industries (TXI) or approved equal.

5. Framing and bracing shall use connecting bolts, fittings and hardware as shown on the Contract Drawings.

6. Stainless steel hex-head lag bolts, washers, nuts, and clamps shall be used to attach signs to steel posts, braces, brackets, fences, guardrails and gates.

7. Special Fasteners shall be Hilti, or Authority approved equal, anchor bolts and adhesives to secure signs or sign brackets to walls. Install as shown on the Contract Drawings and in these Specifications.

8. Brackets for mounting signs on ties shall be 12 gauge galvanized steel, epoxied to the center of the concrete tie as shown in the Contract Drawings.

B. Sign Panels

1. All signs shall be solid one-piece panels.

2. Provide final camera-ready artwork for each sign.

3. Sign face shall not be permanently defaced by steam, acids, aromatics, scratching, inks or paints, and shall readily wipe clean with paint remover and solvents without affecting appearance or legibility of the sign finish or graphics.

4. Sign face shall retain legibility and finished appearance when sprayed with a 10% solution of nitric hydrochloric, or sulphuric acid for one-half hour, or when scrubbed by a brush of medium hardness using common commercial cleaning compounds such as ammonia, detergents, laundry soaps, carbon tetrachloride, or petroleum base solvents.

5. Sign edges shall not be crazed or cracked and edge finish shall be smooth, clean, and neat.

6. Finished sign shall be absolutely flat.


7. All signs must have the holes drilled and sealed per type of installation as noted as in the Appendix and Contract Drawings.

8. All signs shall have rounded corners with a 1-1/4-inch radius.

9. Reflectivity Requirements: All sign copy and graphics shall be screen painted over 3M Scotchlite Reflective Sheeting Diamond Grade VIP (Visual Impact Performance) or Authority approved equal.

10. A protective covering shall be placed on and between signs to prevent damage during shipment. Damaged signs shall not be accepted.

11. Minimum standard sign panel thickness shall be 0.125-inches.

12. Sign face shall be warranted for a period of 10 years against, chipping, delaminating and fading.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to procurement and shop drawing submittal, the Contractor shall examine the

site locations and conditions under which signs are to be installed.

B. Prior to sign installation, the Contractor shall mark each sign location with a flag, paint mark, tape, or survey stick. The Authority shall approve each sign location prior to installation.

C. The Contractor shall contact DigAlert or local utility agencies to locate and verify existing utilities prior to sign location and shall submit verification that the Contractor coordinated with DigAlert or local utility agencies to locate existing utilities near sign post locations.

D. Signs shall be placed such that they do not obscure visibility of other signs, signals or informational device.

3.02 ERECTION METHODS DETAILS

A. Install signs as shown in Contract Drawings and Authority approved shop drawings. Installation types and methods include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Unistrut posts

2. Brackets on rail ties.

3. Adhering sign to face of building

4. Painting

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install sign units and components at the locations shown, securely mounted, in


accordance with these Specifications.

B. Install signs level, plumb, and at the proper height. Coordinate with other contractors for installation of sign units to finished surface. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Authority.

C. Post Erection

1. Unistrut post installations shall be in ballast, concrete, asphalt, pavers, or soil. Concrete is required when signs are located on pavements or other solid structures.

2. For each post, drive an anchor, then a sleeve into the ground with a pneumatic post driver. Install anchor and sleeve plumb. Drive directly into ballast rock, gravel, asphalt, dirt, or other material. On concrete paving, core drill a 3 to 4 inch diameter hole through the concrete, then drive an anchor and sleeve. Apply grout in between anchor sleeve and concrete, making grout flush with existing concrete. All anchors and sleeves shall be exposed from one to two inches above grade for bolt connections. Post should extend into anchor between 6 and 8 inches. Secure post with 90-degree bend stainless steel anchor bolt and the post must be plumb.

3. Dispose of surplus excavated material.

D. When painting ties, clean the tie surface before applying paint and apply two coats of paint on concrete ties and four coats of paint on wooden ties and apply glass beads per manufacturer’s direction.

E. When installing signs on the face of the building or using brackets to install the sign to the ties, follow manufacturer’s instructions for proper adhesion.

3.04 TEMPORARY COVERS

A. Signs installed prior to their operational or testing function shall be covered to conceal the sign face from view.

B. Coverings shall be of a dark gray or black plastic heavy-duty material acceptable to the Authority, neatly affixed to sign face with matching or concealed fasteners. Maintain covers until each sign is ready to be placed into service. When coverings are removed for sign usage, clean the signs and treat faces with antistatic solution.



Appendix 1

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (OM) SIGNS

APPROACH CAB

CUT-OUT

SIGN TYPE 1 - APPROACH CAB CUT-OUT

DESCRIPTION

Alphanumerics Colors: BLACK Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE YELLOW Sign Shape: RECTANGLE *note Sign Size: 33 inches by 18 inches Alphanumerics:

Type: Series D **note, C, B Size: 3 inches

Message Position: Centered top-to-bottom and left-to-right.

(Drawing not to scale)

Border Width: 1/2 to 3/4 inch, or equal, but not to exceed stroke width of alphanumerics.

Border Placement: Set 1/2 inch from sign edge.

INDICATION: Train Operators shall observe transition to Street Running or Stop and Proceed mode. Train Operators operating without Cab Signals reduce speed expecting to encounter Street Running or Yard Limit ahead.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify the point approaching where cab signal operation ends and

line-of-sight operation begins.

Criteria: Sign Placement: As shown on Contract Drawings

Vertical: Center of sign shall be mounted at 5 feet 5 and 3/8 inches above top of rail, provided adequate clearance exists and line-of-sight is unobstructed.

Horizontal: Signage posts should be placed 7 feet min. from the track centerline, provided adequate clearance and line-of-sight is unobstructed.

Notes: * Rectangle should have long sides horizontal and rounded corners. ** Compressing spacing by 20-25% if necessary. *** Signs installed for normal and reverse direction track.


BEGIN YARD

OPERATIONS

SIGN TYPE 2 - BEGIN YARD OPERATIONS

DESCRIPTION

Alphanumerics Colors: BLACK Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE YELLOW Sign Shape: RECTANGLE *note Sign Size: 33 inches by 18 inches Alphanumerics:






INDICATION: Train Operators shall Stop, change radio channel to the yard operations channel and contact Yard Control for instructions and authorization to enter the yard.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify the point where Rail Yard Operation begins.

Criteria: Sign Placement: To be placed at the entrance of the rail yard.

Vertical: Center of sign shall be mounted at 5 feet 5 and 3/8

inches above top of rail, provided adequate clearance exists and line-of-sight is unobstructed.


Notes: * Rectangle should have long sides horizontal and rounded corners. ** Compressing spacing by 20-25% if necessary.


SIGN TYPE 3 - AT GRADE RAIL CROSSINGS (W10-1)

DESCRIPTION

Alphanumerics Colors: BLACK Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE YELLOW Sign Shape: ROUND Sign Size: 18 inches by 18 inches

(W10-1) Alphanumerics:






INDICATION: Railroad crossing ahead, prepare to stop if occupied.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify approaching at-grade rail crossing ahead.




Horizontal:

Signage posts should be placed 7 feet min. from the track centerline, provided adequate clearance and line-of-sight is unobstructed.

Note: Standard W10-1 MUTCD sign.


YARD LIMIT

SIGN TYPE 4 - YARD LIMIT

DESCRIPTION

Alphanumerics Colors: BLACK Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE WHITE Sign Shape: SQUARE Sign Size: 12 inches by 12 inches Alphanumerics:

Type: Series C Size: 3 inches *note





INDICATION: Placed at locations, which delineates the Mainline or Shop tracks from the Yard tracks.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify the start of yard operation and the associated change in

operating rules. Differences in yard operations and mainline operations are defined in Operating Rulebook.



Horizontal:

Signage posts should be placed 7 feet min. from the track centerline, provided adequate clearance and line-of-sight is unobstructed. When mounted to building the sign shall be visible when the track doors are fully open.

Note:

Signs should be installed adjacent to each track for normal and reverse running.


G H

SIGN TYPE 5 - HORN/GONG

DESCRIPTION


Type: Series E Size: 12 inches





INDICATION: Sound audible warning approaching grade crossing.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify point where train operator is to start sounding horn.

Criteria: Sign Placement: To be placed at distance where train traveling at

maximum allowable speed is ten seconds in approach to designated area.




Note: Signs should be installed adjacent to each track for normal running only.


FOULING MARKER

DESCRIPTION

Paint Color: REFLECTIVE YELLOW USE AEXCEL – CHLORINATED RUBBER TRAFFIC PAINT OR EQUAL AND APPLY GLASS BEADS.


INDICATION: Location on a track beyond which movement or storage of rail vehicles will block movement on roadways or other tracks.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify point at turnout to prevent fouling.

Criteria: Sign Placement: Fouling point indicated by painted yellow tie.

Vertical: Not applicable.

Horizontal: Not applicable.

Note: There is no sign for fouling point indication. Fouling point is to be indicated

by painted yellow tie.


SIGN TYPE 7 - END OF WIRE SIGN

DESCRIPTION

Alphanumerics Colors: WHITE Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE RED Sign Shape: RECTANGLE *note Sign Size: 33 inches by 18 inches Alphanumerics:

Type: Series C Size: 5 inches



(Drawing not to scale) Border Placement: Set 1/2 inch from sign edge. INDICATION: STOP. Contact Wire ends. Contact Proper Authority for Authority to lower

pantograph before proceeding.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify the point on track where catenary ends.




Horizontal: Signage posts should be placed 7 feet min. from the track centerline, provided adequate clearance and line-of-sight is unobstructed. When mounted to building the sign shall be visible when the track doors are fully open.

Note: * Rectangle should have long sides horizontal and rounded corners.

END OF WIRE LOWER

PANTOGRAPH


SHOP LIMIT

SIGNT TYPE 8 - SHOP LIMIT

DESCRIPTION


Type: Series C Size: 5 inches


(Drawing not to Scale)



INDICATION: Separates Shop Tracks from Yard Tracks.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify the start of shop operation and the associated change in

operating rules. Differences in shop operations and yard or mainline operations are defined in Operating Rulebook.



Horizontal: Signage posts should be placed 7 feet min. from the track centerline, provided adequate clearance and line-of-sight is unobstructed. When mounted to building the sign shall be visible when the track doors are fully open.

Note: None


RA

SIGN TYPE 9 - TRACK DESIGNATION – YARD ONLY

DESCRIPTION


Type: Series D Size: 4 inches





INDICATION: Signs indicating proper track designation located on each track.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify the proper track designation on each track.

Criteria: Sign Placement: Between rails of each track as shown on Contract

Drawings.

Vertical: Below top of rail.

Horizontal: Center of tie.

Note: None


SIGN TYPE 10 - NO CLEARANCE SIGN

DESCRIPTION

Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE YELLOW WITH

BLACK HATCH Sign Shape: RECTANGLE *note Sign Size: 6 inches by 33 inches Border Width: 1/2 to 3/4 inch, or equal, but

not to exceed stroke width of alphanumerics.



INDICATION: Area where no clearance exists between fixed wayside structures or appliances and a moving vehicle operating on the track structure.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify areas in the right-of-way where clearance is sufficiently reduced

so as to cause hazard to personnel.

Criteria: Sign Placement: To be placed at site-specific locations where clearance is less than 5 feet from center of track to a continuous structure.

Vertical: Should be placed within personnel normal field of

view.

Horizontal: Signage shall be placed as close to affected area as site allows.

Notes: * Sign shape should be rectangular with long sides vertical.


SIGN TYPE 11 - RESTRICTED ACCESS AREA

DESCRIPTION

Border Color: BLACK Background Color: REFLECTIVE YELLOW WITH

BLACK HATCH Sign Shape: RECTANGLE *note Sign Size: 33 inches by 18 inches Border Width: 1/2 to 3/4 inch, or equal, but

not to exceed stroke width of alphanumerics.



INDICATION: Area on the right-of-way of limited clearance and/or visibility.

REMARKS Purpose: To identify areas where access is restricted.

Criteria: Sign Placement: To be placed at site-specific locations where

clearance is less than 5 feet from center of track to a continuous structure.

Vertical: Should be placed within personnel and patron

normal field of view.

Horizontal: Signage shall be placed as close to affected area as site allows.

Note: * Rectangle should have long sides horizontal and rounded corners.


SECTION 10 21 13

SOLID-POLYMER TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Section Includes solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 10 28 13 "Commercial Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers,

grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For recycled content of solid polymer toilet

compartments and urinal screens.

C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of

hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch-

square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.

G. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SOLID-POLYMER TOILET COMPARTMENTS Santa Monica, CA 10 21 13 - 1

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.


A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.

E. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness.

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or

galvannealed.

F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

G. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

H. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

I. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.02 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Bradley Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Flush Metal Partition Corporation. 2. General Partition Manufacturing Corporation 3. Global Steel Products Corporation. 4. Hadrian Manufacturing Incorporated. 5. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 6. Metpar Corporation. 7. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. 8. Weis-Robart Partitions, Incorporated.


B. Recycled Content: Minimum 25 percent.

A. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor mounted / braced.

B. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel.

C. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, stainless-steel strip

fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern as shown on Finish Legend.

D. Pilaster Shoes: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

E. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe matching that on the pilaster.

F. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

1.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to

hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed

for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless

steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

1.03 FABRICATION

A. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes[at posts to conceal anchorage.


B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. c. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Floor-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set

pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels in closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units

level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 2.02 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility WIRE MESH PARTITIONS Santa Monica, CA 10 22 13 - 1

SECTION 10 22 13

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS



1. Standard-duty wire mesh partitions. 2. Stairway partitions.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for building anchors into concrete

construction for wire mesh partitions. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into masonry

construction for wire mesh partitions. 3. Division 05 Section "Pipe Railings" for railing systems requiring wire mesh railing

insert panels. 1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. As defined in ASTM E 2016:

1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections.

2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place.


A. Delegated Design: Design wire mesh units, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Wire mesh units shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7:

1. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Include clearances required for operation of doors and gates.

C. Setting Drawings: For anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.


D. Samples for Verification: 12-by-12-inch panel constructed of specified frame members and wire mesh. Show method of finishing members at intersections.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wire mesh units indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Maintenance Data: For wire mesh unit hardware to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing wire mesh items and

providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wire mesh items, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic.

B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for

wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site.

1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

2. Deliver keys to Authority by registered mail or overnight package service.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication.


A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide Riverdale


Mills Corp.; Wirewall.

B. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of fabric. Comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabric Type: Galvanized steel welded wire mesh.

a. Wire Diameter: 0.128 inch. b. Mesh Size: 2 inch by 2 inch c. Zinc-Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq. ft. with zinc coating

applied after weaving and welding.

3. Finish: Galvanized. 2.02 PARTITIONS

A. Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory-assembled modular sized panels stacked between post uprights, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners; interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste of components.

1. Style: Full mesh 2. Post Spacing: As required to suit dimensions, using manufacturer's standard

panel widths. 3. Panel frames bolted together and to posts. 4. Height: one 60-inch high panel and one 48-inch high panel. 5. Toe Space - Storage Compartments: 3-1/4 inch high open space below bottom

panel. 6. Total partition height: 9 feet 5-1/4 inches.

B. Posts:

1. Factory drilled holes for attaching panels. 2. Welded-on base plate, 2 by 7 by 1/4 inch with factory drilled holes for floor

anchors. 3. Floor anchors: 3/8 inch by 3 inch wedge anchors. 4. Post Height: Refer to Drawings. 5. Decorative plastic post cap. 6. Corner Posts: Same as in-line posts 7. Provide appropriate hardware for attaching panels to posts and posts to floor. 8. Panel to post attachments: 3/8 inch standard thread, grade two bolts.

C. Wire Mesh Panels: Steel angle frames with wire mesh securely welded in place:

frame joints coped at corner and securely welded; factory drilled holes for fasteners.

1. Wire Mesh: 6 gauge, 0.192 inch steel wire woven into 2 inch square mesh. 2. Frame: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch hot rolled steel angle.

D. Door Sections: Matching wire mesh panels.

1. Frame: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch hot rolled steel angle. 2. Hinged Doors:

a. Single Door Width: 36 inches b. Door Opening Height: 87-1/4 inches with transom of similar construction to

full height of partition. c. Hinges: 3 five-knuckle tight-pin butt hinges fastened to door panel and

frame


3. Locking: Best cylinder less core. Mortise cylinder lock as specified in Division 08

Section "Door Hardware."

E. Closure to structure above:

1. 20 ga. Galvanized steel 2. Attached to top rail of to panel with self tapping screws 3. Closed to 2 inches or less from above structure.

2.03 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.

C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located

blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION

A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation.

1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and

hanger or lag bolts. 2. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into

wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch-diameter "U" bolts

spaced not more than 28 inches o.c.

D. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows:

1. On each side of sliding door openings. 2. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet high, spaced at 15 to 20 feet o.c.


3. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet high, located between every other panel. 4. For partitions that are more than 12 feet high, located between each panel.

E. Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as

recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability, extending and fastening members to supporting structure.

F. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run,

provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.

G. Install doors complete with door hardware.

H. Install service windows complete with window hardware.

I. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions and doors where indicated.

J. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors and gates to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped,

bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


SECTION 10 22 26

MANUALLY OPERATED, ACOUSTICAL PANEL PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system.

2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

B. Glass and Glazing Definitions: See Division 08 Section "Glazing."

C. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

D. STC: Sound Transmission Class.


A. Delegated Design: Design operable panel partitions, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the panels will remain in place without separation of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified

testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested

for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

2. Noise-Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for sound-absorption performance according to ASTM C 423, and rated for not less than the NRC indicated.

3. Acoustical Performance Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for NIC according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for STC 50.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility MANUALLY OPERATED, ACOUSTICAL PANEL PARTITIONS Santa Monica, CA 10 22 26 - 1

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that operable

panel partitions comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For each composite wood product used in operable panel partitions, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel

installation sequence, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data for attachments, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or

facing indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches

square. 2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches long. 3. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard exposed door-operating device.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions indicated to comply with

performance requirements, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.

G. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.


c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels.

5. Plenum smoke and acoustical barriers.

H. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including

support-beam, mounting-hole template.

I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

J. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is

based and their installation requirements.

K. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition, from manufacturer.

L. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each operable panel partition.

M. Field quality-control reports.

N. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include

precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Seals, hardware, track, carriers, and other operating components.

O. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by

manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for testing indicated.

D. Forest Certification: Fabricate products with wood, wood veneers, and wood-based

panel products produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and


Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes meeting one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84.

a. Flame-Spread Index: N/A. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: N/A.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark

packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of operable panel partition openings

by field measurements before fabrication.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

wear.

2. Warranty Period: Partition system shall be guaranteed for a period of Two years against defects in material and workmanship, excluding abuse from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Product to be top supported, manually operated, Series 663 continuously hinged

(train) panels as manufactured by Hufcor Inc. 1. Panels shall be nominally 3” [76] thick, to 48” [1219] in width, and continuously

hinged. 2. Panel faces shall be laminated to appropriate substrate to meet the STC

requirements.


a. Optional face material (Not all substrates are available for all STC ratings. Consult your Hufcor Distributor for more information): Steel, Non-steel.

3. Frames shall be of 16 gauge [1.42mm] painted steel with integral factory applied aluminum vertical edge and face protection.

4. Vertical sound seals shall be of tongue and groove configuration, ensure panel-to-panel alignment and prevent sound leaks between panels.

5. Horizontal top seals shall be fixed contact dual 4-finger vinyl. 6. Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl. 7. Low profile hinges on basic panels shall be of steel and project no more than ¼”

[6] beyond panel faces. There shall be a minimum of four hinges per panel.

B. Weight of the panels shall be 5.7-10.2 pounds per square foot [27.8-49.8 kg/sq.m] based on options selected.

C. Suspension system: 1. Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy

6063-T6. Track design shall provide precise alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide integral support for adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be connected to the structural support by pairs of minimum 3/8” [10] diameter threaded steel hanger rods. Guide rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required. a. Each panel shall be supported by on 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels to be of

hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires. 2. Plenum closure (by others): Design of plenum closure must permit lifting out of

header panels to adjust track height. Plenum closure required for optimum sound control of partition.

D. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's nominal minimum thickness for uncoated

steel.

E. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel.

F. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for

type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.

1. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum.

2. Wood Frame: Clear, vertical-grain, straight, kiln-dried, fire-retardant-treated

wood; of manufacturer's standard species.

G. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M.

H. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288.

I. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

J. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

K. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.02 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS


A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable acoustical panel partition system, including

panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hufcor, Series 631 in Room A243 and Series 633 in Room A213 or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advanced Equipment Corporation. b. Curtition, Inc. c. FolDoor; Holcomb & Hoke Mfg. Co., Inc. d. KWIK-WALL Company. e. Moderco Inc. f. Modernfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group Company. g. Panelfold Inc.

B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, continuously hinged panels.

C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from

suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled

system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

1. Panel Width: Equal widths.

E. STC: Not less than 50 STC rating.

F. Panel Weight: 10 lb/sq. ft.

G. Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches.

H. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.

1. Initial Closure: Fixed jamb. 2. Final Closure: Flexible, resilient PVC, bulb-shaped acoustical seal.

I. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition

and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Exit Device: N/A.

2.03 SEALS

A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce operable panel partitions

complying with acoustical performance requirements and the following:


1. Manufacturer's standard seals. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent

panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed.

B. Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of panel,

with continuous PVC acoustical seal.

C. Horizontal Top Seals:

1. Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track.

2. PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended.

3. Continuous-contact, extruded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track or PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track when extended.

D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact

seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement.

1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom

seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 1-1/2 inches between retracted seal and floor finish.

2. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 1-1/2 inches between retracted seal and floor finish.

2.04 FINISH FACING

A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-

response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant non-staining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and

other defects, with invisible seams complying with Shop Drawings for location, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance.

2. Where facings with directional, repeating, or matching grain are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction.

3. Match facing pattern 72 inches above finished floor. 4. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

C. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints

concealing edges of panel and finish facing, finished as follows:

1. Steel, Painted: Finished with manufacturer's standard as selected by Architect


from manufacturer's full range. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher

for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper required to comply with performance requirements; and with manufacturer's standard color anodic finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

D. Trim-less Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted

around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.

2.05 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for

overhead support, designed for type of operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.

1. Panel Guide: Aluminum; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective

finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied,

decorative, protective finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of

partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

1. Multidirectional Carriers: Capable of negotiating 90-degree L, T, and X intersections without track switches.

C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation,

storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.

1. Curve-and-Diverter Switches: Allowing radius turns to divert panels to an

auxiliary track. 2. L Intersections: Allowing panels to change 90 degrees in direction of travel. 3. T Intersections: Allowing panels to pass through or change 90 degrees to

another direction of travel. 4. X Intersections: Allowing panels to pass through or change travel direction full

circle in 90-degree increments, and allowing 1 partition to cross track of another. 5. Multidirectional Switches: Adjustable switch configuring track into L, T, or

X intersections and allowing panels to be moved in all pass-through, 90-degree change, and cross-over travel direction combinations.

6. Center carrier stop.

D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated.

E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective


coating unless otherwise indicated.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware.

1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed

position. 2. Rim Lock: Key-operated lock cylinder, keyed to master key system, to secure

storage pocket door in closed position. Include two keys per lock. 3. Rim Lock: Deadlock to receive cylinder, to secure storage pocket door in closed

position. Refer to Division 08 door hardware Sections for lock cylinder and keying requirements.

B. Work Surfaces: Quantities, placement, and size indicated.

1. Surface: Porcelain steel marker/projection surface. 2. Surface Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Size: Full width and height of panel, each side. 4. Trim: Aluminum slip-on or snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints

and with corners mitered to a neat, hairline joint, finish to match aluminum frames (PT-10).

C. Chalk Tray and Eraser Pocket: Manufacturer's standard, each side of panel.

1. Aluminum with color anodic finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel

partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop

Drawings.

D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.


E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted

ends is not acceptable.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

B. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or

warping. Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.


A. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical

joints and top and bottom seals for voids; adjust partitions for acceptable fit.

B. NIC Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements.

D. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select one operable panel partition

installation(s) for testing.

E. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of repaired, replaced, or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled surfaces of operable panel partitions to remove dust, loose fibers,

fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Metro's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.



SECTION 10 26 11

WALL PROTECTION



1. Extruded rubber wall bumpers.


1. Section 10 26 13 "Stainless Steel Corner Guards." 2. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and

extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit

indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Wall Bumpers: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field

splices.

E. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant material.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

G. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining

optimum condition of wall bumpers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to performance.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility WALL PROTECTION Santa Monica, CA 10 26 11 - 1

Refer to Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

C. Revise subparagraph below to suit Project.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Authority, except with Authority's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Authority for review.

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection

units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during

the period materials are stored. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL GUARDS

A. Extruded EPDM Rubber Wall Bumpers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model M-2 Extruded Bumper by ProTek Systems, Inc, or comparable product by another manufacturer. Include all fasteners for complete installation.

a. Durometer: 70 plus or minus 5 Shore A per ASTM D-412 b. Tensile Strenght: 1,750 minimum per ASTM D-412 c. Elongation: 395 minimum per ASTM D-412 d. Tear Strenght: 229 lbs/in minimum per ASTM D-624 e. Impact Resistance: 75 percent per ASTM 2632


f. Low Temperature Brittleness: negative 40 degrees F. minimum per ASTM D-746.

g. Ozone: 1142 hours at 102 degrees F - 20 percent strain with no cracks per ASTM D-1171

h. Deflection: 60,000 ft/lbs deflects 3 inches with no ruptures per ASTM D-575 2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.


A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking,

grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

a. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting

heights indicated on Drawings. b. Attach at 12 inches o.c.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for

a complete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum

retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean wall protection bumpers as recommended by manufacturer..



SECTION 10 26 13.01

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS


A. This Section includes stainless steel corner guards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each corner guard component. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full range of finish

variations expected in each corner guard component. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.

1. Wall and Corner Guards: 12-inch- long Samples of each type of corner guard

component required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of corner guard components similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing corner guard

components similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each finish, and type of corner guard component from a

single source with resources to provide components of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.


A. Store corner guards in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install corner guard components until the space is enclosed and weatherproof and ambient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering corner guard products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS Santa Monica, CA 10 26 13 - 1

are not limited to, the following:

1. Balco, Inc. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc. 3. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. 4. Pawling Corporation.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Plate: Type 304, minimum 0.0625 inch.

B. Fasteners: Provide nonmagnetic stainless-steel metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners. Use theftproof fasteners where exposed to view.

2.03 CORNER GUARDS

A. Stainless-Steel Corner Guards: Paper-covered, satin-finish, 0.0625-inch minimum, stainless-steel sheet corner guards. Provide 90-degree turn, unless otherwise indicated; and formed edges.

1. Wing Size: 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches. 2. Mounting Method: Countersunk screws with mounting holes 8 inches o.c. 3. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. 4. Height: 4-feet unless indicated otherwise.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate corner guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other

imperfections.

C. Anchors: Provide wall anchors for connecting corner guards to other construction.

D. Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. Coordinate anchoring devices with the supporting structure.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary covering before shipping. 2.06 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish: Directional satin, No. 6 Bright annealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions in which corner guard components will be installed.


1. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing corner guard components.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install corner guard components level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.

1. Do not use materials with stains or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Clean metal components according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris, resulting from installation, on

completion of work and leave installation areas in neat, clean condition.



SECTION 10 28 13

COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES



1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Under lavatory guards.


1. Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 2. Section 09 30 00 "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in

other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish

requirements.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

E. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance

manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES Santa Monica, CA 10 28 13 - 1

installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.


A. Basis of Design: Subject to requirements, provide accessories by the following:

1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Bobrick. 2. Underlavatory Guards: Truebro, Inc.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

indicated for each designation in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes,

forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-

welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when


unit is closed.

C. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Authority's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested

according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written

recommendations. 3.03 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. Recessed convertible paper towel dispenser Bobrick B-43944 and waste receptacle

B. Automatic lavatory-mounted soap dispenser Bobrick B-826

C. Surface-mounted soap dispenser Bobrick B-4112

D. Reversible solid phenolic folding shower seat Bobrick B-5181

E. Recessed seat-cover dispenser, sanitary napkin disposal Bobrick B-3574

and toilet tissue dispenser

F. Recessed seat-cover dispenser, sanitary napkin disposal Bobrick B-3574 and toilet tissue dispenser

G. Partition-mounted seat-cover dispenser, sanitary Bobrick B-3571

napkin disposal, and toilet tissue dispenser

H. Surface-mounted seat-cover and toilet tissue dispenser Bobrick B-3479

I. Extra-heavy-duty shower curtain rod Bobrick B-6074

J. Stainless steel shower curtain hook Bobrick 204-1

K. Vinyl shower curtain Bobrick 204-2 L. Glass mirror with stainless steel angle frame Bobrick B-290


M. Utility shelf with mop/broom holders and rag hooks Bobrick B-239 N. Heavy-duty clothes hook with concealed mounting hooks Bobrick B-2116 O. Folding utility shelf Bobrick B-287 P. Folding Utility Shelf Bobrick B-287 Q. 18”-1 ½” diameter stainless steel grab bars Bobrick B-6806

with snap flange R. 36”-1 ½” diameter stainless steel grab bars Bobrick B-6806

with snap flange S. 42”-1 ½” diameter stainless steel grab bars Bobrick B-6806

with snap flange T. Two-wall shower/tub compartment grab bar Bobrick B-68616.99 U. Surface-mounted seat-cover dispenser Bobrick B-4221 V. Surface-mounted sanitary napkin disposal Bobrick B-254 W. Surface-mounted sanitary napkin disposal Bobrick B-270 X. Partition-mounted dual-sided multi-roll toilet Bobrick B-386

tissue dispenser Y. Recessed sanitary napkin disposal and toilet Bobrick B-3094

tissue dispenser Z. Recessed multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser Bobrick B-4388 AA. Surface-mounted multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser Bobrick B-4288 AB. Interchangeable receptacle Bobrick 368-60 AC. Under-lavatory guards Lav Guard2 AD. Convertible universal roll paper towel module Bobrick 3974-50



SECTION 10 28 19

SHOWER DOORS


A. Work includes shower doors where indicated on the Drawings.


1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for bedding sealant. 2. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile."

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Framed Shower/Tub Door: Framing provided all around glass panels and on the sidewalls, sill and head depending on the style of the door.

B. Hinged Door: Door provided with full-length hinge. This type of door will provide for

more open space to get into the shower but take up more room to open all the way. Usually these doors do not come wider then 36 inches.

C. Door & Panel: Provide a door and one panel to fit an opening wider than 37 inches

but not more than 72 inches wide. Refer to drawings for the location of the side panel and door swing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements provide shower doors by, but not limited to, one of the following:

1. Albany Shower Door. 2. Alumax Bath Enclosures. 3. American Shower Door. 4. Century Shower Door Co. Inc. 5. Craft Diston Industires. 6. MAXX Inc.

B. Type: Metal framed glass swinging units.

C. Size as indicated on Drawings.

D. Frame and Hardware Finish: Brushed chrome plated brass or anodized aluminum.

E. Glazing: 3/8-inch thick tempered glass, obscured pattern.

F. Hinge: Continuous hinges or pivots.

G. Manufacturer’s standard drip and handle.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SHOWER DOORS Santa Monica, CA 10 28 19 - 1

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws not less than 1/4-inch in diameter.

B. Silicone Sealant: See Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Install shower doors in conformance with manufacturer's written directions.

1. Set wall frames in bed of sealant. 2. Fasten on ceramic tile faced gypsum board wall surfaces with screws into wood

blocking. Screwing into gypsum board with plugs not acceptable.


Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SHOWER DOORS Santa Monica, CA 10 28 19 - 2

SECTION 10 41 16

FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOX


A. This Section includessurface mounted Fire Department key storage box (“knox box”).

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that may relate to this Section:

1. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant applied to joint between key box

and mounting substrate. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for key storage box. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Key Storage Box: Locate boxes where indicated on Drawings and position as

required by local Fire Department. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY STORAGE BOX

A. General: Heavy-duty, UL Rated, high-security, factory finish metal box designed to store keys for Fire Department access.

B. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with the requirements provide Knox

Company; Knox Box 4100 Series or comparable product by another manufacturer acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Size: Approximately 6-inches high by 6-inches wide by 4-1/2-inches deep. 3. Door Type: Hinged. 4. Color. Black.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners for Surfaced Mounting: Grade 8 zinc plated steel carriage bolt not less than 5/16 inch diameter and length as required to allow 2 full threads showing after

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOX Santa Monica, CA 10 41 16 - 1

nuts are securely threaded and tightened. Include zinc plated washers and nuts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, critical dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Surface Mounting: Fasten key box to surface of wall with not less than 5 carriage bolts through solid blocking located in wall. Locate head of carriage bolt on interior side of building with head bearing on solid metal material. Locate threaded end of bolt and nut on interior side of key box.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Confirm that box doors engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.


Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOX Santa Monica, CA 10 41 16 - 2

SECTION 10 44 13

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS


A. Section Includes fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.


1. Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers." 2. Section 26 51 00 "Interior Lighting" for fire extinguisher location lights.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing

mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square.

E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet

schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to fire protection cabinets including, but

not limited to, the following:

a. Schedules and coordination requirements.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Santa Monica, CA 10 44 13 - 1

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.05 SEQUENCING

A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete.


A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Finish: No. 6 directional satin finish.

B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

C. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3,

1.5 mm thick, single strength.

D. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick.

2.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.


a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;

Ambassador Series. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series. c. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.; Architectural Series.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, except as noted.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated

from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of

trim indicated.

1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached


to box to act as drywall bead.

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. 2. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on

wall with no trim. Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for semirecessed cabinet installation.

F. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

G. Door Material: Stainless Steel sheet.

H. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

I. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Providemanufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

K. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.

3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Authority.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

6. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire protection cabinet

door is opened and that is powered by batteries.

L. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Interior of cabinet and door.


2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from

materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and

ground smooth. 2.04 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from

damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.05 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross

scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.


A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated[ or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:] [or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.]

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall

thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square

and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that

integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored

to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated

beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



SECTION 10 44 16

PORTABLE MULTIPURPOSE DRY-CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


A. Section includes portable, hand-carried, multipurpose dry-chemical in container type fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 2. Section 21 11 00 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for hose

systems, racks, and valves. 3. Section 23 38 13 "Commercial-Kitchen Hoods" for fire extinguishing systems

provided as part of commercial-kitchen exhaust hoods. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule

with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an

independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Schedules and coordination requirements.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility PORTABLE MULTIPURPOSE DRY-CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Santa Monica, CA 10 44 16 - 1

repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.



a. Amerex Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container, Bracket Mounted: UL-rated

4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.02 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets for 10 lb. Fire Extinguishers: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

same manufacturer supplying fire extinguishers.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Authority.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at

locations indicated.



SECTION 10 51 13

METAL UNIFORM EXCHANGE LOCKERS



1. 8-person hanging uniform lockers. 2. Soiled garment lockers.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 10 51 26 "Solid Plastic Lockers" for wardrobe type lockers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of uniform exchange locker and soiled garment locker.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Show locker trim and accessories. 2. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For uniform exchange lockers and soiled garment lockers,

in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

G. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Full-size units of the following locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of

amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:

a. Identification plates. b. Hooks.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers, locker benches, and accessories from

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility METAL UNIFORM EXCHANGE LOCKERS Santa Monica, CA 10 51 13 - 1

single source from single manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Where lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.


A. Do not deliver uniform exchange lockers or soiled garment lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation.

B. Deliver master keys to Authority by registered mail or overnight package service,

addressed as directed by Authority. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases for lockers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 3. Warranty Period for Uniform Exchange Lockers and Soiled Garment Lockers:

One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

B. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

D. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-

locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.


E. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.

1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.02 METAL UNIFORM EXCHANGE LOCKERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 8-Person Hanging Uniform Exchange Lockers Lockers by Art Metal Products, or a comparable product by another manufacturer.

B. Locker Arrangement: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Body: Assembled with double flanged connections extending full height. Fabricate

from unperforated steel sheet as follows:

1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with single bend at sides.

2. Backs and Sides: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged connections. Ventilate backs with manufacturer's standard 1/2 inch diameter hole pattern.

E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet;

lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.

F. Master Access Door: Fabricate door from single sheet prime 0.06 inch with single

bends at top, bottom and double-bends at the sides.

G. Patron Access Doors: Fabricate Patron Access Doors from single sheet prime 20 gauge with single bends at top, bottom and sides. Ventilate with 3 inch louvers.

H. Latch Assembly: The latching mechanism for the access door shall be a multi-point

latching system. Latch hooks shall be securely welded to the vertical frame channel on the strike side to engage the lock bar.

I. Door Hinges: Shall be a continuous piano hinge securely welded to the door and

riveted to the frame.

J. Equipment: Coat rod in each patron opening.

K. Locks: Prepared for padlock (by others). 2.03 SOILED-GARMENT LOCKERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Soiled-garment Lockers by Art Metal Products, or a comparable product by another manufacturer.


C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Access Door: Fabricate from single sheet prime 0.06 inch with single bends at top


and bottom and double bends at the sides. Door shall be plain (non-vented).

E. Laundry Gate Door: Door 11" high to be fabricated from single sheet prime 0.06 inch with single bends at top, bottom and sides. Doors shall top hinged with a concealed hinge rod. Door shall be plain (non-vented).

F. Latch Assembly: The latching mechanism for the access door shall be a multi-point

latching system. Locking devise shall be designed for use with a padlock. Latch hooks shall be securely welded to the vertical frame channel on the strike side to engage the lock bar.

G. Door Hinges: Continuous piano hinge securely welded to the door and riveted to the

frame.

H. Body: Fabricate back and sides of 0.024-inch nominal thickness sheet steel, with double flanged connections extending full height. Back to be ventilated with a ½” diameter hole pattern. Top and bottom shall be 0.024-inch nominal thickness sheet steel with single return bends at all sides.

I. Locks: Prepared for padlock (by others).

J. Accessories:

1. Legs: 6 inches high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or fabricated

from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom of locker.

a. Closed Front and End Bases: Fabricated from 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

2. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness,

but not less than 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

a. Closures: Vertical-end type. b. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.

3. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 4. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

K. Finish: powder coat.

1. Color(s): As selected by Authority from manufacturer's full range.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for

complete installation.

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.


C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for preassembly at plant prior to shipping.

D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than

48 inches above the floor.

E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

F. Coat Rods: Fabricated from 1-inch-diameter steel, chrome finished.

G. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.

H. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in

lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

I. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible

fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.

1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.

J. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.

K. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners,

except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.


L. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to

match lockers. 2.05 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.

B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically

apply manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.


A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.


A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures

accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on

Drawings.

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets.

4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated

on Drawings. 6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 7. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of

nonrecessed metal lockers. 8. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed

ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. 3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding.

B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit

use during construction.

C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.



SECTION 10 51 26

SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS



1. Solid plastic lockers. 2. Locker benches.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of plastic locker and bench.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled

content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. LEED Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2 Local/Regional Materials: Submit product data

indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. a. MR 5.1: Include LEED Product Information Form indicating cost and

distance from manufacturer to Project Site for each regionally manufactured material included in this section.

b. MR 5.2: Include LEED Product Information Form indicating cost and distance from point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to Project Site for each raw material used in regionally manufactured materials included in this Section.

C. Shop Drawings: For plastic lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Show locker trim and accessories. 2. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.

D. Samples for Initial Selection:

E. Samples for Verification: For plastic lockers and locker benches, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

H. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS Santa Monica, CA 10 51 26 - 1



1. Full-size units of the following plastic locker hardware items equal to 10 percent

of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:

a. Locks. b. Identification plates. c. Hooks.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain solid plastic lockers, locker benches, and accessories

from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Where plastic lockers and benches]are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation.

B. Deliver master and control keys to Authority by registered mail or overnight package

service. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases for solid plastic lockers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of solid plastic lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures.


b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 3. Warranty Period for Solid Plastic Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial

Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Solid Plastic Panels: 1. Lockers:

a. High impact, high density polyethylene (HDPE) formed under high pressure

into solid plastic components with homogeneous color throughout, with smooth orange peel finish.

b. Edges machined to accept assembly brackets.

2. Locker benches: a. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from polymer resins

compounded under high pressure, forming single thickness panel. b. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to

marks by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments.

3. Recycled content: Minimum 25 percent. 4. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full color range.

2.02 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Solid Plastic Lockers and Locker Benches by Bradley Corporation or comparable products by another manufacturer:


C. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from

unperforated steel sheet as follows:

1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with single bend at sides.

2. Backs and Sides: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged connections.

3. Shelves: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides and back.

D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet;

lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.

1. Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same

material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames. 2. Frame Vents: Fabricate face frames with vents.

E. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed


into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges.

1. Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-

thickness steel sheet. 2. Doors for box lockers less than 15 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-

inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 3. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or

stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. 4. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-

inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 5. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors

and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors.

6. Door Style: Unperforated panel.

F. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees[; self-closing].

1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2

inches high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42 inches high.

2. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.

G. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal resistant.

1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches and higher with three latch hooks and doors

less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.

2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.

H. Door Handle and Latch for 16-Person Lockers: Stainless-steel strike plate with

integral pull; with steel padlock loop that projects through metal locker door.

I. Cylinder Locks: Built-in, flush, cam locks with five-pin tumbler keyway, keyed separately and master keyed. Furnish two change keys for each lock and two master keys.

1. Key Type: Flat, with minimum 2- by 2.68-inch key head for accessible lockers]. 2. Bolt Operation: Manually locking deadbolt or automatically locking spring bolt.

J. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall hooks.

2. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.

K. Accessories:


1. Legs: 6 inches high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or fabricated

from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom of locker.

a. Closed Front and End Bases: Fabricated from 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

2. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but

not less than 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

a. Height: 4 inches.

3. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 4. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less

than 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 5. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 6. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 7. Center Dividers: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

2.03 LOCKER BENCHES

A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches.

B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.

1. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick[ except provide minimum

20-inch- wide tops where accessible benches are indicated]. 2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one

coat of clear lacquer on top and sides. 3. Plastic laminate over particleboard core, with two steel tubes running full length

of top and positioned to receive pedestal fasteners.

a. Color: Match solid plastic lockers.

C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows:

1. Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch- diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with

standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.

a. Color: As selected by Authority from manufacturer's full range.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate solid plastic lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for

complete installation.

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory


weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or

rivets for [nominal assembly at Project site] [preassembly at plant prior to shipping].

D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than

48 inches above the floor.

E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

F. Coat Rods: Fabricated from [1-inch-] [3/4-inch-] diameter steel, [chrome finished] [nickel plated].

G. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped

[aluminum] [plastic] plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.

H. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

I. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible

fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.

1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.

J. Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated in width to fit one locker frame in lieu of flat locker tops; with integral back; finished to match lockers. Provide wedge-shaped divider panels between lockers.

K. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long

as practical; finished to match lockers.

L. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.

M. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- wide edge dimension, and designed for

concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.


N. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners,

except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.


O. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to

match lockers. 2.05 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.


B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing,

apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

C. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically

apply manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.




scratches.


foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.


A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top [and bottom of lockers] [of lockers and to floor].

3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures

accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.


3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two

aluminum rivets.

4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated

on Drawings. 6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 7. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of

nonrecessed metal lockers. 8. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed

ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.

D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than 72 inches apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor.

E. Freestanding Locker Benches: Place benches in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding.[ Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.]

B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit

use during construction.

C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.



SECTION 10 56 00

STORAGE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Equipment items as listed below by Equipment Identifier:

1. 1098 Board, peg, tool (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. 1106 Cabinet, 5 drawer, 33 inches, underbench (Ref. Part 2.02)

3. 1140 Cabinet, flammable materials, large (Ref. Part 2.03)

4. 1145 Cabinet, storage, gas cylinder, large (Ref. Part 2.04)

5. 1146 Cabinet, storage, gas cylinder, small (Ref. Part 2.05)

6. 1185 Cabinet, storage, shop (Ref. Part 2.06)

7. 1215 Chair, shop, electronic dissipative (Ref. Part 2.07)

8. 1220 Desk, stand-up, with stool (Ref. Part 2.08)

9. 1385 Platform, work, portable, 90 inches high (Ref. Part 2.09)

10. 1388 Platform, work, portable, 40 inches high (Ref. Part 2.10)

11. 1389 Carousel, parts (Ref. Part 2.11)

12. 1400 Stack system, with rack mounted crane, 48 inches by 48 inches (Ref. Part 2.12)

13. 1401 Stack System with rack mounted crane, 42 inches by 42 inches (Ref. Part 2.13)

14. 1421 Rack, arm, single face, 6 feet wide (Ref. Part 2.14)

15. 1455 Rack, bulk storage (Ref. Part 2.15)

16. 1545 Rack, pallet, high bay (Ref. Part 2.16)

17. 1570 Rack, spool, wire (Ref. Part 2.17)

18. 1622 Rack, sheet metal, 1 bay (Ref. Part 2.18)

19. 1688 Shelving unit, 18 inches (Ref. Part 2.19)

20. 1698 Shelving unit, 18 inches, with 6 drawers (Ref. Part 2.20)

21. 1730 Storage system, automated, vertical tray (Ref. Part 2.21)

22. 1799 Table, receiving, steel top, 10 feet (Ref. Part 2.22)

23. 1805 Workbench, electronics, static dissipative (Ref. Part 2.23)

B. Installation of equipment with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.

C. Utilities to be roughed in at location recommended by manufacturer.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility STORAGE EQUIPMENT Santa Monica, CA 10 56 00 - 1


A. Equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer of established reputation with a minimum of five years experience supplying specified equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Submit Product Data in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

2. Restrict submitted material to pertinent data. For instance, do not include manufacturer’s complete catalog when pertinent information is contained on a single page.

3. Additional costs resulting from substitution of products other than those specified, including drawing changes and construction, will be at the expense of the contractor.

1.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Follow requirements specified in Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Additional costs resulting from substitution of products other than those specified, by model number, including drawing changes and construction, will be at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Substitution Approval: Prior to delivery or installation, submittals for each equipment item by Equipment Identifier shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements. Acceptance will be based on the technical requirements herein as determined by Authority and Architect.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Warrant work specified herein for one year from substantial completion against defects in materials, functions, and workmanship.

B. Warranty shall include materials and labor necessary to correct defects.

C. Defects shall include, but not be limited to noisy, rough or substandard operation; loose, damaged, and missing parts; and abnormal deterioration of finish. Defects shall not include damage due to neglect, misuse, or situations resulting from non-performance of a manufacturer’s recommended preventive maintenance schedule.

D. Submit warranties in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

E. All parts shall be readily available locally in the United States.


1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver equipment in manufacturer’s containers, appropriately packaged and/or crated for protection during domestic shipment and storage in humid and/or dusty conditions.

B. Indelibly label all containers, including those contained in others, on outside with item description(s) per title and Equipment Identifier of this specification.

C. Provide equipment and material specified complete in one shipment for each equipment item. Split or partial shipments are not permissible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BOARD, PEG, TOOL Equipment Identifier: 1098

A. Manufacturer’s Reference:

1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified herein by manufacturer’s name and model to establish minimal acceptable standards of quality, features, performance, and construction.

a. Kennedy Manufacturing Company, Van Wert, OH (800) 413-8665

b. Model: 50004UGY

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITTALS, equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as equal.

a. Modern Metal Products, Owatonna, MN (507) 451-0882

b. Trion Industries, Inc., Wilkes-Barre, PA (570) 824-1000

B. Capacities/Dimensions:

1. Overall dimensions, nominal:

a. Width: 72 inches

b. Height: 36 inches

C. Features/Performance/Construction:

1. The panels shall be steel reinforced with square hole perforations. Flanged panels shall be reinforced to support heavy loads.

2. Panels shall be capable of being attached to any surface that can support the weight of heavy tools (fasteners not included).

3. Panels shall be manufactured of chip resistant material that will withstand abuse over time.

4. Individual panels shall be 18 inches by 36 inches and be assembled so that the complete width of the four-panel system shall be 72 inches.

5. Hooks, clips, and accessories shall be heavy-duty steel and capable of locking onto the panel.


6. The tool board system shall include the following (60 piece set) items as standard:

a. Single hooks, 33 each

b. Double hooks, nine each

c. Pliers hooks, four each

d. Spring clips, 10 each

e. Screwdriver unit, one each

f. Wrench rack, one each

g. Hex key unit, one each

D. Finish: Gray, durable chip-resistant baked on finish

2.02 CABINET, 5 DRAWER, 33 INCHES, UNDERBENCH Equipment Identifier: 1106



a. Stanley Storage Systems, Allentown, PA (610) 797-6600

b. Model: SEP 1016-AL with accessories


a. Lyon Metal Products, Inc., Aurora, IL (708) 892-8941

b. Equipto, Tatamy, PA (610) 253-2775



a. Width: 30 inches

b. Depth: 27-3/4 inches

c. Height: 33 inches

2. Quantity of drawers: Five

3. Drawer capacity: 400 pounds each (minimum)

4. Drawer dimensions:

a. Usable width: 25-1/8 inches

b. Usable depth: 25-1/8 inches

c. Drawer usable height (drawers numbered top to bottom):

1) Drawers 1 and 2: 3 inches

2) Drawer 3: 3-7/8 inches


3) Drawer 4: 6-1/4 inches

4) Drawer 5: 7 inches


1. Cabinet shall be heavy gauge channel formed sheet steel with mountings permitting installation of various height drawers, front columns with drilled and tapped bolt holes.

2. Base design shall include front and rear forklift openings of ample strength to permit moving of fully loaded cabinet. Front base plate shall be provided. Base shall be drilled for bolting to the floor.

3. Drawer suspension shall be designed for total interchangeability for all drawer heights. Sealed steel roller bearing system shall permit full drawer extension at rated capacity without sagging.

4. Drawers and trays shall be fabricated of smooth sheet metal with partition and divider mounting hole grid punched on 3/4 inch centers. Drawer walls shall be slotted on 3/4 inch centers for mounting dividers and partitions.

5. Drawer pulls shall be nominal 3/4 drawer width with 1 inch high label holder provided with paper labels and protective vinyl shields and end caps.

6. Drawer dividers shall have a minimum of 12 divided sections.

7. Drawer heights shall be available in front heights of 3 inches to 12 inches and not over 1-1/2 inch increments.

8. Provide seismic bracing and anchorage to meet any local, state, and national codes and provisions.

D. Accessories: Recessed base - Provide 3 inch high recessed base, Stanley Storage Systems Model No. RB-1, for each drawer unit (brings total height to 36 inches)

E. Finish: Phosphate primer covered by durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard colors

2.03 CABINET, FLAMMABLE MATERIALS, LARGE Equipment Identifier: 1140


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified herein by manufacturer's name and model to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features, and construction.

a. Equipto, Tatamy, PA (610) 253-2775

b. Model: FSC 45S



b. Justrite Manufacturing Co., Des Plaines, IL (847) 298-9250



1. Storage capacity: Up to nine each, 5 gallon containers


a. Width: 43 inches

b. Depth: 18 inches


3. Shipping weight, nominal: 353 pounds


1. Cabinet shall comply with NFPA combustible liquids Code No. 30 and OSHA safety requirements.

2. Construction shall consist of double wall 18 gauge sheet steel with 2 inch air space between inner and outer walls.

3. Cabinet shall have a 2 inch pan-type bottom.

4. Two screened flame arrester vents per cabinet, one each at left side bottom and right side top, shall be threaded for and provided with 2 inch NPT steel plugs.

5. Leveling feet shall be provided at all four corners.

6. Electrical grounding attachments shall be provided on each side.

7. A spring-loaded fusible link with 160 degree fahrenheit melting point shall actuate self closing double swinging doors mounted with full-length piano hinges. Doors shall be provided with three-point latch mechanism and key lock.

8. Two each adjustable shelves shall be provided between 5-3/8 inches from top and 7-5/16 inches from bottom on 1-5/8 inch centers.


D. Finish: Durable enamel in safety sun yellow with "FLAMMABLE - KEEP FIRE AWAY" in minimum 4 inch bright red letters across doors

2.04 CABINET, STORAGE, GAS CYLINDER, LARGE Equipment Identifier: 1145



a. EGA Products, Inc., Brookfield, WI (414) 781-7899

b. Model: VCC12


a. Tresk Group, Inc., Derby Line, VT (819) 564-2676


b. Hodge Manufacturing Co., Reno, NV (413) 781-6800


1. Overall dimensions:

a. Width: 60 inches

b. Depth: 38 inches



1. Cabinet shall be constructed of 13 gauge, double welded steel constructed in 1-1/2 inch diamond pattern.

2. Cabinet shall have a two compartment system.

3. Manufacturer shall provide identification sign and “No Smoking” decals.

4. Cabinet shall be locked by Authority-furnished padlock.


D. Finish: Painted safety yellow with rust inhibiting primer

2.05 CABINET, STORAGE, GAS CYLINDER, SMALL Equipment Identifier: 1146



a. EGA Products, Inc., Brookfield, WI (414) 781-7899

b. Model: HCC16


a. Tresk Group, Inc., Derby Line, VT (819) 564-2676

b. Hodge Manufacturing Co., Reno, NV (413) 781-6800



a. Width: 60 inches

b. Depth: 38 inches



1. Cabinet shall be constructed of 13 gauge, double welded steel constructed in 1-1/2 inch diamond pattern.


2. Cabinet shall have a two compartment system.

3. Manufacturer shall provide identification sign and “No Smoking” decals.

4. Cabinet shall be locked by Authority-furnished padlock.

D. Finish: Painted safety yellow with rust inhibiting primer

2.06 CABINET, STORAGE, SHOP Equipment Identifier: 1185




b. Model: 1710



b. Republic Storage Systems, NE Canton, OH (216) 438-5800


1. Shelf capacity: 200 pounds per shelf (minimum)


a. Width: 36 inches

b. Depth: 18 inches


d. Space remaining 4 shelves evenly, approximately 15 inches center to center


1. Four shelves, flanged, constructed of 18 gauge steel. Shelf adjustments on maximum 2 inch centers without removing fasteners.

2. Doors shall have a three-point locking system with factory key-lockable handle. Doors shall open a full 180 degrees and be flush mounted when closed with latching actuated cast steel handle.

3. Each door shall be hinged on three welded heavy-duty steel pin hinges.

4. Back, front, and sides shall be flush with no bolt heads on front or sides.


D. Finish: Durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard colors


2.07 CHAIR, SHOP, ELECTRONIC DISSIPATIVE Equipment Identifier: 1215



a. Lyon Metal Products, Aurora, IL (630) 892-8941

b. Model: 2054N





a. Width: 18 inches

b. Depth: 18 inches

c. Seat height adjustment: 19 inches to 27 inches

d. Footing diameter: 20 inches

2. Capacity: 250 pounds


1. Chair shall have abrasion resistant fabric, 2-1/2 inches thick.

2. Chair backrest depth and height shall adjust by 3 inches.

3. Chair shall have adjustable 20 inch diameter circular foot ring.

D. Finish: ESD seat and back shall have copper fibers and ESD treatment with a durable fabric in manufacturer’s standard color

2.08 DESK, STAND-UP, WITH STOOL Equipment Identifier: 1220




b. Model: 2250 with Accessories


a. Penco Products, Oaks, PA (610) 666-0500


b. Lista International Corporation, Holliston, MA (508) 429-1350


1. Overall desk dimensions, nominal:

a. Width: 34-1/2 inches

b. Depth: 30 inches

c. Height: Adjustable, 45-7/8 inches to 52-1/8 inches

2. Drawer dimensions:



c. Height: 3-1/2 inches

3. Writing surface front edge height: Adjustable, 36-5/8 inches to 42-7/8 inches


1. Top shall be 18 gauge steel.

2. Sides shall be 22 gauge steel.

3. Adjustable height legs shall be 12 gauge steel with intermediate adjustments.

4. Drawer shall have rolled handle and built-in key lock.

5. Shelf at bottom shall be provided to serve as stringer between legs for rigidity and also be adjustable.

D. Accessories: Stool, Lyon No. 2084N, one each

E. Finish: Durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard colors

2.09 PLATFORM, WORK, PORTABLE, 90 INCHES HIGH Equipment Identifier: 1385



a. Ladder Man, Columbus, OH (614) 784-1120

b. Model: 41925


a. Cotterman Co., Croswell, MI (810) 679-4170

b. Gillis, Prospect Heights, IL (877) 445-5471



1. Maximum capacity: 500 pounds


a. Width: 32 inches

b. Length: 76 inches

c. Platform height: 90 inches

3. Platform dimensions:

a. Width: 24 inches


4. Weight: 173 pounds


1. Wide work platform with one-half inch sure-grip rubber pad.

2. Platform shall have six casters. Two four inch swivel in the front, two four inch rigid in the back and two six inch rigid in the center.

3. Platform shall be of heavy-duty welded steel construction.

4. Platform shall be constructed with nine steps with grip strut treads.

D. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color

2.10 PLATFORM, WORK, PORTABLE, 40 INCHES HIGH Equipment Identifier: 1388



a. Ladder Man, Columbus, OH (614) 784-1120

b. Model: 40225


a. Cotterman Co., Croswell, MI (810) 679-4170

b. Gillis, Prospect Heights, IL (877) 445-5471


1. Maximum capacity: 500 pounds


a. Width: 24 inches


c. Platform height: 40 inches



a. Width: 24 inches




1. Extra wide work platform with one-half inch sure-grip rubber pad.

2. Platform shall have two rear four-inch rigid casters.

3. Platform shall be of heavy-duty welded steel construction.

4. Platform shall be constructed with four steps with grip strut treads.


2.11 CAROUSEL, PARTS Equipment Identifier: 1389



a. White Systems, Kenilworth, NJ (908) 272-6700

b. Model: Series 2400


a. Stanley-Vidmar, Allentown, PA (610) 797-6600

b. Remstar International, Inc. Vista, Ca (760) 727-2474


1. Number of pans: 46

2. Maximum pan capacity: 780 pounds

3. Pan dimensions:

a. Width: 72 inches


4. Maximum capacity per module: 25,000 pounds

5. Vertical Travel Speed: 35 feet/minute

6. Access opening at 40 inches above finished floor




c. Height: 23 feet



1. Unit exterior shall be constructed of pre-formed metal skin with a canopy top for prevention of dust entry into unit.

2. Unit shall have a solid steel ladder between modules to allow access to module interior for service and maintenance.

3. Unit access doors shall be slide-down and securable

4. Unit shall possess a microprocessor driven dual-belt tractor-drive pan extractor, eliminating the need for evenly distributed loads within each pan.

5. Provide seismic bracing and anchoring to meet any local, state, and national codes and provisions.

D. Controls: Unit shall possess RS232 and microprocessor keypad mounted above opening which allows for retrieval of specific storage pan/part.

E. Utility Requirements: Electrical - 480 VAC, 3 phase, 30 A, 5 HP

F. Finish: Powder coat in Champagne.

2.12 STACK SYSTEM, WITH RACK MOUNTED CRANE, 48 INCHES BY 48 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 1400



a. Rapidstak Corporation, Blasdell, NY (716) 822-2804

b. Model: 2K Prostak System with 13 bays


a. Ridg-U-Rak, Inc. North East, PA (814) 725-8751

b. Stanley Storage Systems, Allentown, PA (800) 523-9462


1. Pallet racks:

a. Overall dimensions, nominal:

1) Length: 67 feet, 5 inches

2) Width: 16 feet, 10 inches

3) Height: 25 feet, 0-1/2 inches (overall with crane 27 feet, 6-1/16 inches)

2. Number of pallets: 120 – 48 inches by 48 inches, 10 – 72 inches by 48 inches

3. Pallet size: 48 inches wide by 48 inches deep, 72 inches wide by 48 inches deep

4. Pallet capacity: 2,000 pounds

5. Aisle width: 8 feet, 6 inches


6. Rack depth: 4 feet, 2 inches

7. Column spacing: 4 feet, 5 inches (center to center)

8. Rail extension: 4 feet

9. Crane system:

a. Bridge crane:

1) Overall dimensions:

a) Width: 5 feet 4 inches

b) Length: 11 feet 9-3/4 inches

c) Height: 1 foot 11-7/16 inches

2) Lifting capacity: Rated at 2,000 pounds

3) Mast/hoist lifting capacity: 2,000 pounds

4) CMAA service class: C

5) Lift dimensions:

a) Span: 11 feet, 9-3/4 inches

b) Runway length: 67 feet, 5 inches

b. Speeds:

1) Hoist: Maximum high 16; Minimum low 4 FPM

2) Trolley: Maximum high 25 FPM

3) Bridge: Maximum high 80 FPM


1. Pallet racks:

a. Rack’s upright frames shall be sized to carry both the load of the crane and the loads of the material being stored.

b. Rack shall be constructed of steel with heavy duty cross bracing.

c. Rack shall be mounted on seismic footpads with lag bolts designed for Seismic Zone-4.

d. Pallets shall be adjustable on 4 inch increments and supported with (four per deck) “A” channels 1-5/8 inch deep.

e. Installed height from finished floor:

1) Bottom pallet: 6 inches

2) Top pallet: 234 inches

3) Space remaining pallets at 4 feet, 9 inch increments center to center.

2. Mast/hoist system:

a. Mast rotation restraint shall be provided to automatically position at 90 degree intervals. System can be disengaged to provide 360 degree rotation.


b. Mast/column pallet locator shall be included to place forks in position required to remove and replace pallets in their number location.

c. Mast shall have floor locks to hold the mast in place while items are being transferred.

d. Mast shall be constructed of a minimum 7 inch structural steel channel with a standard ITA carriage (no shaft mount).

e. Bottom of mast shall have an adjustable kick plate.

f. Mast shall have a floodlight directed to the load on the forks.

g. Hoist gearing shall be designed to AGMA standards and shall be combination Helical and Spur.

h. Hoist shall be two speed.

3. Crane:

a. Bridge crane shall be a double girder top running overhead traveling type with bridge conduction.

b. Structural steel of all bridge beams shall be A-36 steel, 12-inch wide flange sections.

c. Carriage shall have a free fall prevention device capable of stopping a load within 1 inch.

d. Electrification system shall consist of Duct-O-Wire or equal and mounted off the pallet rack system.

e. Provide 4-foot cantilever overhang to allow crane to travel beyond racking for staging and transfer of material.

4. End trucks:

a. End trucks shall be welded from structural shapes.

b. Wheelbase shall be a minimum of 1/7 of the crane span.

c. Wheel assemblies shall be fixed axle type.

D. Controls:

1. Controls shall be a push button station mounted to the mast.

2. Push button station shall be equipped with emergency stop push pull button.

3. Controls shall be operated at variable frequencies.

E. Accessories:

1. Pallet: Similar to Rapistak 48x48, 120 each. Similar to Rapistak 72x48, 10 each.

2. Magnetic pallet label: 130 each

3. Master column pallet locator: System for placing forks in the exact position required to remove and replace pallets in their number location

F. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 30 A

G. Finish: Durable enamel in Authoritys choice of manufacturer’s standard colors


2.13 STACK SYSTEM, WITH RACK MOUNTED CRANE, 42 INCHES BY 42 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 1401



a. Rapidstak Corporation, Blasdell, NY (716) 822-2804

b. Model: 2K Prostak System with 15 bays


a. Ridg-U-Rak, Inc. North East, PA (814) 725-8751

b. Stanley Storage Systems, Allentown, PA (800) 523-9462


1. Pallet racks:

a. Overall dimensions, nominal:

1) Length: 69 feet, 3 inches

2) Width: 15 feet, 10 inches

3) Height: 25 feet, 0-1/2 inches (overall with crane 27 feet, 6-1/16 inches)

2. Number of pallets: 140 – 42 inches by 42 inches, 10 – 72 inches by 42 inches

3. Pallet size: 42 inches wide by 42 inches deep, 72 inches wide by 42 inches deep

4. Pallet capacity: 2,000 pounds

5. Aisle width: 8 feet, 6 inches

6. Rack depth: 3 feet, 8 inches

7. Column spacing: 3 feet, 11 inches (center to center)

8. Rail extension: 4 feet

9. Crane system:

a. Bridge crane:

1) Overall dimensions:

a) Width: 5 feet 4 inches

b) Length: 11 feet 9-3/4 inches

c) Height: 1 foot 11-7/16 inches

2) Lifting capacity: Rated at 2,000 pounds

3) Mast/hoist lifting capacity: 2,000 pounds

4) CMAA service class: C

5) Lift dimensions:


a) Span: 11 feet, 9-3/4 inches

b) Runway length: 69 feet, 3 inches

b. Speeds:

1) Hoist: Maximum high 16; Minimum low 4 FPM

2) Trolley: Maximum high 25 FPM

3) Bridge: Maximum high 80 FPM


1. Pallet racks:

a. Rack’s upright frames shall be sized to carry both the load of the crane and the loads of the material being stored.

b. Rack shall be constructed of steel with heavy duty cross bracing.

c. Rack shall be mounted on seismic footpads with lag bolts designed for Seismic Zone-4.

d. Pallets shall be adjustable on 4 inch increments and supported with (four per deck) “A” channels 1-5/8 inch deep.

e. Installed height from finished floor:

1) Bottom pallet: 6 inches

2) Top pallet: 234 inches

3) Space remaining pallets at 4 feet, 9 inch increments center to center.

2. Mast/hoist system:

a. Mast rotation restraint shall be provided to automatically position at 90 degree intervals. System can be disengaged to provide 360 degree rotation.

b. Mast/column pallet locator shall be included to place forks in position required to remove and replace pallets in their number location.

c. Mast shall have floor locks to hold the mast in place while items are being transferred.

d. Mast shall be constructed of a minimum 7 inch structural steel channel with a standard ITA carriage (no shaft mount).

e. Bottom of mast shall have an adjustable kick plate.

f. Mast shall have a floodlight directed to the load on the forks.

g. Hoist gearing shall be designed to AGMA standards and shall be combination Helical and Spur.

h. Hoist shall be two speed.

3. Crane:

a. Bridge crane shall be a double girder top running overhead traveling type with bridge conduction.

b. Structural steel of all bridge beams shall be A-36 steel, 12-inch wide flange sections.


c. Carriage shall have a free fall prevention device capable of stopping a load within 1 inch.

d. Electrification system shall consist of Duct-O-Wire or equal and mounted off the pallet rack system.

e. Provide 4-foot cantilever overhang to allow crane to travel beyond racking for staging and transfer of material.

4. End trucks:

a. End trucks shall be welded from structural shapes.

b. Wheelbase shall be a minimum of 1/7 of the crane span.

c. Wheel assemblies shall be fixed axle type.

D. Controls:

1. Controls shall be a push button station mounted to the mast.

2. Push button station shall be equipped with emergency stop push pull button.

3. Controls shall be operated at variable frequencies.

E. Accessories:

1. Pallet: Similar to Rapistak 42x42, 140 each. Similar to Rapistak 72x42, 10 each.

2. Magnetic pallet label: 150 each

3. Master column pallet locator: System for placing forks in the exact position required to remove and replace pallets in their number location

F. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 30 A

2.14 RACK, ARM, SINGLE FACE, 6 FEET WIDE Equipment Identifier: 1421




b. Model: 1062-72 with 1063 end unit



b. MECO, Omaha, Nebraska (402) 341-4939


1. Overall dimensions (nominal):

a. Width: 72 inches between arms

b. Depth: 22 inches



2. Arm capacity: 325 pounds each



1. Construction: Continuously welded heavy gauge steel unit shall have three lateral brace panels and four diagonal braces.

2. Adjustment: Uprights shall be pierced on nominal 1-1/2 inch centers for vertical adjustment of arms.

3. Arms: Seven arms shall be included for each upright, 14 total per single section.

4. Row ends: An extra upright frame shall be provided to finish each row.


D. Finish: Durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard color

2.15 RACK, BULK STORAGE Equipment Identifier: 1455


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified herein by manufacturer’s name and model to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features, and construction.


b. Model: 1028D62S (starter unit) and/or 1028D62A (add-on unit) and Accessories



b. Republic Storage Systems, Canton, OH (216) 438-5800


1. Beams:

a. Capacity: 2,630 pounds per pair of beams

b. Dimensions:

1) Length: 72 inches

2) Width: 3-1/2 inches

3) Depth: 2 inches overall front to back

c. Number of beams per rack section: Eight total (four pairs)

2. Uprights:

a. Capacity: 8,900 pounds per upright


b. Dimensions:


2) Depth, nominal: 24 inches

3) Height: 96 inches

c. Number of uprights per rack section: Two minimum


a. Length: 72 inches

b. Width: 24 inches




1. Beams:

a. Construction: Beams shall be solid shaped welded heavy gauge steel with heavy beam clips MIG-welded to beam ends.

b. Attachment: Beam clips shall have three beam hooks each for insertion into upright slots.

2. Supports: Tie bars for each pair of beams shall fit into slots in beams. There shall be a minimum of two supports provided for each pair of beams.

3. Uprights:

a. Construction: Upright posts shall be heavy duty 1-5/8 by 1-13/16 inch welded 16 gauge steel with tubular steel cross and diagonal members.

b. Adjustment: Upright posts shall have tapered slots on 1-1/2 inch centers for vertical beam adjustment

4. Decking:

a. Construction: Decking shall be 18 gauge corrugated shaped steel.

b. Capacity: Decking shall have a capacity of 2,778 pounds but load is limited to support capacity of beams and uprights.


D. Accessories:

1. Anchors: Floor, for seismic bracing, Equipto No. 190317A, four per starter unit, two per add on unit



2.16 RACK, PALLET, HIGH BAY Equipment Identifier: 1545




b. Model: Uprights U0619242, Beams B6500108, and Decking WD5242L


a. Unarco Materials Handling, Springfield, TN (800) 862-7271

b. Lista, Holliston, MA (508) 429-1350


1. Beams:

a. Minimum capacity: 4,900 pounds per pair of beams

b. Dimensions:

1) Length: 108 inches

2) Thickness: 4-3/10 inches

c. Installed beam height from finished floor:

1) Top beams: 192 inches

2) Remaining four beam levels: 36 inch spacing

3) Verify beam heights with Authority prior to installation

2. Uprights:

a. Capacity: 29,055 pounds per pair of uprights

b. Dimensions:

1) Thickness: 3 inches wide by 3 inches deep

2) Depth: 42 inches


3. Decking:

a. Width: 52 inches

b. Depth: 42 inches

c. Number of channels: Three

d. Capacity: 2,500 pounds

e. Panels per shelf: Two



a. Width: 108 inches

b. Depth: 42 inches



1. Beams:

a. Construction: Beams shall be welded, step-type, heavy gauge steel box channel.

b. Attachment: High tensile studs, four each on each end shall engage tapered keyhole slots in uprights. Integral safety catch automatically snaps and locks into place when beam is properly seated.

2. Uprights:

a. Construction: Continuously MIG welded, heavy gauge steel box section uprights shall have deep channel cross and diagonal K-brace members.

b. Adjustment: Tapered keyhole slots on 2 inch centers shall be provided for vertical beam adjustments.

c. Base plate: Heavy gauge steel shall be LAP welded to upright with holes for anchoring to floor.

d. Row ends: An extra upright frame shall be provided to finish each row as indicated on equipment drawings.

3. Decking:

a. Wire mesh: Continuously MIG welded, 2-1/2 by 4 inches by 6 gauge

b. Support channels: 13 gauge steel



2.17 RACK, SPOOL, WIRE Equipment Identifier: 1570




b. Model: 880-7



b. Republic Storage Systems, Canton, OH (216) 438-5800



1. Uprights:

a. Capacity: 150 pounds per shelf

b. Number of uprights per rack section: Two, minimum


a. Length, nominal: 36 inches

b. Width, nominal: 8 inches



1. Uprights:

a. Construction: Upright posts shall be medium duty 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches steel members.

b. Adjustment: Upright posts shall be adjustable on 1-1/2 inch center increments to hold multiple reels.

2. Rack shall be able to hold wire reels up to 16 inches in diameter on seven shelves.

3. Rack shall have V-shaped shelves with center rod.

4. Shelves shall have fiberboard to deaden noise and prevent excessive uncoiling.



2.18 RACK, SHEET METAL, 1 BAY Equipment Identifier: 1622



a. Meco Omaha, Omaha, NE (402) 341-4939

b. Model: VSR1 (one bay unit)


a. Jarke Corporation, Niles, IL (847) 647-9633



a. Width: 84 inches

b. Depth: 40 inches



2. Capacity: 6,500 pounds per compartment

3. Shipping weight: 257 pounds


1. Construction: Unit shall include three 6 inch angled compartments constructed from 10 gauge formed sheet metal.

D. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color of gray

2.19 SHELVING UNIT, 18 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 1688




b. Model: 773-8S shelving unit with 773-8A add on and accessories



b. Stanley-Vidmar, Allentown, PA (610) 797-6600


1. Number of shelves: Eight

2. Shelf capacity: 1,000 pounds per shelf


a. Width: 36 inches

b. Depth: 18 inches


4. Installed height from finished floor, nominal:

a. Bottom shelf: 4-1/2 inches

b. Top shelf: 84 inches

c. Space remaining bottom six shelves evenly, approximately 12 inches center to center, and the top two shelves 10-1/2 inches center to center



1. Shelf construction shall be double flange18 gauge steel and double flanged box-formed edges on all four sides.


2. Uprights shall be double flanged uprights with tapered bracket slots punched on 1-1/2 inch centers for vertical shelf adjustment.

3. Shelf fastening shall consist of slip-in shelf brackets which reinforce and securely lock shelf into place in all four corners.

4. Units shall share common end panels with adjoining units. Back-to-back units shall be joined with common upright joints.


D. Accessories:

1. Anchors: Floor, for seismic bracing, Equipto No. 190317A, four per starter unit, two per add-on unit

2.20 SHELVING UNIT, 18 INCHES, WITH 6 DRAWERS Equipment Identifier: 1698




b. Model: 4205DN



b. Lista International Corp., Holliston, MA (508) 429-1350


1. Number of shelves: Four total

2. Number of drawers: Six total

3. Shelf capacity: 1,000 pounds per shelf

4. Drawer capacity: 200 pounds per drawer (minimum)


a. Width: 36 inches

b. Depth: 18 inches


6. Drawer dimensions, nominal:

a. Width: 36 inches

b. Depth: 18 inches

c. Height: 6 inches


7. Installed shelf height from finished floor, nominal (shelves numbered one through four, top to bottom):

a. Shelf one: 74 inches

b. Shelf two: 62 inches

c. Shelf three: 50 inches

d. Shelf four: 4-1/2 inches

e. Shelf height: 12 inches


1. Shelf construction shall be double flange 18 gauge steel with box-formed edges on all four sides with front and rear shelf edge reinforced channels.

2. Uprights shall be double flanged uprights with tapered bracket slots punched on 1-1/2 inch centers for vertical shelf adjustment.

3. Shelf fastening shall consist of slip-in shelf brackets which reinforce and securely lock shelf into place in all four corners.

4. Units shall share common end panels with adjoining units or common back panels when installed back-to-back. Back-to-back units shall be joined with common upright joints.

5. Rolling drawers shall be 22 gauge steel with side and back of drawer to be punched with slots to accommodate vertical partitions and dividers. Drawer roller guides to be bolted front to back at uprights.

6. Shelves to be installed above and below banks of drawers.


D. Accessories: Drawer, 36 inches wide, six per unit, with divider


2.21 STORAGE SYSTEM, AUTOMATED, VERTICAL TRAY Equipment Identifier: 1730



a. Remstar International, Inc. Westbrook, Maine (800) 639-5805

b. Model: XP 500 Shuttle VLM


a. Stanley Storage Systems, Allentown, PA (800) 523-9462




a. Depth: 8 feet

b. Width: 11 feet 4 inches

c. Height: 26 feet

2. Tray quantity: 50 total

a. Small: 10 total with HD adjustable steel 4x4 dividers

b. Medium: 20 total with HD adjustable steel 6x6 dividers

c. Large: 20 total with HD adjustable steel dividers

d. Large: 10 total without dividers

3. Shelf rail quantity: Shuttles shall be completely filled with built in rails.

4. Usable tray size:

a. Width: 96.46 inches

b. Length: 34.00 inches

5. Minimum tray spacing: 2.95 Inches

6. Tray adjustment: 0.98 inches increments compression throughout the full height of the system

7. Maximum load height: 28.74 inches

8. Minimum clearance above product: .98 inches

9. Weight shuttle unit:

a. Shuttle weight (empty): 6,413 pounds (approximate)

b. Tray and rail weight: 3,850 pounds (approximate)

c. Shuttle with tray and rails: 10,263 pounds (approximate)

d. Maximum unit capacity for product: 140,000 pounds (approximate)

e. Weight fully loaded: 45,876 pounds (approximate)

10. Load capacity:

a. Maximum load per light tray: 507/22 pounds average per square foot.

b. Maximum load per medium tray: 794/34 pounds average per square foot.

c. Maximum load per heavy duty tray: 1080/47 pounds average per square foot.

d. Maximum unit capacity: 147,780 pounds

11. Lifting speed:

a. With tray: 157.50 feet/minute

b. Without tray: 246.05 feet/minute

12. Extractor speed: 23.62 inches/second

13. Access time:


a. Average: 33.83 seconds in access window

b. Maximum: 41.57 seconds in access window


1. The unit shall be equipped with double tray access from the same opening to allow the operator to have the system automatically retrieve the next desired tray and deliver at the operators command. This system should also be able to deliver trays to an ergonomic height within the access opening set to meet each individuals needs

2. System will come complete with lockable security doors.

3. Unit shall be ESD protected.

4. System shall be provided with a locking tray hold for loading and unloading of individual trays.

5. Variable lift and extraction speeds shall be provided. Both speeds can be set specifically for each tray based upon product stored.

6. The integrated software shall provide advanced levels of inventory control, kitting, order picking, light directed picking, managerial reports, automatic input of orders directly from the customers host system and control of multiple units.

7. System shall include adequate lighting at access point

8. Must be able to secure access to any number or all specified trays by approved operator(s) with password.

9. Machine must be able to handle (automatically) multiply weight capacity trays with the same machine.


D. Controls:

1. The control package shall be designed allow customization of operational controls by the user and allow full control of horizontal and vertical speeds. The four operating modes are:

a. Fixed - each tray has a designated position within the unit

b. Optimized - each tray is measured for height and stored in the unit to maximize density

c. Mixed - select by try whether it is stored in a fixed or optimized mode

d. Fixed height mixed - using the mixed mode a maximum tray height may be assigned to each tray. This prevents tray using more height than is should due to box flaps opening or operator placing incorrect item on a tray.

E. Utility Requirements -

1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 15.5 A

F. Finish: Durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard colors


2.22 TABLE, RECEIVING, STEEL TOP, 10 FEET Equipment Identifier: 1799



a. Durham Manufacturing Co. Co., Inc., Durham, CT (800) 243-3774

b. Model: WBF-48120-95

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITTALS, equipment produced by other manufacturers may be considered as equal.


1. Dimensions:

a. Weight capacity: 2,000 pounds


c. Width: 48 inches

d. Height: adjustable from 28 inches to 42 inches


1. Top shelf, stringers, and legs shall be constructed of 13 gauge steel.

2. Stringers shall be 5 inches wide, flanged and punched to legs.

3. Legs shall be welded channel construction.


D. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard colors

2.23 WORKBENCH, ELECTRONICS, STATIC DISSIPATIVE Equipment Identifier: 1805




b. Model: #388-5C with 464C5 instrument shelf



b. Lista International Corporation, Holliston, MA (508) 429-1350





b. Depth: 30 inches


2. Instrument shelf:

a. Depth: 13-1/2 inches



3. Workbench top:


b. Depth: 34 inches

4. Weight:

a. Workbench: 141 pounds

b. Instrument shelf: 56 pounds


1. Work surface shall be industrial quality dissipative type with 106 to 109 OHMS per square inch resistivity and be constructed of 1-3/4 inch static dissipative plastic laminate with grounding kit. The top shall have a 180 degree full wrap laminate soft edge at the front.

2. Bench legs shall have leveling guides to level the bench.

3. Instrument shelf shall be constructed of 1-3/4 inch static dissipative plastic laminate with front 180 degree full wrap laminate soft edge and have 106 to 109 OHMS per square inch resistivity. Shelf top shall be supported by steel supports on each end. One instrument shelf shall be provided per bench.

4. Comes with two pedestal legs with UL approved fused electrical outlets. All work centers include a bottom shelf and modesty panels.

D. Accessories:

1. Shelf assembly: Instrument, Equipto No. #464C5, one per bench

E. Utility Requirements:

1. 120 VAC, 1 phase, 15A for power strip

2. 120 VAC, 1 phase, 15A for instrument shelf

F. Finish: Table structure shall be durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard colors and the worktop shall be a static dissipative laminate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Coordinate location of rough-in work and utility stub-outs to assure match with equipment to be installed.

B. Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather. Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all equipment items and specified accessories.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman of Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect or designated representative.

B. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings, and manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Positioning: Place equipment in accordance with any noted special positioning requirements generally level (or slight slope as required by instructions), plumb, and at right angles to adjacent work.

2. Fitting: Where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform in a neat, accurate, professional manner without damaging equipment or adjacent work.

3. Anchorage: Attach equipment as directed by Architect or designated representative. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.

C. Upon completion of work, finish surfaces shall be free of tool marks, scratches, blemishes, and stains.

3.03 TESTING

A. After final installation is complete and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be checked with specifications in the presence of the Architect or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. Touch-up damage to painted finishes.

B. Wipe and clean equipment of any oil, grease, and solvents, and make ready for use.

C. Clean area around equipment installation and remove packing and installation debris from job site.

D. Notify Architect or designated representative for acceptance inspection.


3.05 TRAINING

A. Direct the technical representative to provide specified hours of training to designated Authority’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of the following equipment. Coordinate, with Authority, training schedule and list of personnel to be trained.

1. 1389 Carousel, parts; 3 hours (minimum)

2. 1400 Stack system, with rack mounted crane, 48 inches by 48 inches; 2 hours (minimum)

3. 1401 Stack System with rack mounted crane, 42 inches by 42 inches; 2 hours (minimum)

4. 1730 Storage system, automated, vertical tray; 3 hours (minimum)

B. Obtain, from technical representative, a list of Authority’s personnel trained in equipment operations and maintenance.



SECTION 10 56 13 METAL STORAGE SHELVING



1. Cantilever metal storage system.


1. Section 10 56 00 "Storage Equipment" for storage shelving related to vehicle maintenance areas.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal storage shelving.

B. Shop Drawings: For customized metal storage shelving. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include installation details of connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following components, of size indicated below:

1. Shelves: Full size, but not more than 24 inches wide by 12 inches deep . 2. Wall brackets: Full size. 3. Upright wall standards: 24 inches long.

D. Product Schedule: For metal storage shelving.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal storage shelving indicated to comply with

performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For metal storage shelving, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of metal storage shelving from manufacturer.

H. Maintenance Data: For metal storage shelving to include in maintenance manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal storage shelving from single source from single

manufacturer.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility METAL STORAGE SHELVING Santa Monica, CA 10 56 13 -1


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install metal storage shelving until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of blocking and backing required for installation of metal storage shelving attached to wall and ceiling assemblies.

B. Coordinate locations and installation of metal storage shelving that may interfere with

ceiling systems including lighting, HVAC, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, electrical switches or outlets, and floor drains.


A. Cantilever Metal Storage System: Design, fabricate, and install such that:

1. Shelves are cantilevered without front supports, providing completely open, full width, useable shelves.

2. Shelf lengths are provided to completely fit layout indicated on Drawings without voids, gaps, or wasted space.

3. Shelves may be positioned at any height above base bracket. 4. Systems with slots or holes that dictate shelf heights: Not acceptable. 5. Storage system shall be expandable using additional modular components. 6. Storage system can be dissembled and re-erected in different location or

configuration. 7. Loading capacities for 48 inch shelf span.

a. Shelf Uniform Load:

1) 24 inches deep shelf: 120 psf.

b. Shelf Concentrated Load: 450 lbs. c. Loading Capacity for Single Shelf Bracket:

1) 24 inches long bracket: 395 lbs.

d. Loading Capacity for Double Shelf Bracket:

1) 24 inches long bracket: 198 lbs.

B. Seismic Performance: Metal storage shelving shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

2.02 MATERIALS


A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513, Type 2.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT-304.

2.03 CANTILEVERED STAINLESS STEEL STORAGE SHELVING

A. General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, cantilevered storage shelving system.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. EZ Shelving Systems, Inc. b. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company c. Rangine Corporation.

2. Solid surface, stainless steel shelves;

a. Material: 18 gage stainless steel, Types 304-2B and 304-3 complying with ASTM A240 and MIL S-5059.

b. Profile: Form shelf from single sheet with front edge bent down and back edge bent up to provide rigidity. Provide front and back flanges with return so that cut edges are not exposed.

c. Pre-punch shelves for attachment to brackets. . d. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Uprights:

1. Wall-mounted upright with slotted tubular face to receive shelf brackets and

double flange on backside for attachment to substrate. Flanges shall be punched with 1/4 inch diameter mounting holes starting 2 inches from each end.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication: Prefabricate shelving components in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field fabrication; temporarily preassemble shelving components where necessary to ensure that field-assembled components fit together properly. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid, with shelves flat and free of dents

or distortion.


1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and

straight sharp edges. 2. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using

concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Build in straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support

shelf loading. 4. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners,

and similar items.

C. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.

D. Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Fold back and crimp

exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch-wide hem on the concealed side; ease edges of metal plate to radius of approximately 1/32 inch. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to develop strength, minimize distortion, and

maintain the corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed locations, finish welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces before finishing.



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not

acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.




scratches.


foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 6.



A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which metal storage shelving will be attached for properly located

blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.


A. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.

1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using

concealed fasteners where possible. 2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to

support shelf loading and as required for stability. 3. Install seismic restraints. 4. Install shelves at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at equal

spacing. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/2 inch in up to 10 feet of height, not exceeding 1 inch for heights taller than 10 feet .

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage accurately and securely.

B. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored

to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal storage shelving manufacturer.

C. Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



SECTION 10 71 13

FIXED SUN SCREENS



1. Horizontal, fixed, extruded-aluminum sun control assemblies.


1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel" for supporting structure. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior sun control assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from dead loads, live loads, snow loads, snow drift loads, wind loads, and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of assembly or components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

1. Dead Load: As required by applicable building code. 2. Live Load: As required by applicable building code. 3. Snow Load: As required by applicable building code. 4. Snow Drift Load: As required by applicable building code. 5. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) as shown on Drawings., acting

inward or outward. 6. Thermal Movements: Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects:

a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical and descriptive data on sun control components and assemblies.

B. Shop Drawings: For exterior sun control assemblies and accessories. Include plans;

elevations; sections; and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of blades, frames and supports. Show unit dimensions related to supporting and adjoining structures and construction. Indicate anchorage details and locations.

C. Structural Calculations: Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads, including

dead loads, live loads, snow loads, snow drift loads, wind loads and thermal movement. Design calculations shall identify the moment and shear forces transferred to the structure or supports through the installation connections.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility FIXED SUN SCREENS Santa Monica, CA 10 71 13 - 1

D. Structural Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in jurisdiction where Project is located.

1. Weld Calculations: Manufacturer shall submit calculations demonstrating that

fillet welds produced with the Pulsed Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW/MIG) process will withstand a minimum of 526 pounds of force in shear.

E. Weld Strength Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer

specializing in the application of welding technology.

F. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

G. Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples

of same thickness and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of sun controls that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

1. Welding Standards: As follows:

a. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." b. Comply with AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." c. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements before fabrication; and indicate recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate construction to ensure that sun control assemblies fit properly to supporting and adjoining construction and coordinate schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating of sun control assemblies without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that sun control assemblies correspond to established dimensions.



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Aerofoil Louvers by Levolux Limited

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304.

D. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation

indicated. Use stainless steel anchors and inserts for exterior installations. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but

containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Assemble sun control assemblies in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Maintain equal sun control blade spacing, including separation between blades and

frames to produce uniform appearance and in accordance with Drawings.

C. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

D. Join frame members to one another and to fixed sun control blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless size of sun control assembly makes concealed, bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.04 HORIZONTAL, FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM SUN CONTROLS

A. Horizontal, fixed, extruded-aluminum sun control assemblies complying with the following:

1. Blade: as indicated. 2. Outrigger: as indicated. 3. Fascia: as indicated.


4. Provide shading fin with profile cut aluminum end plates shaped to match profile to prevent infiltration of water and/or insects. Mechanically attach end caps to aluminum extrusion.



2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:

cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Fluoropolymer Three-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three-coat,

thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.

a. Color and Gloss: Match Authority's sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place sun control assemblies level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to

screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore

finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action


by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.


A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of sun control devices that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or

detergent not harmful to finishes. Avoid abrasive solutions or materials. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Protect sun control assemblies from damage during construction. Use temporary

protective coverings where needed and approved by the sun control manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion.

D. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches

color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



SECTION 10 75 16

GROUND-SET ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES


A. Section includes ground-mounted flagpoles made from aluminum.

B. Authority-Furnished Material: Flags.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 26 56 00 "Exterior Lighting" for site lighting fixtures. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to the following design criteria:

1. Seismic Loads (General Spectrum):

a. Site Class: D b. Seismic Design Category: D c. Fa: 1.0 d. Fv:: 1.5 e. Ss: 1.82 f. S1: 0.61 g. Sms: 1.82 h. Sm1: 0.91 i. Sds: 1.22 j. Sd1: 0.61

2. Wind Loads:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph (3-second gust). b. Exposure: B c. Lw: 1.0

3. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for

use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles.

B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to

other work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support.

1. Include section, and details of foundation system for ground-mounted flagpoles.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility GROUND-SET ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES Santa Monica, CA 10 75 16 - 1

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For flagpole assemblies indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Include loads, point reactions, and locations for attachment of flagpoles to

building's structure.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain [each type of flagpole] [flagpole] as complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.


A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company. 2. Atlantic Fiberglass Products, Inc. 3. Baartol Company. 4. Concord Industries, Inc. 5. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Ewing Flagpoles. 7. Lingo Inc.; Acme Flagpole Company Division. 8. Millerbernd Manufacturing Company. 9. Morgan-Francis; Division of Original Tractor Cab Co., Inc. 10. PLP Composite Technologies, Inc. 11. Pole-Tech Company Inc. 12. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP. 13. USS Manufacturing Inc.

2.02 FLAGPOLES

A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following:

1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead

calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves. 3. Provide self-aligning, snug-fitting joints.

B. Exposed Height: 30 feet.


C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide entasis-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless

extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch.

D. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for

casting into concrete foundation.

1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2.03 FITTINGS

A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter.

1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.

B. Internal Halyard, Cam Cleat System: 5/16-inch- diameter, braided polypropylene

halyard; cam cleat; and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.

1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two stainless-steel swivel snap hooks per halyard.

a. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers.

2. Plastic Halyard Flag Clips: Made from injection-molded, UV-stabilized, acetal

resin (Delrin). Clips attach to flag and have two eyes for inserting both runs of halyards. Provide two flag clips per halyard.

a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Quiet Halyard"

flag clasp by Lingo. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.

B. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane joint sealant complying

with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use O.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not

acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match PT-4 listed on Finish Legend.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate placement, pattern, orientation of anchor bolts, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove

loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom.

C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of

flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting.

D. Place concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" Compact

concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound.

E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks,

and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base.

3.03 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Ground Set: Place sleeve, center, and brace to prevent displacement during

concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level sleeve and allow concrete to cure. Install flagpole, plumb, in sleeve.



SECTION 10 81 00

AUDIBLE BIRD DETERRENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes stainless steel needle strips for bird control, complete with mounting clips and hardware for applications including the following:

1. At crotch area where steel kicker supporting roof eave connects to vertical

exterior wall. 2. At top of steel kicker supporting roof eave, slightly below clevis pin connection.


1. Division 26 electrical sections for power supply.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: All product information available from manufacturer including installation instructions and standard drawings.

B. Sample for color matching: Contractor shall provide manufacturer with color sample

representative of finished painted surface not less than 2 inches square.

C. Sample for Verification: Samples of specified bird control model or models, not less than 6 inches length.


A. Installers must obtain and review all product information relating to the installation of the specified bird control.

B. Installers must be completely familiar with the installation procedures of the specified

bird control model or models before starting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUDIBLE BIRD DETERRENT

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Subject to requirements, provide Broadband Pro by Bird-X Inc.

1. Dimensions: Control Unit 9” x 9” x 5”, Speakers 4” x 4” x 6” 2. Box dimensions: 19" x 13" x 8" / Shipping weight: 10 lbs 3. Speakers: 8 ohms, 75 watts 4. Coverage: Up to 3,600 sq. ft. (ultrasonic), up to 6 acres (sonic) 5. Power Requirements: 110vAC (220vAC available) 6. 110v cord is 50 ft / 220v and 240v cords are 6 ft 7. Sound Pressure: Ultrasonic sounds 95–102 dB (each speaker) at 1 meter, Sonic

105–110 dB (each speaker) at 1 meter 8. Frequency: Ultrasonic 15–25 kHz, Sonic 3–5 kHz 9. Compliance: Supply power source is UL and C listed 10. EPA Est. 075130-OR-001

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility AUDIBLE BIRD DETERRENT Santa Monica, CA 10 81 00 - 1

B. Finish: Manufactures standard color coat finish matching approved sample.

C. Mounting System: Stainless Steel mounting clips and hardware recommended the manufacturer for application.


A. Confirm that specified surfaces are ready for installation. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean all installation surfaces thoroughly. Remove all bird droppings and related refuse. Remove all closely overhanging foliage, if any. Surface shall be clean and dry before installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install audible bird deterrent in accordance with manufactures written installation procedures.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean excess adhesives from surfaces.


Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility AUDIBLE BIRD DETERRENT Santa Monica, CA 10 81 00 - 2

SECTION 11 11 00 VEHICLE SERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED


1. 2156 Compressor, air, receiver, vertical, 10 HP (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. 2165 Compressor, air, receiver mounted, 25 HP duplex (Ref. Part 2.02)

3. 2227 Dryer, air, refrigerated, 50 CFM (Ref. Part 2.03)

4. 2234 Dryer, air, refrigerated, 500 CFM (Ref. Part 2.04)

5. 2630 Receiver, vertical mounted, 400 gallon (Ref. Part 2.05)

6. 7510 Pump, air piston (CG), with hoist (Ref. Part 2.06)

7. 7520 Pump, air piston, 10:1 ratio (GO1, GO2) (Ref. Part 2.07)

8. 7531 Pump, diaphragm, non-mixing, 40 GPM (WWF) (Ref. Part 2.08)

9. 7540 Pump, diaphragm, used fluid evacuation (UGO) (Ref. Part 2.09)

10. 7700 Reel banks, general (Ref. Part 2.10)

11. 7720 Reel bank (CA, W) (Ref. Part 2.11)

12. 7740 Reel bank (CA, CG, GO1, GO2) (Ref. Part 2.12)

13. 7750 Reel bank (CA, CG, GO1, GO2, WWF) (Ref. Part 2.13)

14. 7833 Tank, polyethylene, 300 gallon (WWF) (Ref. Part 2.14)

15. 7970 Tank, double wall, cube, 500 gallon (GO1, GO2, UGO) (Ref. Part 2.15)

16. 7999 Receiver, used oil, 25 gallon (Ref. Part 2.16)

B. Roughing-in installation of equipment, and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels


A. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Installation: Provide a qualified manufacturer’s representative at site to supervise work related to equipment installation, check out, and start up.

2. Training: Provide a qualified manufacturer’s representative to provide training to Authority’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility VEHICLE SERVICE EQUIPMENT Santa Monica, CA 11 11 00 - 1

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:



B. Operation and Maintenance Manual:

1. Provide complete parts, operating, and maintenance manual covering equipment at time of installation.

2. Description of system and components.

3. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing and compressed air systems.

4. Manufacturer’s printed operating instructions.

5. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventive maintenance information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

6. List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stockage quantity and local parts and service source.

7. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Fold out diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with of Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

D. Include certified data for each unit and accessory system indicating the following:

1. Air compressor performance curves at summer design condition

2. Intercooler performance at summer design condition

3. Air dryer performance at 38 degrees F, dew point at 175 PSIG

4. Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, location and size of field connections, intake air filter outline, blow-off silencer outline, main motor drive data, aftercoolers, control panel, and electrical pneumatic schematics.




C. Substitution Approval: Prior to delivery or installation, submittals for each equipment item by Equipment Identifier shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 - General


Requirements. Acceptance will be based on the technical requirements herein as determined by Authority and Architect.

1.06 WARRANTY







C. Provide equipment and material specified complete in one shipment for each equipment item. Split or partial shipments are not permissible.

1.08 LABELING

A. Manufacturer shall securely attach in a prominent location, on each major item of equipment, a non-corrosive nameplate showing manufacturer’s name, address, model number, serial number, and pertinent utility or operating data.

B. All electrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in categories for which standards have been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacturer’s plant.

C. Provide air receivers meeting requirements of ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels and carry ASME approval stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPRESSOR, AIR, RECEIVER, VERTICAL, 10 HP Equipment Identifier: 2156



a. Champion, Princeton, IL (815) 875-3321

b. Model: VR 10-12 (Reference Detail 11/EQS-500)



a. Ingersol-Rand, Davidson, NC (704) 896-4000

b. Quincy, Quincy, IL (217) 222-7700

B. General Description: Provide simplex compressor unit consisting of air-cooled motor compressors (10 HP), air receiver, after cooler, pressure reducing station, spring isolators and operating controls.

C. Capacities/Dimensions:

1. Motor: 10 HP

2. Receiver: 120 gallon

3. Rating: 175 PSIG

4. Speed: 810 RPM

5. Displacement: 48.5 CFM

6. Delivery: 34.8 CFM

7. Bore diameters: 4-5/8 and 2-1/2 inches

8. Stroke: 3 inches

9. Number of cylinders: Four

10. Output valve: 3/4 inch NPT(F)


a. Length: 46-3/8 inches

b. Width: 30 inches


12. Boltdown dimensions: Four on 28 inch radius

13. Weight (approximate): 890 pounds

D. Features/Performance/Construction:

1. Compressor construction:

a. Construct compressor unit with cast iron housing and head, heat treated forged steel or ductile iron shaft, aluminum alloy connection rods, aluminum pistons with lubricated carbon steel rings, high-strength alloy suction and discharge valves. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.

b. Mount motor and compressor on one-piece ribbed cast iron or welded steel base with provision for V-belt adjustment.

2. After cooler:

a. Provide air compressor with air after cooler suitable for operation under 135 PSIG working pressure.

b. Provide a belt guard style after cooler mounted on the compressor belt guard.


c. After cooler capacity to cool discharge air to within 25 degrees F of ambient air temperature with compressors operating at specified capacity.

3. Air receiver:

a. Provide vertical or horizontal receiver stamped ASME rated for working pressure of 200 PSI. Flange or screw inlet and outlet connections, welded steel construction.

b. Fittings to include adjustable pressure regulator, safety valve, pressure gauge, drain cock, and automatic pneumatic tank drain.

4. Pressure reducing valve:

a. Provide pressure reducing stations complete with automatic reducing valve and bypass, and low pressure side relief valve and gauge.

b. Compressor shall be provided with automatic start/stop capacity controls. In addition, provide centrifugal unloading to ensure for an unloaded compressor at start-up.

c. Valve capacity suitable to compressor reduce pressure from 50 PSI to 180 PSI. Pressure reducing valve to be adjustable upward from reduced pressure.

d. Provide valves with bronze or semi-steel bodies with stainless steel springs, stems, and seats.

5. Controls:

6. Pressure switch to cutout at 100 PSI with minimum differential of 20 PSI.

E. Accessories: CFF100 AD

F. Utility Requirements:

1. Electric: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 10 HP

G. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color

2.02 COMPRESSOR, AIR, RECEIVER MOUNTED, 25 HP DUPLEX Equipment Identifier: 2165


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified by manufacturer's name and model to establish acceptable standard of quality, performance, features, and construction.


b. Model: HRA25D-25 (Reference Detail 2/EQS-500)

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specification and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITALS equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as an equal.

a. Ingersol-Rand, Davidson, NC (704) 896-4000

b. Quincy, Quincy, IL (217) 222-7700


B. General Description: Provide duplex compressor unit consisting of air-cooled motor compressors (25 HP), air receiver, after cooler, pressure reducing station, spring isolators and operating controls.


1. Motors: 25 HP, two each

2. Receiver: 250 gallon

3. Rating: 175 PSIG

4. Speed: 770 RPM

5. Displacement: 218.8 CFM, 109.4 CFM each

6. Delivery: 180.2 CFM, 90.1 CFM each

7. Bore diameters: 6-1/4 and 3-1/4

8. Stroke: 4 inches

9. Number of cylinders: Four

10. Output valve: 1-1/4 inches NPT (F)



b. Width: 62 inches


12. Boltdown dimensions:


b. Width: 48-1/4 inches

13. Weight (approximate): 2,940 pounds


1. Compressor construction:

a. Construct compressor unit with cast iron housing and head, heat treated forged steel or ductile iron shaft, aluminum alloy connection rods, aluminum pistons with lubricated carbon steel rings, high-strength alloy suction and discharge valves. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts.

b. Mount motor and compressor on one-piece ribbed cast iron or welded steel base with provision for V-belt adjustment.

2. After cooler:

a. Provide air compressor with air after cooler suitable for operation under 135 PSIG working pressure.

b. Provide a belt guard style after cooler mounted on the compressor belt guard.

c. After cooler capacity to cool discharge air to within 25 degrees F of ambient air temperature with compressors operating at specified capacity.


3. Air receiver:

a. Provide vertical or horizontal receiver stamped ASME rated for working pressure of 200 PSI. Flange or screw inlet and outlet connections, welded steel construction.

b. Fittings to include adjustable pressure regulator, safety valve, pressure gauge, drain cock, and automatic pneumatic tank drain.

4. Pressure reducing valve:

a. Provide pressure reducing stations complete with automatic reducing valve and bypass, and low pressure side relief valve and gauge.

b. Compressor shall be provided with automatic start/stop capacity controls. In addition, provide centrifugal unloading to ensure for an unloaded compressor at start-up.

c. Valve capacity suitable to compressor reduce pressure from 50 PSI to 180 PSI. Pressure reducing valve to be adjustable upward from reduced pressure.

d. Provide valves with bronze or semi-steel bodies with stainless steel springs, stems, and seats.

E. Controls:

1. Pressure switch to cutout at 100 PSI with minimum differential of 20 PSI.

2. Provide electrical automatic alternation. In the event one compressor fails, another compressor automatically maintains air pressure.

F. Accessories: Condensate filter: Model No. CFF250AD (Grade A, Feature D)

G. Utility Requirements:

1. Electric: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 25 HP per motor, 50 HP total. Provide individual disconnect for each motor.

H. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color

2.03 DRYER, AIR, REFRIGERATED, 50 CFM Equipment Identifier: 2227




b. Model: CRN50 (Reference Detail 11/EQS-500)


a. Ingersoll-Rand Co., Davidson, NC (704) 896-4000

b. Quincy Compressors, Quincy, IL (217) 222-7700



1. Capacity:

a. 38 degrees F: 50 CFM

b. 50 degrees F: 65 CFM



b. Depth: 21 inches


3. Drain connection: 1/2 inch tube

4. Air connection: 1/2 inch FPT

5. Maximum working pressure: 232 PSIG with Level 1 Controller options



1. Provide refrigerated air dryer of self-contained mechanical refrigeration type complete with heat exchanger, refrigeration compressor, moisture removal trap, internal wiring and piping, and full refrigerant charge.

2. Provide air inlet and outlet connections at same level and factory insulated.

3. Heat exchangers to consist of air-to-air and refrigerant-to-air coils. Provide centrifugal type moisture separator located at discharge of heat exchanger. Provide heat exchangers with automatic control system to bypass refrigeration system on low or no load condition.

4. Refrigeration unit of hermetically sealed type to operate continuously to maintain specified 38 degree F dew point. House unit in steel cabinet provided with access door and panel for maintenance and inspection.

5. Provide dryer with air inlet temperature gauge, air inlet pressure gauge, ON/OFF switch, high temperature LED, status indicators, and refrigerant gauge.

6. Provide dryer with oil remover option (Champion-Option F), Grade E (high efficiency) cold coalescing oil removal filter. Extracts oils and aerosols from supply air stream down to 0.008 ppm and solids down to 0.01 microns. Included with Option F is dedicated drain trap.


D. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz, 1/4 HP

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color

2.04 DRYER, AIR, REFRIGERATED, 500 CFM Equipment Identifier: 2234





b. Model: CRN500 (Reference Detail 2/EQS-500)


a. Ingersoll-Rand Co., Davidson, NC (704) 896-4000



1. Capacity:

a. 38 degrees F: 500 CFM



b. Depth: 42 inches


3. Drain connection: 1-1/2 inch FPT

4. Air connection: 2-1/2 inch NPT

5. Maximum working pressure: 250 PSIG with Level 1 and 2 Controller, 200 PSIG for packages with I-Controller Levels 3 and 4



1. Provide refrigerated air dryer of self-contained mechanical refrigeration type complete with heat exchanger, refrigeration compressor, moisture removal trap, internal wiring and piping, and full refrigerant charge.

2. Provide air inlet and outlet connections at same level and factory insulated.

3. Heat exchangers to consist of air-to-air and refrigerant-to-air coils. Provide centrifugal type moisture separator located at discharge of heat exchanger. Provide heat exchangers with automatic control system to bypass refrigeration system on low or no load condition.

4. Refrigeration unit of hermetically sealed type to operate continuously to maintain specified 38 degree F dew point. House unit in steel cabinet provided with access door and panel for maintenance and inspection.

5. Provide dryer with air inlet temperature gauge, air inlet pressure gauge, ON/OFF switch, high temperature LED, status indicators, refrigerant gauge, and Level 3 Controller option.

6. Provide dryer with oil remover option (Champion-Option F), Grade E (high efficiency) cold coalescing oil removal filter. Extracts oils and aerosols from


supply air stream down to 0.008 ppm and solids down to 0.01 microns. Included with Option F is dedicated drain trap.


D. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 HZ, 2 HP


2.05 RECEIVER, VERTICAL MOUNTED, 400 GALLON Equipment Identifier: 2630



a. Manchester Tank, Frankland, TN (931) 484-5163

b. Model: 302433




B. General Description: Receiver shall connect to compressor unit consisting of duplex air-cooled motor compressors (25 HP each, 50 HP total), air receiver, after cooler, pressure reducing station, spring isolators, and operating controls.



a. Diameter: 36 inches


2. Boltdown dimensions: 33 inches bolt to bolt with 9/16 by 7/8 inch slot

3. Weight (approximate): 881 pounds

4. Inlet: 3 inches NPT G port

5. Outlet: 3 inches NPT G port

6. Drain: 1/2 inch NPT


1. Vertical receiver shall be stamped ASME rated for working pressure of 200 PSI.

2. Fittings shall include adjustable pressure regulator, safety valve, pressure gauge, drain cock, and automatic pneumatic tank drain.

3. Receiver shall include an industrial base ring, with four bolt slots.

4. Base ring shall provide a 4 by 6 inch opening to access receiver’s drain opening.


5. Tank shall be constructed of carbon welded steel.

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color; special interior and exterior coatings per Authority’s specifications can be quoted

2.06 PUMP, AIR PISTON (CG), WITH HOIST Equipment Identifier: 7510


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified by manufacturer's name and model to establish acceptable standard of quality, performance, features and construction.

a. Graco, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (612) 623-6000

b. Model: 226018 (Reference Detail 1/EQS-500)

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITALS equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as equal.

a. Balcrank Corporation, Inc., Weaverville, NC (828) 645-4261

b. Lincoln Industrial Corporation St. Louis, MO (314) 679-4200

3. Capacities/Dimensions:

4. Products: Chassis grease (CG)

5. Maximum fluid pressure: 4,000 PSI

6. Air motor diameter: 4-1/4 inches

7. Operating range: 40 to 150 PSI

8. Maximum continuous duty flow rate: 4.4 pounds, minimum

9. Air consumption (approximate) at 1 GPM at 70 PSI: 19 CFM

10. Air inlet: 1/2 inch NPT(F)

11. Material outlet: 3/8 inch NPT(F)

12. Material inlet: Slotted

B. Accessories:

1. Air regulator, 1/2 inch: Graco No. 104266

2. Gauge: Graco No. 100960


1. Provide pneumatic operated piston pump operable with maximum air pressure of 150 PSI.

2. Provide with complete assembly, including combination air filter, regulator, pressure gauge, lubricator, air and product valves, and hose and fitting kit suitable for product.

3. Air motor shall be a non-corrosive design with no metal-to-metal contact compatible with product being delivered.


4. Provide base, inductor plate, elevator, and carriage support system for chassis grease pump with inductor plate.

5. Provide connection from pump back to product tank for proper drain back of fluid in piping riser line and pump.

6. Provide compressed air runaway valve before product fluid pump to eliminate unregulated fluid flow in the event of a product pipe break.

D. Utility Requirements: Compressed air, 3/4 inch line at 100 PSI

2.07 PUMP, AIR PISTON 10:1 RATIO (GO1, GO2) Equipment Identifier: 7520


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified by manufacturer’s name and model to establish acceptable standard of quality, performance, features and construction.


b. Model: Fire-Ball 225853 (Reference Detail 3/EQS-500)


a. Balcrank Corporation., Weaverville, NC (828) 645-4261

b. Lincoln Industrial Corporation, St. Louis, MO (314) 679-4200


4. Products: Gear oil (GO1, GO2)

5. Maximum fluid pressure: 1,800 PSI

6. Air motor diameter: 4-1/4 inches

7. Operating range: 40 to 180 PSI

8. Continuous duty flow rate: 3 to 4 GPM

9. Air consumption (approximate) at 100 PSI: 40 CFM

10. Air inlet: 1/2 inch NPT (F)

11. Material outlet: 3/4 inch NPT(F)

12. Material inlet: 1-1/2 inch NPT(F)

B. Features/Performance/Construction:

1. Provide pneumatic operated piston pump operable with maximum air pressure of 180 PSI.

2. Provide with complete assembly, including adapters for mounting on storage tanks, combination air filter, regulator, pressure gauge, lubricator, air and product valves, and hose and fitting kit suitable for product.

3. Air motor shall be a non-corrosive design with no metal-to-metal contact compatible with product being delivered.


4. Provide thermal relief valves for the pumping system.



C. Accessories:

1. Air regulator, 1/2 inch: Graco No. 104266

2. Pressure gauge: Graco No. 100906

3. Low level cut off: Graco No. 203688

D. Utility Requirements: Compressed air, 100 PSI, 40 CFM; provide filter, regulator, and valves

2.08 PUMP, DIAPHRAGM, NON-MIXING, 40 GPM (WWF) Equipment Identifier: 7531


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified by manufacturer’s name and model to establish minimal acceptable standards of quality, performance, features and construction.



2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specification and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITTALS, equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as equal.

a. Balcrank Corporation., Weaverville, NC (828) 645-4261



4. Products: Windshield washer fluid (WWF)

5. Pump ratio: 1:1

6. Maximum air pressure: 125 PSI

7. Free flow rate: 50 GPM

8. Air consumption (approximate): 67 CFM


10. Fluid outlet: 1 inch NPT(M)

11. Fluid inlet: 1 inch NPT(M)


1. Provide pneumatic operated diaphragm pump operable with maximum air pressure of 125 PSI.


2. Pump shall be provided in complete assembly, include the following accessories for mounting on adjacent wall: Package includes - pump, air regulator, fluid connection hose, air shut-off valve, wall mount bracket, suction hose, and thermal relief kit.

3. Materials: Compatible with product being shelved.

4. Pump shall handle oil, hydraulic oil, automatic transmission fluid, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, water, or fuel.



C. Accessories:

1. Air line filter, 3/8 inch NPT(f), Graco Model No. 106148

2. Quick connect air coupler, 3/8 inch NPT, Graco Model No. 110198

3. Quick connect air nipple, 3/8 inch NPT, Graco Model No. 169971

4. Air runaway valve (stop pump for cavitating when empty), Graco Model No. 224040

5. Air muffler, Graco Model No. 112182

6. Fluid drain valve

7. Grounding wire and clamp, Graco Model No. 238909

D. Utility Requirements: Plumbing, Air, 120 PSI, 67 CFM, 1/2 inch NPT(F); provide filter, regulator, and valves

2.09 PUMP, DIAPHRAGM, USED FLUID EVACUATION (UGO) Equipment Identifier: 7540


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified by manufacturer’s name and model to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features and construction.



2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specification and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITTALS, equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as equal.

a. Balcrank Corporation, Weaverville, NC (828) 645-4261



4. Products: Used oil

5. Pump ratio: 1:1


6. Maximum air pressure: 125 PSI

7. Maximum fluid outlet pressure: 100 PSI

8. Free flow rate: 50 GPM

9. Continuous duty delivery: 2.4 GPM

10. Air consumption (approximate): 67 CFM


12. Fluid outlet: 1 inch NPT(M)

13. Fluid inlet: 1 inch NPT(M)

14. Regulator: 1/2 inch NPT(F)

15. Filter: 1/2 inch NPT(F)


1. Diaphragm pump shall provide 125 PSI air pressure for pump size and capacity as scheduled.

2. Pump shall be provided in complete assembly, including accessories for mounting on walls or adjacent to storage tanks as scheduled, combination air filter, regulator, coupler, nipple, air valve, wall bracket, relief kit, relief valves, wire and clamp, hose kit, adapter kit, and dual inlet manifold suitable for this product.

3. Materials: Compatible with product being shelved.

4. Pump shall handle oil, hydraulic oil, automatic transmission fluid, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, water, or fuel.

5. Pump shall have a tank monitoring system that shuts off the pump via solenoid valve when the used fluid tank is full.

6. Monitoring system shall notify users with a strobe light and an audible alarm system.

7. Audible alarm shall be a minimum of 250 milliamps.

C. Accessories:

1. Wall bracket accessory kit, Graco No. 189233

2. Regulator/filter assembly: 1/2 inch NPT(f), Graco No. 246947 and appropriate fittings and hoses for a complete and operable installation

3. Fluid installation kit, Graco No. 240685, includes swivel union, 4 foot coupled fluid hose, short nipple, y-strainer, 10 foot coupled fluid hose, ball valve, elbow, and nipple

4. Drum adapter kit, Graco No. 109223, includes elbow, nipple, valve, male and female camlock couplers

5. Grounding wire and clamp, Graco No. 238909

6. Quick connect air coupler, 1/2 inch NPT, Graco No. 110199

7. Quick connect air nipple, 1/2 inch NPT, Graco No. 110196

8. Air muffler, Graco No. 112182


9. Tank monitoring system:

a. Manufacturer: BJ Enterprises, (800) 457-0749

b. Tank monitoring system power supply: Model No. 007, with strobe light, one each

c. Solenoid valve: Model No. 007SV, one each

10. Provide label “USED OIL” on pump to identify product (minimum 1 inch lettering)

D. Utility Requirements:

1. Electrical: 120 VAC, 2 A, standard grounded receptacle required

2. Compressed air: 125 PSI, 67 CFM, 1/2 inch NPT(F), provide filter, regulator, and valves

2.10 REEL BANKS, GENERAL Equipment Identifier: 7700


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified by manufacturer's name and model to establish acceptable standards of quality, performance, features and construction.


b. Model: HSL56B (CA), HSH55B (CG), HSM65 (GO), HSL56B (W), HSL56B (WWF)

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specification and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITALS equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may are considered as equal.

a. Lincoln, A Pentair Company, St. Louis, MO (314) 679-4200

b. Balcrank Corporation, Weaverville, NC (828) 645-4261


4. Overall reel dimensions, nominal:

a. Reels (CA, CG, GO1, GO2, W, WWF):


2) Height: 25-3/4 inches

3) Reel diameter: 20 inches

5. Reel fluid inlet:

a. Air, water, and windshield washer fluid: 1/2 inch NPT(M)

b. Chassis grease: 3/8 inch NPT(M)

c. Other commodities: 1/2 inch NPT(M)

6. Hose:

a. Air, water, and windshield washer fluid:


1) Length: 60 feet

2) Inside diameter: 3/8 inch

3) Working pressure: 180 PSI

b. Chassis grease:

1) Length: 50 feet


3) Working pressure: 4,000 PSI

c. Gear oil:

1) Length: 50 feet



d. Other commodities:

1) Length: 50 feet



B. Features/Construction:

1. Construction: Frames, discs, and drum shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel.

2. Double pedestal arm: Reel frame shall have double pedestal arms that are welded and gusseted.

3. Hose guide arm: Reel hose guide arm shall be adjustable with nylon rollers on all four sides of roller assembly at hose opening.

4. Ball stop: Adjustment of hose extension length shall be permitted by ball stop.

5. Rewind mechanism: Reel spring shall be enclosed and fastened to reel drum with a reinforcing clip.

6. Bearings and ratchet latch: Reel shall have permanently lubricated bearings and extra large ratchet latch with audible hose position lock.

7. Hose covers and tubes: Chassis grease hose shall have Buna-N tube and Buna-N PVC cover. All other commodity hoses shall have Buna N nitrile tube with nitrile PVC cover.

8. Delivery kits: Each commodity hose shall be fitted with the dispensing control as listed.

a. Compressed air (CA): Quick disconnect air coupler with necessary adapter fitting, Industrial Interchange Series 3/8 inch female

b. Chassis grease (CG): High pressure control valve with knurled grip body, 1/4 inch, Graco No. 242056 with taper nose coupler and extension; “Z” swivel, Graco No. 24056

c. Gear oil (GO): Electronic in-line style english metered totalizing dispenser set to dispense(up to 5 GPM) in pints to .01 increments, Graco No. 255352


d. Water (W): Water bib control valve with thumb acting trigger, Graco No. 180685

e. Windshield Washer Fluid (WWF): Water bib control valve with thumb acting trigger, Graco No. 180685

C. Accessories:

1. Inlet hose kit: Each commodity reel shall be fitted with the inlet hose kit as listed.

a. Compressed air, water, and windshield washer fluid: 1/2 inch ID by 24 inches, medium pressure hose and fittings, rated for 2,000 PSI, Graco No. 218549, one each

b. Chassis grease: 3/8 inch ID by 24 inches, high pressure hose and fittings, rated for 4,000 PSI, Graco No. 218550, one each

c. Other commodities: 1/2 inch ID by 24 inches, medium pressure hose and fittings, rated for 2,000 PSI, Graco No. 218549, one each

d. Mounting bracket: Graco No. 204741

e. Mounting channel: Holds two reels, Graco No. 24A220; Six reel, Graco No. 24A222

f. Ball stop: Graco No. 218341, one for each reel

2. Identification labels: Each commodity reel shall have a 3/4 by 4-1/4 inch metal identification label indicating the commodity, attached adjacent to each hose guide arm roller assembly. Label kits including label and mounting hardware as listed for each commodity. Note: Label is listed before ().

a. Compressed air (CA): Graco No. 218675

b. Grease (CG): Graco No. 218671

c. Gear oil (GO): Graco No. 218672

d. Water (W): Graco No. 218676

D. Utility Requirements: Contractor shall provide process piping from product pumps to point of connection for each reel specified herein.


2.11 REEL BANK (CA, W) Equipment Identifier: 7720

A. Reel bank shall consist of one each (CA) reel, and one each (W) reel as delineated in part 2.10 REEL BANKS, GENERAL of this specification section.

B. Reference Sheet EQS-500 for Details.

2.12 REEL BANKS, FOUR COMMODITY (CA, CG, GO1, GO2) Equipment Identifier: 7740

A. Reel bank shall consist of one each (CG) reel, one each (GO) reel, one each (CA) reel, and one each (WWF) reel as delineated in part 2.10 REEL BANKS, GENERAL of this specification section.



2.13 REEL BANKS, FIVE COMMODITY (CA, CG, GO1, GO2, WWF) Equipment Identifier: 7750

A. Reel bank shall consist of one each (CG) reel, one each (GO1) reel, one each (GO2) reel, one each (CA) reel, and one each (WWF) reel as delineated in part 2.10 REEL BANKS, GENERAL of this specification section.


2.14 TANK, POLYETHYLENE, 300 GALLON (WWF) Equipment Identifier: 7833


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified herein by manufacturer’s name and model to establish minimum acceptable standards of quality, features, performance, and construction.

a. Norwesco, St. Bonifacius, MN (800) 328-3420







2. Capacity: 300 gallon


1. Above ground tank complies with federal regulation 40CFR-264.193.

2. The components of the system shall be assembled and tested at the factory and shall be covered under warranty.

3. The above ground double wall tank shall be designed and UL listed as an atmospheric tank with a maximum working pressure of one PSI.

4. The above ground double wall tank shall be equipped with one 16-inch diameter opening.

5. Materials: Primary and secondary storage tanks shall be polyethylene. Add Ultraviolet light stabilizer for installation outdoors.

6. Secondary tank enclosure: Installation of tank shall include seismic bracing and anchoring to meet all local, state, and federal codes and provisions.

D. Accessories: Mounting flange plate with vent, and 1 inch NPT fitting for pump connection. Separate closeable fill opening.


E. Finish: None

2.15 TANK, DOUBLE WALL, CUBE, 500 GALLON (GO1, GO2, UGO) Equipment Identifier: 7970



a. Containment Solutions, Conroe, TX (936) 756-7731

b. Model: LC500DW (Reference Detail 3/EQS-500)


a. Dynafab Corporation, Houston, TX (281) 590-5467

b. Highland Tank & Mfg. Co., Stoystown, PA (814) 893-5701


a. Overall dimensions:


c. Width: 46 inches

d. Height: 61 inches



1. Above ground used oil collection and fluid storage systems shall be constructed in accordance with national, state, and locally recognized Above Ground Storage Tank standards, including: Uniform Fire Code, Nation Fire Protection Association 30, 30A, and 31, Underwriters Laboratory Standard 142-for single wall tanks.

2. The components of the system shall be assembled and tested at the factory and shall be covered under warranty.

3. The above ground double wall tank shall be designed and UL listed as an atmospheric tank with a maximum working pressure of one PSI.

4. The primary and secondary storage tanks shall have passed a proof of design hydrostatic pressure test of 25 PSI.

5. The above ground double wall tank shall be equipped with nine NPT openings including two for primary and secondary emergency venting as required by UL-142.

6. Primary tank enclosure:

a. Primary storage tank shall be rectangular in design and constructed with ASTM A-569 or A-36 carbon steel with continuous welds. Tank shall be equipped with lifting lugs.


b. Primary storage tank shall be constructed and pressure tested (minimum 3 to 5 PSI) in accordance with UL-142 standards and carry the appropriate marking.

c. Tank enclosure shall be supported by two 4-inch high steel support feet channels with internal anchoring holes to maintain ground clearance.

7. Secondary tank enclosure:

a. Secondary storage tank shall be a rectangular design constructed with ASTM A-569 or A-36 carbon steel with continuous welds and listed by Underwriters Laboratories as secondary containment.

b. Secondary enclosure shall provide a minimum of 110 percent secondary containment.

c. Secondary enclosure shall be equipped with a 2 inch monitoring port and a 4 or 6 or 8 inch emergency vent port as required by Underwriters Laboratories.

d. Secondary storage tank shall be constructed and pressure tested (minimum 3 to 5 PSI) in accordance with UL-142 standards and carry the appropriate marking.

8. Installation of tank shall include seismic bracing and anchoring to meet all local, state, and federal codes and provisions.

C. Accessories:

1. Double float tank gauge that is calibrated by gallons or inches (Scully or equal)

2. Spill box, 7 gallon, welded to tank

3. Tank monitoring system with high level detection and alarm siren: Model No. 007, BJ Enterprises (800) 457-0749

D. Utilities

1. Venting:

a. Primary: 6 inches NPT(M)

b. Secondary: 6 inches NPT(M)

2. Electrical requirements: 120 VAC, 20 A, standard grounded receptacle


2.16 RECEIVER, USED OIL, 25 GALLON Equipment Identifier: 7999



a. Graco, Incorporated, Minneapolis, MN (612) 623-6000

b. Model: 238-866 Series C, with Accessories (Reference Detail 4/EQS-500)



a. The Aro Corporation, Bryan, OH (419) 636-4242

b. Lincoln, A Pentair Company, St. Louis, MO (314) 679-4200



2. Dimensions:


b. Width: 24 inches

c. Height: 45 inches to 72 inches

d. Fluid inlet/inspection port size: 3 inch (76 millimeter) buttress

e. Fluid outlet fitting size: 3/4 inch NPT

f. Collection funnel size: 22 inches by 24 inches


1. The unit shall be constructed of heavy duty, durable UV-stabilized polymer.

2. The unit shall include a gravity feed drain valve and a quick disconnect method of suction-evacuation from the top of the unit.

3. The unit shall be mounted on semi-pneumatic, synthetic rubber wheels and polyurethane front casters.

4. The unit shall contain a funnel assembly capable of extending to 72 inches.

5. The unit shall be dent, rust, and corrosion resistant.

D. Finish: UV-stabilized polymer complete with necessary markings to readily identify contents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION


B. Inspect equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather. Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all equipment items and specified accessories.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman of Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect.





3. Anchorage: Attach equipment as detailed or directed by Architect or designated representative. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.

4. Air compressor and dryer system:

a. Install compressor unit on concrete foundation with sole plates and isolators. Level, grout, and bolt in place.

b. Make air cock and drain connection on horizontal casing.

c. Install line size ball valve and anti-return valve on compressor discharge.

d. Install replaceable cartridge type filter silencer of adequate capacity for each compressor.

e. Install condensate filter between compressor and dryer

f. Connect condensate drains to nearest floor drain.

g. Install valved bypass around air dryer. Factory insulate inlet and outlet connections.

h. Install takeoffs to outlets from top of main with shutoff valve after takeoff.

5. Fluid storage tanks:

a. Tank shall be seismically braced and anchored to meet all local, state, and federal codes and provisions.

b. Used oil tank shall be vented to the outside of the building.

c. Remove support feet channels prior to final installation.


3.03 TESTING

A. After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specifications in the presence of the Architect or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANUP






3.05 TRAINING

A. Direct the technical representative to provide specified hours of training to designated Metro’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of the following equipment. Coordinate, with Authority, training schedule and list of personnel to be trained.

1. 2156 Compressor, air, receiver, vertical, 10 HP; 2 hours (minimum)

2. 2165 Compressor, air, receiver mounted, 25 HP duplex; 2 hours (minimum)

3. 2227 Dryer, air, refrigerated, 50 CFM; 1 hour (minimum)

4. 2234 Dryer, air, refrigerated, 500 CFM; 1 hour (minimum)

5. 2630 Receiver, vertical mounted, 400 gallon; 1 hour (minimum)

6. 7510 Pump, air piston (CG), with hoist; 1 hour (minimum)

7. 7520 Pump, air piston, 10:1 ratio (GO1, GO2); 1 hour (minimum)

8. 7531 Pump, diaphragm, non-mixing, 40 GPM (WWF); 1 hour (minimum)

9. 7540 Pump, diaphragm, used fluid evacuation (UGO); 1 hour (minimum)

10. 7720 Reel bank (CA, W); 0.5 hour (minimum)

11. 7740 Reel bank (CA, CG, GO1, GO2); 0.5 hour (minimum)

12. 7750 Reel bank (CA, CG, GO1, GO2, WWF); 0.5 hour (minimum)

13. 7833 Tank, polyethylene, 300 gallon (WWF); 05 hour (minimum)

14. 7970 Tank, double wall, cube, 500 gallon (GO1, GO2, UGO); 0.5 hour (minimum)

15. 7999 Receiver, used oil, 25 gallon; 0.5 hour (minimum)

B. Obtain, from technical representative, a list of Metro’s personnel trained in equipment operations and maintenance.



SECTION 11 11 26 VEHICLE WASH EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED


1. 3860 Washer, traincar, with reclamation system (Ref. Part 2.01)

B. Installation:

1. General Contractor shall provide final connection of equipment to all utilities, including disconnects, floor, piping and conduit structures, with labor services and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.

2. Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide piping, wiring, and switching between equipment and roughed-in utilities and equipment connections. Installer is responsible for all system wiring and plumbing for a complete operation of wash equipment after installation.

3. General Contractor shall coordinate all washer features which interface with building systems that are required beyond the roughed-in utilities and equipment disconnects between wash equipment components with the manufacturer before construction of building and approval of the manufacturer’s shop drawings.


A. Experience: Equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer of established reputation with a minimum of 5 years experience supplying specified equipment.

B. Manufacturer’s Representative:


2. Training: Provide technical representative to provide training to Authority’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

3. Service: Provide a qualified manufacturer’s representative to respond within 24 hours of a malfunction with the equipment during the warranty period.

C. Performance:

1. Manufacturer’s representative of the washer shall be responsible for the design of a washer and reclaim that satisfactorily washes the Authority’s vehicle fleet.

2. The equipment shall satisfactorily wash up to approximately 12 vehicles per hour.

3. The amount of detergent used per vehicle to remove road film shall not exceed 0.4 gallons. The evaluation of the system capability to remove road film shall be determined only after the vehicles have dried after the washing has been completed.

4. The vehicle wash shall be able to remove all visible, heavy dirt accumulation and most of the road film from the Authority’s vehicles including undercarriage when

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility VEHICLE WASH EQUIPMENT Santa Monica, CA 11 11 26 - 1

they are driven through the washer at 176 feet/minute with using only alkaline detergents.

5. Manufacturer or Supplier shall guarantee the control of any unpleasant odors created by the water reclamation system for the warranty period after final acceptance. Manufacturer or Supplier shall, as necessary, take whatever action is required, without cost to the Authority, to correct any odor created by the wash system without the use of chemicals during the warranty period.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Product Data in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications.

B. Operations and Maintenance Manual:



3. Engineered floor plan drawings specific to this project with a detailed equipment layout.

4. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing, and compressed air systems.


6. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

7. List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cutsheets, recommended spare parts stock quantity and local parts and service source.

8. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Fold out diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1.




C. Substitution Approval: Prior to delivery or installation, submittals for each equipment item by Equipment Identifier shall be provided in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements. Acceptance will be based on the technical requirements herein as determined by Authority and Authority.

1.05 WARRANTY


A. Warranty work against defects in materials, functions and workmanship specified herein shall be good for 1 year from substantial completion.








C. Provide equipment and materials specified complete in one shipment for each equipment item. Split or partial shipments are not permissible.

1.07 LABELING


B. Label all piping in vehicle wash and water reclamation systems as to its function and flow directions.

C. All electrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in categories for which standards have been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacturer’s plant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WASHER, TRAINCAR, WITH RECLAMATION SYSTEM Equipment Identifier: 3860



a. InterClean Equipment, Inc., Ypsalanti, MI (734) 975-2967

b. Model: Light Rail Vehicle Wash System



a. N/S Corporation, Inglewood, CA (800) 782-1582

b. Westmatic, Buffalo, NY (866) 747-4567

c. Ross & White Company, Cary, IL (847) 516-3900

B. General Description:

1. The vehicle washer is to thoroughly clean eaves, sides, and skirts of standard light rail vehicles while they are traveling through the system at a uniform speed of approximately 2 miles per hour. Front, back and sides of system and its final dimensions shall be customized for final shape and size of the light rail vehicles in Authority’s fleet. Upon award of the contract, Authority will furnish detailed information on vehicles. Washer controls and operation shall be integrated with water reclamation system. The Light Rail vehicle wash system shall include such items as are necessary to wash the painted vehicle bodies using a mild acid detergent, mild alkaline brush scrub, high pressure spinner rinse using a combination of fresh and recycled water.

C. Wash system shall contain the following components:

1. Detergent arch shall be mounted to a free-standing frame and reach front, back, and sides, as well as side skirt and eaves.

2. Counter rotating brush assembly to clean sides, eaves, and skirts. Brushes shall be of the segmented type in disposable cores. Brush module shall have separate support frame assembly.

3. High pressure wash assembly with free-standing frame to spray front and back of vehicles.

4. Pre rinse arch shall be mounted to a free standing frame and reach front, back, sides as well as skirts and eaves.

5. Final rinse arch to reach front, back, and sides, as well as side skirt and eaves.

6. Blower dryer system at the end of the wash sequence to reach front, back, sides, skirt and eaves.

7. Controls: Sequential starting and stopping of vehicle washer and interfacing controls shall be a pedestal mounted switch, located at the entrance of the wash.

8. Entrance lights: Actuation of the signal light will indicate that there is a vehicle in the wash bay and no vehicles should enter.

9. Speed warning: Speed of vehicle shall be monitored while vehicle is in washer. A visible warning light shall be set off if vehicle exceeds wash speed. Audible alarm shall also indicate excess of speed. Vehicle wash shall deactivate if vehicle speed becomes excessive within 5 seconds. If system shut down occurs, rinse arch shall stay on with a preset time delay. Speed limit controls shall be adjustable in a lockable control box. Control panel for wash system shall be locked out until reset after speed alarm is set off.

10. Splash shield walls shall be added to reduce splash-back at brushes and spray arches.


11. Miscellaneous wash equipment brush yokes, columns, anchor bolts, pumps, and detergent distribution system.

D. Capacities/Dimensions (nominal):

1. Length: 168 feet

2. Width: 18 feet

3. Minimum clearance: 19 feet

4. Wash bay size: 29 feet wide by 183 long by 22 feet high

E. Features/Performance/Construction:

1. Detergent arch: Fabricated wash piping for the spraying of wash detergents so as to maintain maximum application pressure at all nozzle points. Spray arch shall pre-wet vehicles and apply a mild acidic or alkaline detergent. Provide a minimum of 24 spray nozzles or jets providing a fan-type spray pattern. Fit tower with two 1-1/4 inch diameter pipe connections (minimum). All pipe fittings and nozzles shall be stainless steel of a quality to resist chemical reaction from acid detergent. Tower is to be constructed of acid resistant stainless steel.

a. All piping, pipe fittings, and nozzles shall be stainless steel of quality to resist chemical reaction with acidic detergent.

b. Frame assemblies for detergent arch shall be constructed of acid-resistant stainless steel.

c. Detergent pumps shall provide output of up to 1 GPM in volume. Pumps are designed so that the final concentration can change from 1:10 to 1:100.

d. Activation of the detergent arches will be by photo eyes mounted on the front of the detergent arch.

e. System shall have a 3 HP water booster pump to ensure even water pressure at all times.

f. Detergent arches shall be supplied by reject water from the RO producer that is softened and heated by a 199,000 BTU natural gas heater.

2. Brush and frame assembly: a. Main support frame: The main support columns for the brush arms shall be

hollow hot dip galvanized steel tubing welded to base plates. All welds must be continuous. Base plates shall be bolted to floor with stainless steel anchor bolts. Frame shall be free standing having no requirement for attachment to the trackway structure for lateral or longitudinal support and shall be capable of supporting the brush and drive assembly under impact load due to contact with the car body surfaces, vibration forces induced by the motion of the train and seismic forces.

b. Side and skirt brush assemblies: Side brushes will wash the entire side of light rail vehicle, including the skirts. Secure the brush shafts at the top and bottom of the brush. The brushes shall be designed to contact the car body without inducing dynamic sway or motion to the car and shall rotate in a counter direction to the car travel direction. Side brushes shall be positioned in pairs directly opposite each other, to avoid inducing vehicle sway.


c. Each brush assembly shall be electrically driven by 3 HP motors. Motors shall be completely watertight with factory greased sealed bearings.

d. Water piping and detergent injection system: Each brush shall be provided with a minimum 1 inch galvanized pipe with a minimum of six brass nozzles to flush brushes continuously with 12 GPM minimum detergent-charged recycled water during operation. Each spray nozzle shall be equipped with spring check valves to provide instant start of the water spray.

e. Brushes shall consist of built-up material segments, varying in diameter from 42 inches minimum to 66 inches maximum to match the car body profile. The brushes must be replaceable in segments without requiring the removal of the drive shaft or bearings.

3. High pressure wash assembly:

a. Fronts, between the cars and rear of the cars as well as roof areas of cars shall be cleaned by high pressure sprays. The supplier is responsible to design the system so that adequate washing of these areas is achieved. The supplier shall take into consideration that most rail cars cannot be high pressure washed for the sides due to water leaking inside on the window and door seals. High pressure spray shall be designed to activate and shut off by fast acting valves to eliminate high pressure spray from the sides of the cars.

b. The system shall have proximity sensors, radars, or other supplier selected technology to detect the area in-between the rail cars and allow the front and rear sprays to activate only to wash front and rear surfaces between two coupled cars.

c. The combined flow of high pressure washing of the specified areas must be 600 GPM at 300 PSI.

4. High pressure valves:

a. Maximum velocity allowed in feet per second must not exceed 12 fps.

b. Shall utilize co-axial 2 or 3 way valves. Valve shall utilize a control tube that moves linearly along the same axis as the fluid flow.

c. Valve shall be pressure balanced so that operation is unaffected by inlet pressure or pressure fluctuations.

d. Designed cycle life for the intended application shall be minimum of 500,000 cycles.

e. Adjustable switching time from 150-2,000 milliseconds.

5. Pumping modules:

a. The high pressure pump is of the centrifugal type and shall be capable of producing pressures up to 320 PSI. The pump shall deliver a maximum flow or 300 GPM as determined by the nozzle sizes.

b. Casing: The suction casing is 3.0 inch 250 lb. ANSI flat faced flanged. It shall be oriented to right angles of the vertical center line when viewed from the drive end. The discharge is 2.5 inch 600 lb. ANSI raised face flange oriented on the vertical center line. The suction casing, discharge casing, stage casings and diffusers are made of ductile iron free from blow holes,


sand pockets, or other detrimental defects. Flow passages are smooth to permit maximum efficiency.

c. The impellers are of the enclosed single suction type, hydraulically balanced to minimize axial thrust loads. Each impeller is individually keyed to the shaft. Impeller is bronze.

d. Shaft is standard carbon steel adequately sized for loads transmitted.

e. Bearings are designed for an average life of 50,000 hours. The outboard bearing is a deep groove type; the in board bearings are of the radial roller type with grease fittings.

6. Electric motors:

a. Squirrel cage induction type suitable for across the line starting. Motor shall operate on 575 Volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle and be ODP with a 1.15 service factor.

b. Shall be sized so as not to exceed the name plate horse power during operation. Should be a minimum of 75 HP.

c. Certified by manufacturer for 25 activations per hour.

7. Train speed radar:

a. A stand alone train speed radar system shall be provided. Shall consist of Doppler radar speed detectors and speed display signs with over speed indicating beacons. Detectors shall be located at strategic locations to reduce the cosine error of speed detection to less than two percent of the actual speed of the approaching train.

b. Minimum of two detectors shall be provided.

c. Minimum of two display signs shall be provided. One between the detergent arch and brushes, one within 100 feet of the final rinse arch. Shall be calibrated in miles per hour, having three ten-inch high mechanical digits with a large clearly visible decimal between the second and third digit. Shall indicate speeds up to 10 MPH. Controls shall be provided to illuminate each beacon or strobe when the train exceeds 3 MPH, remain lit if speed is not corrected. The beacons or strobes shall be mounted on top of the speed display signs.

8. Pre rinse arch:

a. Timing of operation and position of the pre rinse arch shall be determined by manufacturer to provide optimum rinse penetration after high pressure wash cycle.

b. Arch shall be constructed of 1-1/4 inch stainless steel pipe and equipped with dual adjustable spray nozzles to evenly apply fresh water to rinse front, rear, sides and roof or vehicle proceeding through the arch.

c. Pre rinse arch shall use RO concentrate water from the RO system.

9. Final Rinse Arch:

a. Shall be similar in design to the pre rinse arch and shall use only RO water.

b. RO system supplied as part of the package shall be minimum of 6,600 GPD.


c. The RO system must be equipped with TDS measuring before and after the membranes and such measurements must be shown on the main control panel touch-screen.

d. Shall include Reverse Osmosis System Analysis (also known as ROSA) for the RO system to be supplied as a part of the bid package.

10. Brush shields: Splash shields shall be furnished as part of the washer equipment for field installation. These shields shall be fabricated from fiberglass sheet. Splash shields shall be furnished for the detergent arch, brush module, high pressure arches, pre rinse arch and final rinse arch as shown on drawings.

11. Blower dryer system:

a. Shall have a minimum of 4 blowers, 2 on each side.

b. Each blower shall be a minimum 10 HP.

c. Blowers are required to adequately dry the train roof and side windows thus preventing any window spotting.

d. If supplier selects to use two large motors, the performance must meet the combined CFM of smaller blowers as specified.

12. Electrical system:

a. System PC must have a standard Windows based user interface that requires no special training.

b. The PC shall be panel mounted onto a 4’x5’x1’ electrical enclosure, which also houses the electrical controls for the wash system. The PC may be mounted in its own enclosure in an office environment.

c. The wash software shall provide the following:

1) Error handling must be provided for each and every line of code. It is not necessary to alert the user of all errors, but handled errors shall be logged to disk.

2) Alarms should have user configuration delays to prevent nuisance tripping.

3) Provide terminal windows for spying on any devices communicating to PC via Ethernet, RS232, etc. These will be used for troubleshooting communication problems.

4) Failure of any single component shall result in disabling the entire wash system. The system will not be allowed to wash vehicles in a crippled state.

d. Control panel shall be designed for operation on a 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz system.

e. All push buttons, selector switches, pilot devices, system control and access functions must be by touch screen operator windows based interface terminal.

f. All motor cables, motor starters, PC, and circuit breakers shall be UL approved.


g. Electrical panel enclosure shall be housed in NEMA # 12 enclosure and watertight.

F. Washer Reclamation System:

1. Manufacturer’s reference: Supplied by same manufacturer of wash system.

2. General description:

a. Water Reclamation System shall be integrated with vehicle washer functions.

b. System shall be capable of capturing used rinse and wash water from vehicle wash system and reconditioning it by means of settling pits, screens, baskets, and a centrifugal filter system for reuse in vehicle wash system.

c. Re-circulated water shall not be used in final rinse unit of vehicle wash system.

3. Features/Performance/Construction:

a. Location: Tanks and principal system components can be located above or below ground for simplified installation and maintenance.

b. Sump pumps:

1) Self priming type for transferring water from sump pit to the above ground recycled water tank through the filtration system. Minimum capacity shall be 250 GPM of cleaned water.

2) The capacity of the sump pump shall allow for the pressure losses from two cyclone separators used in series and GPM after the pressure losses shall be bigger or equal to the high pressure wash water usage.

3) The sump pump shall be designed to handle solids that will be found in wash water.

c. Cyclone separators:

1) Two cyclone separators used in series, the cleaned water from the first cyclone shall pass through the second cyclone separator to ensure maximum solid removal performance. Two cyclone separators shall be provided in series with at least one of them being in-line.

2) Cyclone centrifugal separators shall provide second and third stage filtration.

d. Cyclone solid removal:

1) Downflows from cyclone separators shall be pumped back to the exit end of the trench pit with a solid handling pump. The solid removal pumping shall be activated when cyclone separators need to be purged. Solid removal from cyclone separators by gravity alone shall not be acceptable.

e. Aeration system:

1) System shall provide air into trench pit to prevent algae and odor build-up. Aerated water shall be evenly distributed throughout the pit even when the wash system is not operational. The system shall be


designed to have no odors from algae. No odor masking deodorants or other chemical use to kill odors shall be allowed.

f. Stainless steel pump intake filter:

1) Stainless steel intake filter screen to provide first stage filtration for sump pump intake. The pump intake filter shall be sized 0.015 inches for smaller.

2) Intake filter shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall have slotted orifices. Intake filter shall prevent any dirt from clogging the recycled water spray nozzles under all circumstances.

3) Intake filter screen shall be equipped with high pressure air back wash system that is automatically activated by the reduced flow into the pump intake.

g. Reclamation tank:

1) Constructed of linear low-density polyethylene with a minimum holding capacity to allow recycling a minimum of 250 GPM continuous flow.

2) Tank shall have conical bottom with a minimum of 35 degree slope equipped with a 6” bottom manhole, float switch connections and other required fittings. The tank to be equipped with a steel support structure with 1/2 inch thick polyethylene continuous support for the cone part of the tank.

h. Enzyme-catalyzed water treatment system:

1) Biological water treatment system shall be included in total system design. Shall be designed to eliminate and/or reduce the total petroleum hydrocarbon loading within the recycled water body.

2) Shall be equipped with an automatic product injection system for delivery of specialized biological products and enhancements. This system will treat the reclaim wash water generated during the vehicle wash process.

3) System shall deliver a constant supply of biological products, bio-enhancements, and oxygen to support degradation of organic constituents. The biological products and enhancements shall be injected directly into the circulation/aeration discharge pipeline of the recycling system, where they will then subsequently be discharged into the wash water pit.

4) The automatic product injection system shall consist of low flow injector pumps that inject biological products on a continuous basis. The operating temperature of the pump shall be 35 – 110 degrees Fahrenheit. Product flow rates shall be 0.5 – 1.5 liters per day, adjustable. Product delivery shall be through 3/8 inch diameter polyethylene tubing.

4. Controls:

a. Functions of water reclamation system shall be fully integrated with vehicle washer controls for purposes of system shut down and odor control.


b. An electrical relay shall be incorporated into control system to cause both washer and reclaim system to shut down if either one should fail.

c. Timer shall be included in system controls to cause transfer pump to continue to re-circulate water through centrifugal filter unit. Pump shall re-circulate water for not less than 15 minutes after a vehicle clears the vehicle washer and every 4 to 10 hours for 5 to 20 minutes when the system has not been in operation.

d. During the re-circulating cycle, when the main high-pressure pump is not being operated, the overflow from the clean water tank will be re-circulated back to the dirty water tank for re-filtering.

e. ON/OFF switching and other electrical controls and enclosures shall meet standards of vehicle washer Equipment No. 3860 and applicable National Electrical Code Requirements.

G. Controls:

1. The equipment shall clean the vehicles automatically after the train’s operator activates the entrance switch, which is located on a pedestal at the entrance to the wash.

2. The equipment shall be designed so that vehicles may pass through the wash bay at speeds up to 10 MPH without being washed. Brushes will retract to provide clearance to all light rail vehicle surfaces when the system is not operating or during a power failure.

H. Utility Requirements:

1. Plumbing:

a. Water: Minimum 2 inch service line at 40 PSIG minimum

b. Drain: 6 inch minimum from trench drain sump to first of two secondary sumps

c. Compressed air; 1/2 inch 80 PSI

2. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz

I. Finish:

a. Tanks: Polyethylene

b. Piping:

1) Detergent water: Stainless steel

2) Other piping: Galvanized steel

c. Metal framing, supports, and accessories: Galvanized steel

d. Metallic surfaces not suitable for galvanizing shall be coated with epoxy paint or baked enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION




C. Report in writing to the Authority, any damaged, missing or incomplete scheduled equipment, and improper rough-in work or utility stub-outs.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for complete operational equipment installation.

B. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman of Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Authority or designated representative.

C. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings, and manufacturer’s instructions:



3. Anchorage: Attach equipment as directed by Authority or designated representative. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.

4. Upon completion of work, finish surfaces shall be free of tool marks, scratches, blemishes, and stains.

D. Manufacturer shall provide an initial fill of all soap and solution tanks with the recommended brand of chemicals. A list of all recommended chemicals shall be provided to the Authority.

3.03 TESTING

A. After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specification in the presence of the Authority or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

B. Each washer shall be performance tested by consecutively washing, without human assistance and without Manufacturer’s representative personnel involvement, up to about 5 vehicles of Authoritys choosing within 15 minutes.

C. Prior to final acceptance of the Vehicle Wash Equipment by the Authority, the Manufacturer’s Representative shall demonstrate the continuous operating capacity of the Reclamation System in relation to the Wash Equipment. During the 60-minute test, no manual adjustments or overrides are allowed and no solenoid shall be allowed to fill the reclamation tank with fresh water should the sump pump capacity be not able to keep the recycled water tank full.


D. Equipment shall not damage vehicles, including mirrors, windshield wipers and windows, or equipment itself.

E. Malfunctions during testing shall be corrected within 5 days and re-tested. Malfunctions during second testing shall be corrected within 5 days and re-tested.

F. Inadequate Performance: If equipment fails third test, Authority may elect to have all specified Vehicle Wash Equipment and any associated water reclamation system removed from site at no cost or obligation to Authority.

G. The vehicle air dryer must be able to dry off a line of consecutive vehicles going through the wash with no more than six feet separating each vehicle. If the wash system is unable to perform the above requirements, it is not acceptable.

H. All damage to the machine that is incurred as a result of the test shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer/supplier.

3.04 CLEANUP


B. Wipe and clean equipment of any oil, grease and solvents, and make ready for use.

C. Clean area around equipment installation and remove packing or installation debris from job site.

D. Notify Authority or designated representative for acceptance inspection.

3.05 TRAINING


1. 3860 Washer, traincar, with reclamation system; 8 hours (minimum)




SECTION 11 11 29 SHOP EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED


1. 1204 Cart, cleaning (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. 1793 Table, welding, layout, 8 feet (Ref. Part 2.02)

3. 1870 Workbench, wood top, 6 feet (Ref. Part 2.03)

4. 1903 Workbench, teardown, mobile (Ref. Part 2.04)

5. 2085 Buffer/grinder, 8 inches, with pedestal (Ref. Part 2.05)

6. 2090 Buffer/grinder, 10 inches, with dust collector (Ref. Part 2.06)

7. 2205 Drill press, variable speed, 15 inches (Ref. Part 2.07)

8. 2220 Drill press, variable speed, 20 inches (Ref. Part 2.08)

9. 2221 Mounter, steel rail tire, press on (Ref. Part 2.09)

10. 2222 Mounter, steel rail tire, bolt on (Ref. Part 2.10)

11. 2340 Scrubber, floor, 28 inch path (Ref. Part 2.11)

12. 2372 Lathe, engine, 15 inches by 50 inches (Ref. Part 2.12)

13. 2373 Mill, vertical, 10 inches by 54 inches (Ref. Part 2.13)

14. 2380 Machine, lathe, wheel, underfloor (Ref. Part 2.14)

15. 2385 Shunter, vehicle, rail, battery operated, 160 tons (Ref. Part 2.15)

16. 2410 Lift, pallet, 5,500 pounds (Ref. Part 2.16)

17. 2415 Pusher, electric (Ref. Part 2.17)

18. 2600 Press, electric/hydraulic, 100 ton (Ref. Part 2.18)

19. 2643 Recovery unit, refrigerant, rolling, multiple type (Ref. Part 2.19)

20. 2690 Saw, band, horizontal (Ref. Part 2.20)

21. 2832 Vise, combination, swivel base, 5 inches (Ref. Part 2.21)

22. 2915 Welder, MIG, portable, with wire feed (Ref. Part 2.22)

23. 2920 Welder, oxyacetylene, with cart (Ref. Part 2.23)

24. 2940 Welder, TIG (Ref. Part 2.24)

25. 3085 Cabinet, abrasive blast, with dust collector, 36 inches (Ref. Part 2.25)

26. 3086 Cabinet, abrasive blast, with dust collector, 48 inches (Ref. Part 2.26)

27. 3121 Degreaser, vapor (Ref. Part 2.27)

28. 3275 Extractor, fume, welding, portable, 1,000 CFM (Ref. Part 2.28)

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility SHOP EQUIPMENT SANTA MONICA, CA 11 11 29 - 1

29. 3540 Tank, parts, cleaning (Ref. Part 2.29)

30. 3720 Washer, high pressure/hot water, NG, 8 GPM (Ref. Part 2.30)

31. 3781 Washer, Parts, Automatic, 30 Inch Turntable, 1,000 Pounds (Ref. Part 2.31)

32. 5430 Lift, parts, 3,000 pounds (Ref. Part 2.32)

33. 5431 Lift, parts, 3,000 pounds, materials handling (Ref. Part 2.33)

34. 5451 Lift, table, 2,000 pounds (Ref. Part 2.34)

35. 5454 Lift, table, 15,000 pounds, 8 feet by 12 feet platform, pit mounted (Ref. Part 2.35)

36. 5561 Lift, table, scissor, mobile, 6,000 pounds (Ref. Part 2.36)

37. 5562 Lift, table, scissor, mobile, 2,000 pounds (Ref. Part 2.37)

38. 5901 Stand, test, truck and assembly (Ref. Part 2.38)

39. 5950 Turntable, truck assembly (Ref. Part 2.39)

40. 9300 Cart, utility, electric, with charger (Ref. Part 2.40)

B. Roughing-in, installation of equipment, and final connection of utilities, with labor, services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment installation.

C. Piping, wiring, and switching between equipment and utilities.





2. Training: Provide technical representative to provide training to Authority’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:





a. Description of system and components.


b. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing and compressed air systems.

c. Manufacturer’s printed operating instructions.

d. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

e. List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stockage quantity and local parts and service source.

2. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Fold out diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1- General Requirements.

3. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with of Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.

b. Submit site specific installation drawings and procedures.





1.05 WARRANTY



C. Defects shall include, but not be limited to noisy, rough or substandard operation; loose, damaged, and missing parts; and abnormal deterioration of finish.








1.07 LABELING



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CART, CLEANING Equipment Identifier: 1204



a. Rubbermaid Commercial Products, Winchester, VA (540) 667-8700

b. Model: 6173-88


a. Continental Commercial Products, Norwalk, CA (562) 921-7935

b. Akro-Mils, Akron, OH, (330) 253-5592






d. Bag capacity: 20.8 gallon

e. Weight: 50 pounds


1. Cart and shelves shall be constructed of high density plastic.

2. Shelves (2) shall be tray style with a clearance between shelves of 10 inches.

3. Casters shall be soft rubber with two casters rigid and two casters swivel.


D. Accessories:

1. Mop bucket and wringer system, model: 7577-88

2.02 TABLE, WELDING, LAYOUT, 8 FEET Equipment Identifier: 1793



a. Weldsale Company, Philadelphia, PA, (215)739-7474

b. Model: WS58B with WS58BNS (Stand)


a. Acorn Iron and Supply Company, Philadelphia, PA (215) 922-7070


1. Dimensions:

a. Width: 60 inches

b. Depth: 96 inches



1. Table top shall be constructed of machined cast iron.

2. Table shall be cross ribbed to reduce sagging and warping.

3. Flush mount stand shall be constructed of 5 by 2 by 3/16 inch steel tubing.

4. Legs shall be constructed of 3/8 by 6 inch steel angle.

5. Footpads shall be constructed of 1/2 inch steel plate.

D. Accessories:

1. Stand: Flush mount, Weldsale No. WS58BNS

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard colors

2.03 WORKBENCH, WOOD TOP, 6 FEET Equipment Identifier: 1870




b. Model: 2223-6W




b. Hodge Manufacturing Company, Inc., Springfield, MA (413) 781-6800



a. Width: 72 inches

b. Depth: 30 inches


2. Weight capacity: 1,700 pounds



1. Tabletop shall be constructed of laminated hardwood, 1-3/4 inches thick.

2. Legs shall be constructed with 12 gauge steel and stabilized with welded cross members.

D. Finish: Durable enamel in Authority’s choice of manufacturer’s standard color

2.04 WORKBENCH, TEARDOWN, MOBILE Equipment Identifier: 1903




b. Model: 2313DTSS


a. Shure Manufacturing Corporation, Washington, MO (636) 390-7100


1. Dimensions:

a. Weight capacity: 1,800 pounds

b. Width: 60 inches

c. Depth: 30 inches

d. Height: 34 inches



1. Table top shall be constructed of stainless steel.

2. Legs shall be constructed with all welded steel, 12 gauge, and stabilized with welded cross members.

3. Stainless steel top shall have 3/4-inch high retaining lip on all sides tapering to the rear center to a 1/2-inch threaded and plumbed drain.

4. A 1/2-inch threaded drain nipple shall be included to allow for connection of a hose to divert fluid to a storage container.


2.05 BUFFER/GRINDER, 8 INCHES, WITH PEDESTAL Equipment Identifier: 2085



a. Baldor Electric Co., Fort Smith, AR (479) 646-4711

b. Model: 8250W with Accessories


a. Delta Machinery, Jackson, TN (800) 223-7278

b. Cincinnati Electrical Tool, Inc., Cleves, OH (513) 941-5000


1. Motor: 3/4 HP, 3,600 RPM

2. Wheel:


b. Thickness: 1 inch

c. Bore: 3/4 inch

3. Distance between wheels: 16-5/8 inches.

4. Height to center of spindle: 39-3/8 inches.


a. Width: 17 inches

b. Depth: 13 inches


1. Motor shall be totally enclosed, direct drive motor rated for continuous service, with permanently lubricated ball bearings.

2. Wheels shall consist of one medium grit and one general purpose wire type.


3. Wheel guards shall be adjustable for wheel wear and shall include adjustable work rests and spark breakers.

4. Quenching pot shall be mounted on pedestal that supports grinder.

D. Controls: Push button magnetic starter shall have “On/Off” push button switch; motor thermal overload and under voltage protection.

E. Accessories: Eye shields, illuminated, installed, Baldor No. GA9-S, one set of two each per grinder. Light bulbs associated with illuminated eye shields shall be controlled by push button magnetic starter for buffer/grinder.

F. Utility Requirements: Electrical, 120 VAC, 1 phase, 3/4 HP, provide power cord with three-prong grounded plug.


2.06 BUFFER/GRINDER, 10 INCHES, WITH DUST COLLECTOR Equipment Identifier: 2090



a. Cincinnati Electrical Tool, Inc., Cleves, OH (513) 941-5000

b. Model: 602-201 with Accessories


a. Delta Machinery, Jackson, TN (800) 223-7278

b. Baldor, Fort Smith, AR (501) 646-4711


1. Motor: 1 HP, 1,800 RPM

2. Wheel:


b. Thickness: 1-1/4 inch

c. Bore: 7/8 inch


a. Width: 27 inches

b. Depth: 32 inches


1. Motor shall be totally enclosed, direct drive motor rated for continuous service, with permanently lubricated ball bearings.

2. Wheels shall consist of one medium grit and one general purpose wire type.


3. Wheel guards shall be adjustable for wheel wear and shall include adjustable work rests and spark breakers.

4. Light bulbs associated with illuminated eye shields shall be controlled by push button magnetic starter for buffer/grinder.

5. Quenching pot shall be mounted on pedestal that supports grinder.

6. Dust collector shall be enclosed with fan and motor in clean air chamber. External bag type dust collectors are not acceptable.

D. Controls: Push button magnetic starter shall have “On/Off” push button switch; motor thermal overload and under voltage protection.

E. Accessories: Eye shields, illuminated, installed, Cincinnati No. 000-131, one set of two each per grinder

F. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 1 HP


2.07 DRILL PRESS, VARIABLE SPEED, 15 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 2205



a. WMH Tool Group/Jet/Wilton, La Vergne, Tennessee (615) 793-8900

b. Model: J-2500 with accessories


a. Palmgren Tools, Chicago, IL (773) 265-5700

b. Emerson- RIGID St. Louis, MO (314) 553-2000


1. Motor: 3/4 HP

2. Range of spindle speed: 200 to 3630 RPM


a. Length 26 inches

b. With: 13-3/8 inches


4. Working dimensions: Spindle to base: 48-3/4 inches

5. Table working surface:




c. Tilt range: 45 degrees to left and right

6. Base working surface:

a. Width: 11 inches


7. Capacities:

a. Spindle taper: 2 MT

b. Spindle travel: 3-1/8 inches

c. Drill to center of circle: 15 inches

d. Quill: Ground steel 1-7/8 inch diameter


1. Drill press shall have a cast iron head.

2. Drill press shall have a larger quill for greater accuracy

3. Head casting shall feature a permanently lubricated ball bearing spindle assembly, using four heavy duty ball bearings mounted in an enclosed quill for extended lift

4. Large ground steel column diameter for maximum head and table support.

5. Hinged metal belt and table support.

6. Accurate depth stop displays inch/mm and has quick set bolt for fast, accurate adjustments.

7. Drill chuck and arbor shall be 5/8 inch.

8. Power cord shall be three-wire grounded cord with three-prong plug.

D. Controls: Push-button switch shall include shrouded START button and protruding STOP button. Switches and other electrical controls shall meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

E. Accessories:

1. Chuck: Jet model No. 5610708

F. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 3/4 HP

2.08 DRILL PRESS, VARIABLE SPEED, 20 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 2220



a. Clausing Industrial, Kalamazoo, MI (269) 345-7155

b. Model: 2277



a. WMH Tool Group/Jet/Wilton, La Vergne, Tennessee (615) 793-8900

b. Dake Machine Tools, Grand Have, MI (800) 937.3253


1. Motor: 1.5 HP

2. Speed: 150 to 2,000 RPM



b. Width: 36 inches


4. Working dimensions:

a. Chuck to table: 33 inches

b. Chuck to base: 43 inches

5. Table working surface:

a. Width: 24 inches

b. Depth: 14 inches

c. Tilt range: 90 degrees to left and right

6. Base working surface:


b. Depth: 13 inches

7. Capacities:

a. Spindle: 3MT, 1.74 inches

b. Spindle travel: 6-1/2 inches

c. Drill to center of circle: 20 inch diameter

d. Hand feed: 1.25 inch diameter

e. Column: Ground steel, 4 inches diameter and 1/2 inch wall thickness


1. Speed control shall permit positive speed changing while machine is running and hold speed setting constant under all load conditions.

2. Belt drive shall remain aligned and automatically maintain full power transmission to spindle at all times.

3. Work table shall have slots, side ledges, and machined front apron with mounting holes shall be provided for clamping of work with mounting holes.


4. Tilt table shall have scale to provide accurate readings to 90 degrees right and left with index pin at level and 45 degrees left and right positions.

5. Table lock shall have expanding bushing to provide rigid positioning of tables at any angle.

6. Hand gear crank shall be provided for table adjustment.

7. Safety features shall include self-ejecting chuck key and completely enclosed drive belt and pulleys.

8. Motor shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC):

D. Controls:

1. Push-button switch shall include shrouded START button and protruding STOP button. Switches and other electrical controls shall meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

2. Depth control shall be self-locking adjustable feed depth stop.

3. Function controls shall provide manual speed selection and feed via knobbed spoked wheels.

E. Accessories:

1. Chuck: Clausing model No. 1897

2. Arbor adapter: Clausing model No. 1898

F. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 1.5 HP

2.09 MOUNTER, STEEL RAIL TIRE, PRESS ON Equipment Identifier: 2221



a. Penn Machine Company LLC, Johnstown, PA (814) 288-1547

b. Model: Bochum 54



1. Hydraulic unit:

a. Stroke: 38 inches

b. Speed

1) Extend: 17 inches per minute

2) Retract: 0 to 28 inches per minute

c. Pump pressure:


1) Operating: 2,600 psi

2) Working: 1,800 psi

2. System weight, nominal: 14,000 pounds

C. Features/Construction:

1. Hydraulic unit assembly: Shall consist of a hydraulic pump/power unit, a hydraulic cylinder, and directional controls to provide the pressing action.

2. Press set assembly: Shall consist of cone/bearing set, base plate, pillars, and segmental ring assembly to provide a platform and a stabilizing force to counter the pressing action. The cone shall press against the rubber blocks to permit the seating of the blocks between the tire and the tire center.


1. 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 14.7 HP

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color.

2.10 MOUNTER, STEEL RAIL TIRE, BOLT ON Equipment Identifier: 2222



a. Penn Machine Company LLC, Johnstown, PA (814) 288-1547

b. Model: Robojack




a. Width: 32 inches



2. Hydraulic unit:

a. 1/2 HP motor

b. Two (2) gallon hydraulic oil capacity

3. System weight, nominal: 850 pounds


1. Hydraulic unit assembly: Shall consist of a hydraulic pump/power unit, hydraulic hoses, disconnects, cylinders, manifold, pressure gauges, control switch and two-way auto advance return type valve.


2. Manually operated pallet jack with custom made lifting tray to customer’s tire.


1. 120 VAC, 1 phase, 9.8A, 1/2 HP, provide 16 foot power cord with standard three-prong grounded plug.

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color.

2.11 SCRUBBER, FLOOR, 28 INCH PATH Equipment Identifier: 2340



a. Tennant, Minneapolis, Minnesota (763) 540-1200

b. Model: 5700-700 D with Accessories


a. Clarke Industries, Inc., St. Louis, Missouri (314) 721-7255

b. American Lincoln, Marietta, GA (816) 213-3025


1. Motors:

a. Scrubbing system: 0.6 HP

b. Transaxle: 0.5 HP






1. The unit shall include an operator console with adjustable height.

2. Operator console shall have a battery level indicator, condition meter, and brush pressure gauge.

3. The unit shall have pneumatic tires.

4. The unit shall have an integral battery charger with cord to plug into a standard grounded receptacle for charging.

5. Automatic scrubber shall be capable of operating for two hours without recharging.

6. The unit shall have a cleaning path of 28 inches.


7. Frame and scrub head linkage shall be protected from damage during a collision when operating unit.

8. Recover tank filter shall prevent contaminants from entering the vacuum.

9. Recovery system shall include a 30-gallon polyethylene solution tank, 30 gallon polyethylene recovery tank, and a 10 gallon demisting chamber.

D. Controls:

1. Single button operation to lower scrub head and set down pressure.

2. Push button water and brush start button.

E. Accessories: Disk Brushes - Poly disk, Tennant No. 222320, two each

F. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 20 A; battery powered, provide receptacle adjacent to equipment storage position

2.12 LATHE, ENGINE, 15 INCHES BY 50 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 2372




b. Model: 8043


a. MSC Industrial, Melville, NY (800) 645-7270

b. DGI Supply (DoAll), Nashville, TN (800) 923-6255


1. Motor: 7-1/2 HP

2. Swing over bed: 15-3/4 inches

3. Swing over cross slide: 9-3/4 inches

4. Center distance: 50 inches

5. Spindle speed: 25 to 2,000 RPM

6. Number of speeds: 12

7. Hole through spindle: 2-1/8 inches

8. Spindle nose: D1-6 Camlock

9. Spindle center: 4MT

10. Inch threads: 56

11. Inch thread range: 2 to 56 TPI


12. Longitudinal feeds: 0.014 to 0.096 inches

13. Cross slide travel: 9-3/4 inches

14. Compound rest travel: 5-1/2 inches

15. Leadscrew diameter: 1-1/8 inches to 4 TPI

16. Tailstock spindle diameter: 2-3/4 inches

17. Tailstock travel: 5-1/2 inches

18. Center: 5 MT


a. Width: 99 inches

b. Depth: 49 inches

20. Weight: 3,300 pounds


1. All headstock gears shall be hardened and ground and headstock shafts are splined and turn on anti-friction bearings.

2. Spindle bearings, gears, shafts, and headstock clutches shall have automatic lubrication by a pumped bath of oil.

3. Gear box consists of three selector levers and an eight-position rotary dial. The feed selections shall automatically disengage the leadscrew drive and independent torque-limiting clutches, giving accidental overload protection on both leadscrew and spline shaft.

4. The study bed shall be manufactured from close-grained cast iron, which shall be induction hardened and ground.

5. The combined vee and flat configuration gives optimum kinematic guiding of the slideways, allowing both precise, accurate machining and vibration-free cutting.

6. The control base is rigidly constructed and incorporates a readily accessible coolant tank mounted at the rear of the machine.

7. The cross slide shall run along a dovetail guide and both saddle and cross slide are provided with adjustable gib strips. The saddle or cross slide can be locked and anti-backlash adjustment is provided on the cross slide nut for heavy cutting.

8. The cast iron apron shall be totally enclosed and splash bath lubricated.

9. A double halfnut assembly is provided for maximum life and screw cutting accuracy. The drop-out worm feed control is mechanically interlocked to prevent simultaneous half-nut and spline shaft engagement.

10. Standard items:

a. Center brush

b. 4 MT centers, two each

c. Inch threading dial

d. Accuracy chart


e. Splash guard

f. Coolant system

g. Set of wrenches and keys

D. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 7-1/2 HP

E. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard colors

2.13 MILL, VERTICAL, 10 INCHES BY 54 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 2373




b. Model: 3VS08


a. Bridgeport, Elmira, NY (607) 734-2281

b. WMH Tool Group/Jet/Wilton, La Vergne, Tennessee (615) 793-8900


1. Spindle Motor: 3 HP

2. Spindle:

a. Speed: Variable 85 to 4350 RPM

b. Feed: 0.006 to 0.015 inches per revolution

c. Travel: 5 inches

d. Taper: R-8

e. Quill Diameter: 3.38 inches

3. Overall Dimensions:

a. Width: 76 inches

b. Depth 71 inches


4. Table Dimensions:

a. Width: 50 inches

b. Depth: 10 inches


6. Table load: 665 pounds



1. Table surface and X, Y & Z ways shall be hardened and ground.

2. Unit shall have a double nut leadscrew for backlash compensation.

3. Unit shall include 7/16 inch imperial drawbar.

4. Unit head will be able to articulate 90 degrees left or right for compound angles.

5. Unit shall have ABEC 7/CP4 spindle bearings.

D. Accessories:

1. 52 pc. Clamping kit, part #2VS010, one each.

2. R-8 Round collet set, part #Z384-SET-6, one each.

3. X-Axis power feed, part #2VSX150, one each.

4. Y-Axis power feed, part #2VSY150, one each.

E. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 5 A, 3 HP

F. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard colors

2.14 MACHINE, LATHE, WHEEL, UNDERFLOOR Equipment Identifier: 2380


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified herein by manufacturer’s name to establish minimal acceptable standards of quality, features, performance, and construction

a. Simmons Machine Tool Corporation/Hegenscheidt-MFD Albany, NY (518) 462-5431

b. Model: U 2000-150 w/accessories

2. Alternate manufactures: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications, equipment produced by other manufactures is acceptable provided all operation features and performance are met as determined by Authority and Architect. Any changes to building foundation track or other building components to meet requirements of alternate manufacturer shall be made with no additional cost to the Contract.


1. Under-floor wheel lathe: Under-floor wheel lathe shall be provided. Lathe shall be capable of re-profiling the wheels of the project specific light rail vehicles to the specifications required by the Association of American Railroads (AAR) Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices, Section G Part II, Rule 1F4. The under-floor wheel lathe shall be located in a sub floor pit. System shall be designed so the wheel-sets to be re-profiled are positioned via the bridging rails leading to the machine. System shall be able to provide wheel-profiling specific to tape size, concentricity, and plane dimensions. The automatic machining system shall eliminate operator intervention to a large extent and thus enable


easy handling of the machine. Unit shall be able to service individual trucks and trucks attached to Authority’s light rail vehicles (LRV).

2. Standard components: The base machine is a standard unit which is CNC controlled and designed to lift measure and machine a wheel set together with its customer-specific supplementary modules. The following components belong to the standard unit:

a. Two machine columns

b. Crossbeam

c. Two tool posts with integrated positioning and wear and diameter measuring probes

d. Two friction roller drives (roller carrier with drive unit)

e. Two lateral guide rollers

f. Electrical equipment

g. Hydraulics

h. Machine casing

i. CNC control Sinumerik 840 DE, make Siemens, control in the local language (if available)

j. Two inner bearing centering units (in basic machine)

k. Two outer bearing centering units with adapters

l. Track system

m. Chip disposal system

n. Necessary extensions according to machining task

3. LRV and wheel set data: The characteristics of Metro’s light rail vehicles are available in specification form or for visual inspection at the Mariposa Maintenance Shop. Relevant vehicle dimensions and characteristics are as listed as follows.

a. Number of trucks per LRV: Three

b. Number of powered trucks: Two

c. Track Gauge: 56.5 inches (1,435 millimeters)

d. Minimum tread diameter: 15.75 inches (400 millimeters)

e. Maximum tread diameter: 47.25 inches (1,200 millimeters)

f. Minimum tire width: 3.35 inches (85 millimeters)


g. Maximum tire width: 5.51 inches (140 millimeters)

h. Minimum center distance, coupled: 59.06 inches (1,500 millimeters)

i. Minimum center distance, uncoupled: 56.12 inches (1,400 milimeters)

j. Maximum axle length to be received: 94.49 inches (2,400 millimeters)

k. Minimum axle length to be received: 62.99 inches (1,600 millimeters)

l. Maximum axle load on the machine: 16.86 tons (150 kN)

m. Maximum axle load on the rail system: 16.86 tons (150 kN)

n. Vehicle weight: 70,000 pounds

o. Wheel type: Bochum three piece cushioned

p. Truck wheelbase: 70.86 inches

C. Capacities/Dimensions

1. Machining accuracy:

a. Maximum diameter difference of two wheels on one axle: 0.1 millimeter (0.004 inches)

b. Maximum diameter difference of four wheels on two axles: 0.3 millimeter (0.012 inches)

c. Deviation from round true on the measuring circle level: 0.1 millimeter (0.004 inches)

d. Deviation from flat running on the wheel face: 0.2 millimeter (0.008 inches)

2. Machine data

a. Drive rating: 4 by 9 kW

b. Cutting force (if restraining axle load is adequate): 15 kN (1.68 tons)

c. Approximate maximum cutting cross-section: 6 square millimeters (0.009 inches squared)

d. Cutting speed, profile machining: 0 to 80 meters per minute (0 to 2.98 miles per hour)

e. Maximum cutting speed, measuring circle level: 270 meters per minute (10.07 miles per hour)

f. Tool post fast gear, axis X: 2.25 meters per minute (0.084 miles per hour)

g. Tool post fast gear, axis Z : 4.7 meters per minute (0.175 miles per hour)


h. Feed range infinitely variable from 0 to 2.5: millimeters (0.098 inches) per revolution

i. Distance between the drive rollers: 370 millimeters (14.57 inches)

j. Diameter of the drive rollers: 220 millimeters (8.66 inches)

k. Maximum noise level of the machine < 80 dB (A) (excluding cutting noise)

l. Measuring system of the machine metric

m. Machine weight: 17 ton


1. Machine columns: The machine columns are attached in the foundation by four leveling shoes, by which they can be aligned, and carry the crossbeam of the machine with two tool posts, the roller carrier with drive and the rail bridge. Moreover, the electrical cabinets are firmly attached to the machine columns. The equipment comprises:

a. Two machine columns

b. Four leveling shoes with anchor bolts and accessories

c. A gauge-dependent cross bar

d. Two fastening frames for electrical cabinets

e. Grouting mortar for the four leveling shoes and other machine components

2. Crossbeam: The crossbeam for both tool posts is executed in cast iron with rigid longitudinal and cross ribbing. As the crossbeam reaches over the whole machine width, both supports cover the entire area from the axle center to the outside face of both wheels, thus ensuring that not only all profiles are machined but also all axle mounted brake disks (between both wheels) and wheel mounted brake disks types can be corrected by turning. To guide the supports, wear resistant and grease-lubricated anti-friction guide ways are used on the entire crossbeam length so that loss lubrication is not necessary. Grease lubrication is cost-effective and clean. It is carried out in accordance with the intervals laid down in the maintenance instructions and by means of the grease gun which is part of the scope of delivery. The feed drives and the integrated helical ball spindles serving to advance the supports in Z-direction are also located at the crossbeams. The ball spindles between both tool posts are protected against dust and turning chips by means of suitable covers.

3. Friction roller drives: The friction roller drive and the main drive constitute the drive unit of the under-floor wheel set lathe. Two friction rollers per wheel actuate the wheel set at the outer tread surface area. The two drive rollers per side and their axes are located in two separate oscillating levers which are mounted in roller bearings in the column. The drive units consist of one motor and one gear box which are also mounted on the oscillating levers. The oscillating levers are sufficiently rigid in horizontal direction in order to guarantee


a constant friction for achievement of the cutting forces. In vertical direction they are sufficiently movably mounted in order to follow the out of roundness of worn wheels. Thus an optimal constant contact is achieved between the driving rollers and the wheel. Lifting of the wheel set from the rails and the support during the machining is by two hydraulic cylinders acting against the raising and lowering of the oscillating levers. The movement of the oscillating levers is synchronized in order to simultaneous raise the drive rollers. The equipment comprises:

a. Four drive rollers in tempered and ground execution which run on grease-lubricated roller bearings.

b. Four oscillating levers, each with one driver roller and shaft, the drive consisting of motor and gear box. The gear box is immersion lubricated.

c. Four hydraulic cylinders for raising and lowering of the oscillating levers.

d. Hydraulic equipment with pressure control valve.

e. Pressure measurement to determine the wheel set load.

f. Four frequency-controlled three-phase asynchronous motors with forced-air fan as.

g. Main drive motors, motor control via inverters.

4. Two outboard bearing centering and hold down units: Adjustable in height for the radial centering of wheel sets running on axle mounted outboard bearing boxes. Adjustable horizontally for the optimal positioning on axle boxes with differing exterior case design. The equipment includes:

a. Two centering units integral to the crossbeam.

b. Two drive units for the vertical adjustment, consisting of a motor and a threaded spindle.

c. The respective roller shoes mounted on no play (Z axis), low friction guide ways.

d. Two supporting adaptors, manually movable on their guides.

e. An auxiliary hand held and portable control pendulum reproducing the necessary functions from the control panel.

5. One set of hold down claws: Used for holding down wheel sets with outboard axle boxes of a non-standard design as required for the specific axle box geometry. The scope of supply includes two hold-down adapters of welded steel structure, for use with the supporting jacks of the inside bearing centering units.

6. Two inboard hearing centering and hold-down units: used for radial centering and increasing the load of inside bearing type wheel sets in position in vehicles. Recommended for vehicles of less than 13.49 (120 kN), axle load. The scope of supply includes two centering units integral to the crossbeam.


7. One set of hold-down adapters: Used for holding down wheel sets with inside axle boxes of a non-standard design as required for the specific axle box geometry. The scope of supply includes two hold-down adapters of welded steel structure, for use with the supporting jacks of the inside bearing centering units.

8. CNC tool post: Each tool post (longitudinal slide, Z direction) carries a vertically arranged (X direction) and CNC controlled, movable cross slide. The cross slide is in standard execution equipped with a quick change tool holder. The tools are manually changed. The cross-section of the cross slide is generously proportioned to allow a smooth cutting procedure even in the event of full projection, taking account of the narrow machining allowances. The cross slide is protected against dirt and chips by a scraper. The equipment comprises:

1) Two longitudinal slides which are moved on the crossbeam (Z-axes)

2) Corresponding roller shoes for stable anti-friction guide-ways without play (Z direction)

3) Two flat slides (X-axes) designed as tool carriers (ram) and provided with one quick holder for each turning tool

4) Solid scrapers for all guides

5) Four drive units for the feed axes serving to generate feed and quick speeds; the actuation of each feed axis is performed by precision helical ball spindle units with enclosed spindle nuts pre-stressed without play.

6) Four highly dynamic three-phase servo motors, continuously adjustable for feed and quick motions

7) Control of the feed drives by a CNC multi-axis train control system

8) An optimally positioned lamp to light the working areas of the tool posts

9. Standard turning tools: Turing tools for profile machining include

a. Two double tool holders serving as quick change receivers

b. Four insert seating units

c. Twenty reversible carbide cutting inserts

10. Positioning, ware, and circumference measuring equipment:

a. A positioning and wear measuring device is provided on each tool post beside the tool carriers. Each measuring device consists of a head with measuring two wheels which are connected to digital travel measuring systems (Z- and X-position) to determine the position of the wheel set, with back to back dimensions and axial run-out, as well as the wear condition of the wheels.

b. The measuring device is hydraulically swiveled into to the working position by an anti-friction guide way.


c. A circumference measuring device is provided on each machine column. Each measuring device consists of a measuring wheel which is connected to a pulse encoder in order to determine the circumference of the wheel.

d. A photoelectric pulse encoder is used to count the number of wheel set turns. For this purpose, a reflective foil is attached to the outer end surface of the wheel tire.

e. The circumference measuring device is also hydraulically swiveled into to the working position. The circumference and thus the diameter of the measuring circle are automatically determined via the number of revolutions performed by the measuring wheel and by the wheel set.

f. The wear measuring wheel scans the actual profile with a wear measuring program. After machining the wheel at a very low chip removal rate, the CNC control system determines the new optimum wheel set diameter by means of the measured data.

g. This nominal machining diameter is indicated at the control panel and can be accepted or corrected by the operator.

h. By comparing the measured actual profile with the nominal machining diameter, the maximum cutting depth is detected and a division into preliminary and finished cuttings is automatically performed. Even during machining without wear measurement (diameter input) or when carrying out a measuring cut, the measuring device is used to detect the position of the wheel disks in relation to the machine.

i. A means of correcting the measuring wheel wear via a calculating parameter is provided by the CNC control system.

11. Rail System:

a. The track vehicle is moved by a shunter, winch or under its own power, onto the machine. For this purpose, the rail track leading over the machine is closed by two hydraulic operated rail sections.

b. By means of the slide rails, the space between the drive rollers at the roller carrier is closed. They are hydraulically actuated and blocked mechanically. The fixed rails of the standard version are supported at the pit edges and the crossbeams of the machine. If the foundation pit is larger, vertical supports which are connected with anchor bolts to the foundation are used to reduce the supporting distance of the roll through rail track.

c. For machining, the wheel set with a precision of approx. ± 1.97 (50 millimeters) should be positioned to the centre of the machine according to the marking on the roll-through rail.

d. To facilitate the preliminary wheel set positioning, a rail section is provided with a wheel set monitoring function. An orange indicator lamp signals whether the center of the wheel set axle has been roughly prepositioned to


the center of the machine. This wheel set monitoring function is automatically actuated when the roll-through rails are closed.

e. When a vehicle is positioned onto the machine or a new wheel set is pre-positioned to the machine, it is imperative that the machine has firstly been returned to its starting position.

f. The starting position is signaled by a green indicator lamp. This lamp enables the operator to recognize whether the rolls through rails are closed and the loading gauge of the vehicles is free.

g. The equipment includes:

1) Two steel bridges in stable welded construction with longitudinal beams

2) Two hydraulically movable connecting rails serving as a mobile connection element between the steel scaffold and the machine, including hydraulic sliding cylinder and control system

3) One set of foundation fixing elements

12. One wheel set positioning indicator: If vehicles are moved, either self-propelled or by means of shunter, an optical signal will be given when a wheel set has reached a point before the machine centre line, so that the wheel set can be stopped in the correct position for machining. The equipment comprises:

a. One light barrier system with fasteners and electrical control

b. One clearly visible optical indicator with electrical energization

13. Machine Casing:

a. The working space of the machine is covered up to rail's upper edge by a sheet metal casing. For fitting work, the metal sheets can be folded to the sides so that the inner bearings of the vehicles can be easily accessed. The working space protection corresponds to the safety regulations.

b. Parts of the machine casing can be manually folded (opened and closed) to carry out fitting and clamping work.

c. The hinged parts are provided with safety switches so that the machine is set to emergency-off mode when opening it during machining and an optical danger signal is emitted. The equipment comprises:

1) A set of guide plates for the chip removal between machine and chip disposal equipment.

2) Safety locking of the flaps to the machine control system.

14. Hydraulic unit:


a. The central hydraulic unit is located at the rear side of the machine at the pit wall. The valve groups and control units are arranged at the unit in the direct surrounding of the machine.

b. The control and setting equipment is easily visible and easily accessible.

c. The hydraulic unit controls the following functions

1) Hydraulic adjustment of the friction rollers at the wheel set for preliminary positioning at the left and right hand side and returning to the starting position

2) Opening and closing the movable roll-through rails.

3) Adjustment of the measuring equipment

4) Positioning of the axial rollers

5) Displacement of the automatic wheel centering and hold-down equipment.

d. The machine is supplied as a complete operative unit including all oils. The equipment comprises:

1) An oil reservoir with large cleaning opening

2) An oil filter with electric monitor

3) An oil level indicator

4) A low-pressure and high-pressure pump unit

5) A three-phase motor serving as pump drive

6) A set of the required switching devices, pressure control valves and pressure gauges, completely installed

7) A noise-reduced version with a noise emission level of ≤ 78 dB(A)

15. Chip Breaking Control: Chip breakage is induced by intermittent oscillation of the tool post feed motion independently of profile contour, feed rate, cutting speed and depth of cut. The feature is manually turned on by the operator as required. The equipment comprises:

1) Electronic hardware in addition to the CNC tool post control including electronic accessories

2) Software program for operator guidance

16. Chip Crusher: Chips are crushed by several counter rotating blades at slow speed. The equipment comprises:

a. A box type crusher casing of heavy welded steel plate


b. One complete crushing mechanism with exchangeable cutting knives made from high grade special steel, ground on both faces for optimum operation

c. One funnel type chip filler made from sheet steel, adjusted to the chip clearances of the machine

d. One complete crusher drive with gear and drive motor

e. One complete electrical control and reversing drive changing automatically when overloaded

17. Lighting: Two low-voltage lamps to light the turning tools, fluorescent lamps to light the control panel area.

18. Machine Earth: The machine earth comprises a potential compensating rail with all connecting lines to the machine and the track system.

19. Automatic tool retraction on tool breakage: A single key operation commands that both tools are retracted out of the cut at the same time. The travelled position is laterally below the profile, enabling a good accessibility for the change of cutting tools. After manual change of the cutting tools, the tools are automatically travelled back by key operation to the position where the cut had been interrupted. Then the profiling operation is continued.

20. Automatic tool retraction control: Control for automatic retraction of the CNC tool posts with the turning tools out of cut in the event of current failure.

21. Integrated chip conveyor in position indicated on drawings.

22. Chip collection system that deposit chips into container at finished floor located outside the pit (See Accessories).

23. Provide interlock system that ensures safe operation of the wheel truing machine and the associated overhead Contact System (OCS). Design the interlocks to prevent operation of the wheel-truing machine when the OCS system is energized. Similarly, provide interlocks to prevent energizing of the OCS until the wheel-truing machine is in the shutdown mode that permits movement of transit cars over the machine.

24. Provide grounding of the wheel-truing machine to track and to eliminate any stray currents infiltration. Electrical and equipment grounding system will be provided as required by applicable codes. All systems shall be bonded together for total system continuity and connected to the building grounding system. All grounding wire will be bare stranded copper sized according to the National Electric Code.

E. Controls:

1. Machine control system:

a. The machine control system comprises three functional units which are directly connected via a bus. The resulting maximum mutual data access ensures a very high degree of automation, optimum operator control and an extensive machine diagnosis. The functional units are as follows:


1) The PLC (programmable logic controller) performs the co-ordination of the machine's individual regulating functions such as, for instance, roller carrier on /off, slide rails forwards / backwards etc. as well as the respective automated procedures.

2) The CNC (computerized numeric control) train control system co-ordinates the programmed tool post movements and thus generates the desired profiles.

3) The MMC (man-machine communication) unit realizes the operator control in interactive mode and performs the necessary calculations (handling of measured values, processing of profile and cutting data etc.).

b. The following tasks and control functions are performed by the machine control system in automatic cycles.

1) Vehicle pick-up operations with automatic determination and control of the roller pressure forces (the adjustment of the hold-down equipment is effected in individual cycles or manually).

2) Control of the wheel tire profile wear and diameter measurements.

3) Data transfer, storage and processing of the measured values of the profile wear and diameter measurements

4) Data transfer of the variables input via the numeric keyboard.

5) Detection of the axial machining level according to the measured distance from the wheel.

6) Calculation of the measuring cycle diameter to be turned according to the lowest degree of chip removal

7) Calculation of the maximum cutting depth with automatic cutting division when exceeding the pre-programmed maximum cutting depths.

8) Intermediate measurement of the wheel diameter during the first cut with automatic correction function to be called up in order to achieve a high degree of uniformity of the diameters on the left and right hand side.

9) Complete profile machining or machining of profile sections, where necessary.

10) Program control for automatic tool wear corrections.

11) Manual tool withdrawal in the case of tool fractures with automatic re-positioning to the point of withdrawal.

12) Output of results by preliminary and subsequent measurements and by calculations as well as further profile data on the CNC screen or via the record printer.


13) Fault diagnosis of all important functional points such as motors, limit switches, hydraulic valves, and electrical control devices. The fault display is in clear text.

c. The equipment comprises:

1) A modular microprocessor CNC track control system, by Siemens, type Sinumerik 840 DE, with central unit and CNC - PLC logic components.

2) A control panel component with full keyboard and TFT color screen.

3) 16 softkey menu keys for operator support.

4) Color graphics for operator support.

5) Input/output modules.

6) Cutting radius compensation.

7) Tool correction memory.

8) Continuously adjustable, wheel set revolution independent feed for both feed axes, adjustable up to fast gear speeds.

9) Override for feeds and drive speeds.

10) A universal interface, V 24 (RS 232 C).

11) Screen texts in the English.

2. Machining program for the CNC control system:

a. The scope of delivery comprises programming of the CNC tool post controls. All programs are filed on a USB stick which can be read into the control system by means of a USB port, included in the scope of delivery. The programs contain:

1) Clamping and unclamping program

2) Measuring program

3) Three machining programs

4) The profile subroutines

b. Machining with the lowest possible degree of chip removal and the resulting economy of valuable tire materials is achieved by a machining of the wheel flange according to Hegenscheidt specific standards.

c. The machining of wheel flanges is produced by a crosswise movement of the tread profile. High technical conformance is achieved by profile-true turning of the tread up to the flange face and from the flange face to the flange rear face.


d. Gauges will be provided for the basic profile only

3. Record printer:

a. Manual numeric data entered via the numeric keyboard of the CNC in interactive mode:

1) Operator Number

2) Train/car Number

3) Number of meters (kilometers) covered by the vehicle

4) Last machining meter (kilometer)

5) Bogie Number

6) Wheel set position

7) Profile Number

8) Reason for machining

b. In addition to the manually entered data, the following data are printed out

1) Date and time

2) Initial diameter, left-right, -calculated or selected final diameter

3) Turned diameter, left-right

4) Cutting depths, left-right

5) Cutting in-feeds, left-right

6) Print-out of data in the case of special order:

a) Flange thickness, left-right, (preliminary and supplementary measured data)

b) Flange heights, left-right, (preliminary and supplementary measured data)


1) A printer with high performance

2) Print driver software for CNC

3) 2,000 pages printing paper

4) A connecting cable between CNC and printer

4. Central control panel


a. A central control panel integrates the operating elements of the CNC control system, the input of production data, the component operating elements, and the auxiliary machine functions.

b. The housing of the control panel can be turned and is arranged at the front right hand side of the base frame.


1) Control panel component of the CNC control system including screen

2) Necessary operating elements, indicator lamps and display instruments

3) Auxiliary control panels for the wheel set bearing centering equipment (depending on the option)

4) Emergency-stop buttons at important positions

5. Electrical cabinet:

a. The electrical cabinet, which consists of a dust-proof steel sheet casing closed at all sides, is delivered firmly mounted to the base frame and constitutes the end of the machine's rear machining area. The electrical cabinet comprises:

1) A completely installed and wired control unit with contactors for the power component

2) The input and output module of the PLC control system

3) The logic parts of the machine control system

4) The feed and main drive control system

5) Temperature control for the interior spaces with air conditioner

6) Service hour counter

7) Reciprocal interlocking of the machine and the shunter/vehicle power supply to interlock with the shunter/vehicle power supply to prevent simultaneous operation with the lathe. Potential-free contacts are provided on the terminal strip in the electrical cabinet.

6. ISDN interface/modem:

a. The machine will be equipped with an ISDN interface to allow remote maintenance, fault diagnosis and technical support. The respective dedicated external phone line is provided by the operator /customer.

b. The equipment comprises:

1) Telecommunication device including electrical equipment


2) One modem

7. Data storage USB stick:

a. Storage of vehicle, machining and profile wear data

b. After each machining operation, vehicle data and machining data as shown on printer log, and the co-ordinates of seven points of measurement on the worn profiles measured by the wear measuring system are stored in the data memory on the PLC/CNC.

c. When called up, these data can be transferred to the USB stick.

d. These data can be stored in ASCII format and filed by the user himself using an AT compatible computer along with a word processing program or optionally with “Data base management‘‘ available from us as software and hardware

e. The equipment comprises:

1) One software program for the PLC for the interpretation, storage and transfer of data

2) One USB interface and integrated within the machine control panel

F. Accessories:

1. One chip disposal system: A chip conveyor shall be provided to carry the chips out of the pit area into exterior chip bins. The first conveyor will be installed underneath the machine and discharges inside the pit via a chip shredder into the second conveyor in order to discharge into chip hoppers. The equipment comprises:

a. Joint hinged belt running on rollers

b. Complete drive with three-phase motor, electrical control system and equipment, integrated in the electrical control of the machine

c. Welded steel structure with floor plates, covers on the sloped section, adjustable supporting feet and supports at the discharge point

d. Exterior discharge conveyor shall be configured with a diverter chute, allowing users to switch from one hopper to another

e. Refer to Design Plans for required configuration of conveyors

f. Technical data:

1) One joint hinge conveyor, joint hinge width: 12 inches (305 millimeters)

2) Center distance-length, approximately (A): 268 inches (6,800 millimeters)


3) Center distance-height, approximately (B): 142 inches (3,600 millimeters)

4) Conveying speed, approximately 20 feet per minute (6 meters per minute)

5) Drive rating: 0.67 HP (0.5 kW)

6) Conveying capacity (short chips): 550 pounds per hour (250 kilograms per hour)

2. Dust and fume extractor: For removing particles and fumes generated during the wheel-set re-profiling operation.

a. This unit is placed within the pit and can be operated in automatic and manual mode. The suction pipes are to be positioned close to the working area of the tooling. Provide suction diversion valve to accommodate vacuum hose connection when lathe is not in use.

b. Technical data:

1) Power rating: 7.37 HP (5.5 kW)

2) Operating voltage: same as basic machine

3) Suction volume: 720 m³/h

4) Vacuum: 22,000 Pa

5) The equipment comprises:

a) Connection diameter: 2.76 inches (70 millimeters)

b) Effective filter area: 30.14 square feet (2.8 m²)

c) Noise level: ≤ 80 dBA

d) Weight: 366 pounds (166 kilograms)

e) A moveable unit with steering rollers

f) One pressure and vacuum gauge for checking the filter saturation with indicating range.

g) One set of suction pipe mains for connecting the extracting system with the suction nozzles

h) 2-inch diameter 30-foot long crushable hose with cuff and hand tool, two total

c. Dimensions:

1) Length: 39.37 inches (1000 mm)


2) Width: 27.56 inches (700 mm)

3) Height: 70.87 inches (1800 mm)

3. Spare parts package for two years.

4. Two sets of truing tools, with insert seating units and carbide cutting inserts.

G. Utilities Requirements:

1. Electrical:

a. Wheel Truing Machine: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 150 A

2. Communication: Data connection

H. Finish: Durable enamel in manufactures standard colors

1.02 SHUNTER, VEHICLE, RAIL, BATTERY OPERATED, 160 TONS Equipment Identifier: 2385


1. Prime manufacturer: Specifications are based on equipment identified herein by manufacturer’s name to establish minimal acceptable standards of quality, features, performance, and construction

a. Simmons Machine Tool Corporation/NITEQ Albany, NY (518) 462-5431

b. Model: NITEQ 1000-E

2. Alternate manufactures: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications, equipment produced by other manufactures is acceptable provided all operation features and performance are met as determined by Authority and Architect.


1. Rail vehicle shunter: Rail vehicle shunter shall be provided to push and pull light rail vehicles (LRV) up to 160 tons. The rail vehicle shunter shall be utilized as vehicle progression system in Wheel Truing Bay. System shall be designed to be operated manually or with remote control unit.

C. Capacities/Dimensions

1. Rated Capacity: 160 Tons

2. Overall Dimensions:

a. Length: 99.6 inches (2,530 millimeters)

b. Width: 78.75 inches (2000 millimeters)

c. Height: 620/3000/3050 millimeters (24.41 / 118.11 / 120.08 inches)

d. Center of Coupler: Shall be determined by the Client’s fleet requirements.

e. Wheelbase: 1800 millimeters (70.87 inches)

f. Single flanged wheels: 550/610 millimeters (diameter) (21.65/ 24.02 inches)


g. Gauge: 1,435 millimeters (56.5 inches)

3. Machine Weight: 5 tons

4. Travel Speeds:

a. Solo

b. Shunting

c. Creep Speed

D. Features/Performance:

1. The shunter vehicle shall include the following:

a. Working Lights

b. De-tracking capability

c. Emergency braking and parking

d. Four hoisting points on four corners

e. One (1) optical signal

f. One (1) back-up beeper alarm

g. One (1) horn – sounds three (3) times (before starting)

h. Four (4) emergency off push buttons, one (1) on each corner of shunter vehicle.

i. One (1) emergency off push button on each separate control panel.

j. Battery “low” contact with overrule possibility

k. One (1) battery main power switch

l. Automatic deceleration curve with regenerated braking

m. Automatic switching “on” / “off” the brakes

n. One (1) horn: via push button as an audible additional warning signal

o. Safety CEF key lock with unique key

p. Two (2) similar key locks; one (1) for manual and one (1) for remote control panel

q. One (1) safety step of galvanized steel in the center of the machine for easy access to the operator stand

r. Grips in signal color on the cab

s. Warning signals and text

t. Limit switches for two (2) shunting directions to hold the shunting vehicle within the permitted confines

u. 2 x 2 white lights indicating forward direction

v. 2 x 2 red lights indicating reverse direction

w. Automatic switching lights forward and reverse

x. Interlock with other facilities capability


y. One (1) hook for tow bar on both ends

2. Four-by-four drive system

a. Flanged rail wheels

3. To recharge unit, unit plugs directly into charger and the charger into a wall receptacle.

E. Accessories:

1. Height adjustable coupler adapters

F. Utilities Requirements:

1. Electrical: 120 VAC for battery charger

G. Finish: Durable enamel in manufactures standard colors.

2.15 LIFT, PALLET, 5,500 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 2410



a. WMH Tool Group/Jet, Elgin, IL (847) 851-1000

b. Model: PTX-2748


a. Wesco Industrial Products, Lansdale, PA (215) 699-7031

b. Mobile Industries, Inc., Des Plaines, IL (800) 527-4612



2. Width: 27 inches

3. Length: 63 inches

4. Height: 45 inches



1. 2.5 inch lowered height

2. Airless hydraulic unit with overload bypass valve, 210 degree turning radius

3. One piece cast iron pump featuring high quality seals, hardened and chrome-plated ram and piston, top of stroke, and overload bypass valve

4. Rounded fork tips with nylon guide rollers

5. Solid steel push rod


6. Extra wide poly over aluminum steer wheels


2.16 PUSHER, ELECTRIC Equipment Identifier: 2415



a. NuStar, Shakopee, MN (800) 800-9274

b. Model: Power Pusher 122


a. DJ Products, Little Falls, MN (800) 686-2651

b. Electro Kinetic Technologies, Germantown, WI (262) 250-7740


1. Motor: 24 volt DC, 200W


3. Width: 28 inches

4. Length: 47 inches

5. Height: 35 inches


1. The unit shall have a single speed reduction gearbox with differential.

2. Controller shall be fully programmable with diagnostic facility.

3. Batteries consist of 2 x 12 volt group 27 deep cycle marine.

4. On board battery charger shall be 3 stage, 24V – 10 Amp.

5. Tires shall be 14 inch diameter x 4.5 inch pneumatic

D. Accessories: Push pad assembly, part no. 401 0000 266

E. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 15A; battery powered, provide receptacle adjacent to equipment storage position.

F. Finish: Chemical resistant exterior with powder-coated finish in manufacturer’s standard color

2.17 PRESS, ELECTRIC/HYDRAULIC, 100 TON Equipment Identifier: 2600




a. OTC, Division of SPX, Owatonna, MN (800) 533-6127

b. Model: 1854


a. Nugier Industries, Gardena, CA (310) 515-6025

b. Dake Division, JSJ Corp., Grand Haven MI (616) 842-7110


1. Press:



2) Depth: 28 inches


b. Capacity: 100 ton

c. Inside width: 35 inches

d. Width between table rails: 6-3/8 inches

e. Maximum vertical clearance: 49-5/8 inches

f. Ram travel: 9-5/8 inches

g. Table spacing increments: 8 inches

2. Electric/hydraulic pump:



2) Depth: 14-7/8 inches


b. Reservoir capacity: 1.9 gallon

c. Oil Delivery: 17 cubic inches per minute at 10,000 PSI

d. Speed: 42 seconds (fully extended a 10-ton ram with 10 inch stroke)

e. Maximum operating pressure: 10,000 PSI


1. Head and bed rails shall be constructed of channel steel with channel ends and corners cut and ground.

2. Pump shall be two-stage electric hydraulic-type with 2-position/2-way manual valve and 6 foot remote control cord.


3. Table shall be vertically adjustable with self-locking winch mounted inside of frame.

4. Gauge shall be large dial-type, mounted on work head isolated from mechanical shock.

5. Hydraulic hose shall be a braid type, light weight and rugged hose capable of 10,000 PSI operating pressure

6. Standard equipment: Two forged steel table plates and two forged steel V-blocks.

D. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 1/2 HP, provide power cord with standard three-prong grounded plug.


2.18 RECOVERY UNIT, REFRIGERANT, ROLLING, MULTIPLE TYPE Equipment Identifier: 2643



a. SPX Robinair, Owatonna, MN (507) 455-7000

b. Model: 17800B




a. Width: 27 inches

b. Depth: 32 inches



3. Operating range: 0 to 120 degrees F

4. Source tank: Two at 50 pounds

5. Air displacement: 1.5 cubic feet per minute


1. Recovery unit shall recover, recycle, evacuate, and recharge systems using medium or high pressure refrigerants, including R-134A and R409.

2. Recover unit shall include a lockout panel to prevent mixing of refrigerants.

3. Recovery unit shall be designed with an oil-less compressor, so as to not require oil changes.


4. Recovery unit shall be designed with self-cleaning capability, so as to be able to switch between refrigerants easily without contaminating refrigerant tanks.

5. After liquid refrigerant recovery process, the unit shall automatically switch to vapor recovery without needing to change the hose configuration.

6. Recovery unit shall be equipped with a float switch cable to provide tank with overfill protection.

7. System shall be able to include temperature probes and service hoses to provide a snapshot of the system’s operation.

8. System shall be able to print the information, verify the refrigerant type, recover, recycle, evacuate, and recharge.

9. Electronic scale - Scales shall be mounted internally and include built-in dampening of shock loads that may occur with the unit is moved over gravel or an uneven floor.

10. Microprocessor - Controls functions; typical evacuation time and recharge amount are pre-programmed as defaults but can be easily changed as needed. Also signals when time to drain the oil container, change the filter, pump oil, or source tank.

11. Vacuum pump shall provide deep vacuum conditions for thorough evacuation, removing air and moisture so system operates and peak efficiency.

12. Compressor shall pull from both the high and low sides for fast recovery. The initial pass through the filter-dryer shall provide single pass recycling.

13. Oil injection shall be capable of replacing system oil through the service hoses while the system is in a vacuum.

14. Constant refrigerant refill shall maintain 12 to 15 pounds of refrigerant in the internal storage vessel.

15. Internal manifolds block assemblies shall control refrigerant flow, reducing the possibility of leaks.

16. Refrigerant identifier shall automatically test refrigerant prior to the start of each job. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, recovery shall be stopped to protect the unit.

D. Controls: High pressure shut-off switch

E. Accessories:

1. Thermal paper for printer, 6 roll package, one each.

2. Refrigerant identification filter, one each as spare.

3. Spin-on recycling filter-drier, one each as spare.

F. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 12 A

2.19 SAW, BAND, HORIZONTAL Equipment Identifier: 2690




a. WMH Tool Group-Jet, Elgin, IL (847) 851-1000

b. Model: HBS-916W, stock number 414468


a. Lobo Power Tools Inc., Pico Rivera, CA (562) 949-3747


1. Motor: 1-1/2 HP

2. Motor speed: 1,725 RPM

3. Blade:

a. Length: 1 by 0.32 by 119-1/2 inches

b. Width: 1 inch

4. Blade wheels: 13 inches

5. Speed settings: 82, 132, 170, 235 FPM


a. Depth: 28 inches

b. Width: 65 inches

c. Bed height: 25 inches

7. Weight, nominal: 625 pounds


1. Motor control with 24 volt on-off key lock switch, magnetic starter, transformer and overload protection.

2. Blade is fully guarded regardless of blade guide position.

3. Coolant system with regulator valve to provide even flow of coolant to blade from 4-1/2 gallon coolant tank.

4. Quick positioning vise with fully adjustable jaws swivels to 45 degrees.

5. Large handwheel and built-in gauge for easy blade tensioning.

D. Controls: On-off key lock switch, magnetic starter, and transformer and overload protection shall meet applicable National Electrical Code requirements.

E. Accessories:

1. Provide two (2) additional 4/6VT Bi-metal blades.

2. Provide five (5) gallons of heavy-duty synthetic coolant.

F. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 1-1/2 HP



2.20 VISE, COMBINATION, SWIVEL BASE, 5 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 2832



a. Jet-Wilton, LaVergne, TN (615) 793-8900

b. Model: 1755, stock number 63200


a. Ridgid Tool Co., Elyria, OH (216) 323-5581

b. Milwaukee Tool and Equipment Co., Milwaukee, WI (414) 645-0200


1. Jaw width: 5-1/2 inches

2. Jaw opening: 5 inches

3. Throat depth: 3-3/4 inches



b. Width: 9 inches


5. Weight: 51.55 pounds

6. Pipe capacity: 1/4 to 3 inches


1. Slide bar shall be machined steel and be oil port operable in machined channel.

2. Base shall swivel 360 degrees and have locking device.

3. Construction shall be semi-steel cast body and have hardened steel nut and screw.

4. Jaws shall have replaceable facings.

2.21 WELDER, MIG, PORTABLE, WITH WIRE FEED Equipment Identifier: 2915



a. Lincoln Electric, Cleveland, OH (216) 481-8100

b. Model: K2701-2, Power MIG 255XT, with accessories



a. Miller Electric Manufacturing Co., Appleton, WI (800) 426-4553

b. Hobart Welding Products, Appleton, WI (800) 626-9420


1. Power source:

a. Output rating: 26 volts DC at 250 welding amps DC at 40 percent duty cycle on 60 hertz

b. Welding ranges:

1) Low: 10 to 20 volts (approximately)

2) High: 20 to 30 volts (approximately)

c. Maximum open circuit voltage: 40 volts

d. Input rating:

1) Line voltage: 230/460/575

2) Cycle: 60 hertz

3) Phase: Single

4) Line amps at rated load of 200 amps, 28 volts, 60 percent duty cycle: 44/38/19/15

5) KVA at rated load: 8.75

6) KVA at no load: 0.7

7) KW at rated load: 8.0

8) KW at no load: 0.35

9) Power factor at rated load: 91 percent

10) Efficiency at rated load: 70 percent

e. Voltage adjustment: 18 steps, total

f. Grounding clamp cable length: 10 feet

2. Wire feeder:

a. Speed adjustment: 50 to 700 IPM

b. Wire sizes:

1) Solid: 0.24 through 0.045 inches

2) Aluminum: 3/64 inches

3) Stainless: 0.030 through 0.045 inches

4) Flux-cored: 0.035 through 0.045 inches

3. Welding gun:

a. Cable length: 15 feet


b. Duty cycle:

1) 100 percent at 200 amps with CO2 gas

2) 100 percent at 100 amps with mixed gases


a. Width: 18.9 inches

b. Depth: 38.8 inches

c. Height: 31.8 inches

5. Weight (gross): 220 pounds


1. Cabinet: Power source and wire feeder shall be housed in a heavy gauge metal cabinet with two lifting eyes.

2. Portable mounting: Welder shall be mounted on a portable base dolly that has two eight-inch diameter fixed rear wheels and two four-inch swivel front wheels. Dolly shall have provisions for mounting and securing a standard gas bottle at rear of the power supply.

3. Power source: The single phase 50/60 hertz constant voltage DC power supply shall have the following standard features:

a. Voltage adjustment: There shall be a high/low voltage adjustment slide switch with nine voltage steps in each range.

b. Fan cooling: Unit shall have a heavy duty fan for cooling.

4. Wire feeder: The built-in wire feeder shall be mounted in a compartment with hinged door to protect components.

a. Wire feeder shall be a heavy duty, two-roll type with quick disconnect for welding gun.

b. Spools: Wire feeder shall use either 25, 30, or 45 pound spools and shall handle 10 pound spools with optional spacer.

c. Braking: The wire feed motor shall have dynamic braking which stops the feed motor when gun trigger is released, preventing wire overrun, reducing crater sticking and simplifying restriking.

d. Gas solenoid valve: Gas solenoid valve shall be a standard provision.

e. Feed roll pressure adjustment: Spring type feed roll pressure adjustment shall be provided.

f. Feed rolls: Feed rolls shall be insulated.

5. Welding gun: The welding gun shall be light weight and easy to maneuver with rugged lightweight flexible cable and slip-on nozzles with screw-in tips. Molded strain reliefs shall be provided at wire feeder and at the gun. Gun trigger control circuit shall be low voltage (24 volt) for safety assurance.

6. Power cord: Minimum 10 foot long power cord shall be provided with plug compatible with welding receptacles.


D. Controls: All controls, including ON/OFF switch, voltage selector controls, wire feed speed control, and spool gun control module shall be mounted on sloped front panel of welder cabinet for easy access and visibility. Welder shall include all necessary step down transformers, converters or other voltage reducing equipment required for operation of individual components from a single input power source. Switching and controls shall have automatic reset and protection against thermal overload, high current overload, short circuit, and extended overload at high operating currents. Switching, controls, and electrical components shall meet National Electrical Code requirements.

E. Accessories:

1. Switch and burnback timer kit: Lincoln No. K1701-1, one each

2. Spool gun: Aluminum wire, Lincoln No. K2490-1, one each

3. Spool gun holder: Lincoln No. K1738-1, one each

4. Wire:

a. 25 pound roll of .035 solid wire, one each.

b. 25 pound roll of 3/64 inches aluminum wire, one each.

c. 25 pound roll of .035 stainless wire, one each.

d. 25 pound roll of .035 flux-cored wire, one each.

F. Utility Requirements: 208 VAC, 1 phase, 50 A, NEMA 6-50 plug

G. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color.

2.22 WELDER, OXYACETYLENE, WITH CART Equipment Identifier: 2920



a. Lincoln Electric Company/Harris, Mason, OH (513) 754-2000

b. Model: 85201-300 with Accessories


a. Uniweld Products, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, FL (954) 584-2000

b. Victor Equipment, Denton, TX (800) 426-1888


1. Supply hose length shall be 20 feet.

2. Cart dimensions

a. Width: 28 inches

b. Depth: 13 inches




1. Materials: Welder shall have a rugged brass torch handle with positive balance and in-lined stainless steel tube design. Cutting attachment head is of solid forged brass.

2. Torch shall be equipped with internal reverse flow check valves.

3. Welder shall have 2 inch dual scale gauges.

4. Welder shall cut to 1 inch and weld to 1/2 inch with accessories.

5. The welder shall include the following standard equipment:

a. Green lens goggles Pyramex model no: WG100, one each

b. Brass welding handle, Harris No. 85, one each

c. Cutting attachment, Harris No. 72-3, one each

d. Mixer, Harris No. D-85, one each

e. Regulators with gauges:

1) Acetylene: Harris No. 201-15C-510, one each

2) Oxygen: Harris No. 201-100C-540, one each

f. Welding tip: Harris No. 23A90-5 Oxy-Acet, one each

g. Cutting tip: Harris No. 6290-1AC Oxy-Acet, one each

h. Heating tip: Harris Model No. J-63-1 one each

i. Hose: 20 feet long Harris No. 4300500, one each

j. Lighter, Harris No., 26S, one each

k. Single flint striker, Harris No.26L, one each

6. Dual cylinder cart

a. Cart shall hold one 330 cubic foot standard large oxygen cylinder and one medium sized 10-1/2 inch diameter acetylene cylinder

b. Has adjustable locking chain and accessory tray 22 by 5 by 3 inches

c. All welding construction

d. Rubber-tires 14 by 1-3/4 inches, two each

D. Accessories:

1. Soapstone holder: Harris No. 3011002, one each,

2. Soapstone: Harris No. 3011000, one box each

3. Lighter flints: Harris No. 3090011, one box of five single flints each

4. Tip cleaners: Harris No. 2010640, one each

5. Gas cylinder cart: Harper Truck, Inc., Wichita, KS (316) 942-1381; Model No.414-27, one each


2.23 WELDER, TIG Equipment Identifier: 2940



a. Miller Electric Manufacturing Co., Appleton, WI (800) 426-4553

b. Model: Syncrowave 200 Runner, No. 907 308-01-1


a. The Lincoln Electric Company, Cleveland, OH (216) 481-8100

b. Thermal Dynamics, West Lebanon, NH (603) 298-5711



a. Width: 16 inches



2. Maximum open-circuit voltage: AC - 80 V

3. Welding amperage range: 5 to 200 A, continuous rate of change

4. Rated output: 150 A at 26 VAC, 40 percent duty cycle; 90 A at 24 VAC, 100 percent duty cycle

5. Net weight: 271 pounds


1. Unit shall be designed for both AC and DC TIG and Stick welding.

2. Unit shall possess built in preflow and postflow timers.

3. Unit shall possess overload protection circuitry to protect the power source from excessive duty cycles and high ambient temperatures.

4. Unit’s TIG torch and stick electrode cables shall posses quick disconnects for ease of transition between functions.

5. Power cord: Minimum 25-foot-long power cable shall be provided with plug compatible with welding receptacles.

D. Controls:

1. On/off toggle switch

2. Knife switch for polarity selection (AC/DC)

3. TIG/stick toggle switch

4. Smooth turning continuous amperage control dial (10-180 A)


E. Accessories: Included in runner package - No. 39 running gear, Miller No. 300009 cylinder rack, two 8-inch wheels, two 4-inch wheels


G. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturers standard color

2.24 CABINET, ABRASIVE BLAST, WITH DUST COLLECTOR, 36 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 3085



a. Trinity Tool Company, Fraser, MI (586) 296-5900

b. Model: Master 36/BP with Accessories


a. Blast-It-All Division, Larry Hess and Associates, Inc., Salisbury, NC (704) 637-3300

b. Wheelabrator Corporation, La Grange, GA (706) 884-6884


1. Cabinet:

a. Dimensions:

1) Width: 38 inches

2) Depth: 25 inches


b. Interior dimensions:

1) Width: 36 inches

2) Depth: 24 inches


c. Side door: 17 inches by 11 inches

d. Flip up top: 36 inches by 13 inches

e. Viewing window: 12 inches by 24 inches


2. Dust collector:

a. Motor: 1 HP, 1,700 RPM

b. Vacuum rating: 100 CFM

c. Abrasive capacity: 2 gallon, minimum

d. Dimensions:

1) Diameter: 15 inches


3. Equipment dimensions including dust collector:

a. Width: 60 inches

b. Depth: 25 inches




1. Media type: Unit shall utilize glass bead and sand for dry blast media.

2. Cabinet: Blast cabinet shall be fabricated of 14 gauge welded steel.

3. Gloves: Heavyweight rubber gloves shall be attached to 8 inch armhole ports, two each.

4. Viewing window: Safety glass window shall be easily removable by loosening window frames.

5. Lighting: Interior cabinet lighting shall be provided with fluorescent tubes.

6. Air system: Unit shall be equipped with air pressure regulator and gauge.

7. Doors:

a. Flip up top: Unit shall provide one flip up top door.

b. Side: Unit shall provide one side door.

8. Dust collector:

a. Construction: Dust collector shall be fabricated of 14 gauge steel.

b. Motor: Unit shall be equipped with motor and impeller on clean air side.

c. Filter bags: Unit shall utilize filter bags with 8 square feet of total surface area.


9. Orifice: Standard equipment for suction feed type media gun shall include a 5/16 inch ID orifice.

10. Blow off: Unit shall be provided with a pushbutton controlled valve at the media gun.

11. Nozzle: Nozzle and air jet shall be tungsten carbide.

12. Nozzle mount bracket: Unit shall be provided with bracket for nozzle.

13. Foot valve: Blasting control shall be provided by spring actuated 3 way air foot valve.

14. Floor: Unit shall be equipped with 1/8 inch expanded steel recessed floor with a carbon screen cover.

15. Air connection: Air connection shall be 3/8 inch female connection to regulator.

D. Controls: ON/OFF toggle switch for lighting and dust collector. Electrical controls and switching shall meet all National Electrical Code requirements.

E. Accessories:

1. Filter bags: Dust collector replacement filter bags, Trinco No. 2-000-30, six each

2. Nozzle: 5/16 inch ID, Trinco No. 2-000-71, one each


1. Electrical:

a. Vacuum: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 8.5 A, 1 HP, 100 CFM

b. Cabinet: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.6 A

c. Provide power cords for cabinet and for vacuum. Each to include a three-prong standard grounded plug.

2. Compressed air: 3/8 inch, 85 PSI at 25 CFM


2.25 CABINET, ABRASIVE BLAST, WITH DUST COLLECTOR, 48 INCHES Equipment Identifier: 3086



a. Trinity Tool Company, Fraser, MI (586) 296-5900

b. Model: Master model 48 x 36 cabinet



a. Blast-It-All Division, Larry Hess and Associates, Inc., Salisbury, NC (704) 637-3300

b. Wheelabrator Corporation, La Grange, GA (706) 884-6884


1. Cabinet:


1) Width: 53 inches

2) Depth: 37 inches


b. Interior dimensions:

1) Width: 48 inches

2) Depth: 36 inches


c. Side doors:

1) Width: 28 inches


d. Viewing window: 12 by 24 inches

2. Dust collector:

a. Motor: 1 HP, 1,700 RPM

b. Vacuum rating: 100 CFM

c. Abrasive capacity: 2 gallon, minimum

d. Dimensions:

1) Diameter: 15 inches




1. Media type: Unit shall utilize glass bead and sand for dry blast media.

2. Cabinet: Blast cabinet shall be fabricated of 14 gauge welded steel.

3. Gloves: Heavyweight rubber gloves shall be attached to 8 inch armhole ports, two each.

4. Viewing window: Safety glass window shall be easily removable by loosening window frames.

5. Lighting: Interior cabinet lighting shall be provided with fluorescent tubes.


6. Air system: Unit shall be equipped with air pressure regulator and gauge.

7. Doors:

a. Side: Unit shall provide two full size side doors.

8. Dust collector:

a. Construction: Dust collector shall be fabricated of 14 gauge steel.

b. Motor: Unit shall be equipped with motor and impeller on clean air side.

c. Filter bags: Unit shall utilize filter bags with 8 square feet of total surface area.

9. Orifice: Standard equipment for suction feed type media gun shall include a 5/16 inch ID orifice.

10. Blow off: Unit shall be provided with a pushbutton controlled valve at the media gun.

11. Nozzle: Nozzle and air jet shall be tungsten carbide.

12. Nozzle mount bracket: Unit shall be provided with bracket for nozzle.

13. Foot valve: Blasting control shall be provided by spring actuated 3 way air foot valve.

14. Floor: Unit shall be equipped with 1/8 inch expanded steel recessed floor with a carbon screen cover.

15. Air connection: Air connection shall be 3/8 inch female connection to regulator.

D. Controls: ON/OFF toggle switch for lighting and dust collector. Electrical controls and switching shall meet all National Electrical Code requirements.

E. Accessories:

1. Filter bags: Dust collector replacement filter bags, Trinco No. 2-000-30, six each

2. Nozzle: 5/16 inch ID, Trinco No. 2-000-71, one each


1. Electrical:

a. Cabinet: 120 VAC, 9 A, 1HP, 100 CFM

b. Light: 120 VAC, 1.6 A

2. Compressed air: 1/2 inch, 80 PSI at 25 CFM


2.26 DEGREASER, VAPOR Equipment Identifier: 3121



a. Branson Ultrasonics, Danbury, CT (203) 796-0400


b. Model: B352R


a. Baron-Blakeslee, Northbrook, IL (847) 796-0822

b. Sonicor, Wallingford, CT (203) 265-6048


1. Overall dimensions: 32 inches wide by 30 inches deep by 42 inches high.

2. Boil sump: 8 inches wide by 10 inches long by 4 inches deep

3. Ultrasonic Sump: 8 inches wide by 10 inches long by 6 inches deep

4. Vapor Zone: 18.5 inches wide by 12.5 inches long by 6 inches deep

5. Freeboard Zone: 18.5 inches wide by 12.5 inches long by 10.5 inches deep

6. Boil Chamber Capacity: 1.8 gallon

7. Ultrasonic Sump Working Capacity: 2 gallon

8. Total solvent Capacity: 4.8 gallon

9. Water Separator Capacity: 1 gallon



1. Ultrasonic sump and boil chamber to be constructed of type 304 stainless steel.

2. Boil sump shall contain 1200 watt, low watt density external strip heat.

3. Unit shall be built with 100% freeboard area.

4. Unit shall have 24 volt control panel that controls all functions including temperatures.

5. Unit shall have constant digital temperature display of boil sump.

6. Ultrasonic sump to be powered by an integral generator module with a frequency of 40 kHz.

7. All plumbing to be stainless steel.

8. Unit is compatible with all non-flammable vapor degreasing safety solvents with boil points below 200 degrees Fahrenheit.

9. Unit shall meet NESHAP requirements.

10. Unit shall have average distillation rate of 4 GPH.

11. Unit to be furnished with recirculating pump and 5 micron nominal cartridge filter system for the ultrasonic sump.

D. Accessories: Solvent, 5 gallon, two each

E. Utility Requirements: 208 VAC, single phase, 50/60 Hz, 20A


2.27 EXTRACTOR, FUME, WELDING, PORTABLE, 1,000 CFM Equipment Identifier: 3275



a. Airflow Systems, Inc., Dallas, TX (214) 503-8008

b. Model: Dust Pak PCH-2


a. Plymovent, Edison, NJ (908) 417-0808


1. Motor: 1.5 HP

2. Pick velocity: 3,450 FPM

3. Air flow: 1,000 CFM

4. Coverage: Arc of 360 degrees and 10 foot radius


a. Width: 24 inches

b. Length: 49-1/4 inches


6. Weight, nominal: 320 pounds

7. Drawer capacity: 10 gallon

8. Tube diameter: 8 inches, nominal


1. Unit hose arm shall be equipped with friction release joint adjustment for positioning. The hose shall be an 8 inch diameter flexible hose attached to an aluminum alloy pick-up hood.

2. Unit shall be equipped with two 8-inch casters in front and two 4-inch casters in back, and a handle for portability.

3. Unit shall be equipped with side hinged access door for service and pull out drawer in base for dust removal.

4. Unit power supply shall be equipped with three-prong plug on power cord.

5. Cabinet of unit shall be low profile to provide a low center of gravity.

6. Filter unit shall be constructed of 16 gauge welded steel.

D. Controls: ON/OFF power switch

E. Accessories: Filter check, mag gauge PG-6




2.28 TANK, PARTS, CLEANING Equipment Identifier: 3540



a. Gray Mills, Chicago, IL (773) 248-6825

b. Model: PL36-A with Accessories


a. Kansas Instruments Corporation, Council Grove, Kansas (316) 767-6721

b. Kwik-Way Manufacturing Company, Marion, Iowa (319) 377-9421



a. Width: 36 inches

b. Depth: 22 inches

c. Height, cover upright: 60 inches

2. Fluid capacity: 15 gallon, maximum

3. Tank shelf area:


b. Depth: 22 inches


1. Motor shall be variable speed air operated pump motor with screened intake, 1/3 HP.

2. Flush hose shall be flexible metal with stream nozzle.

3. Workshelf shall be sloped and removable.

4. Filtration: Sludge collector and filter tray assembly easily removed for cleaning.

5. Safety: Spring loaded fusible link safety cover automatically closes at 165 degrees F.

6. Construction shall be of 16 gauge steel front, side, bottom, and rear panels.

7. Tank shall have a bottom drain for cleaning.

D. Accessories:

1. Drain shelf: External, Graymills No. L-61 (16 gauge), one each.


E. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz, 1/3 HP

F. Finish: Durable enamel in manufacturer’s standard color

2.29 WASHER, HIGH PRESSURE/HOT WATER, NG, 8 GPM Equipment Identifier: 3720



a. The Hotsy Corporation, Camas, WA (360) 833-1600

b. Model: 5735SS (stationary unit) with Accessories


a. Landa, Inc., Camas, WA (800) 547-8672

b. Alkota Cleaning Systems, Inc., Alcester, SD (605) 934-2222


1. Pump motor: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 25A, 20 HP

2. Operating pressure: 3,000 PSI

3. Maximum discharge capacity: 7.8 GPM



b. Width: 31 inches


5. Shipping weight: 1,260 pounds


1. Burner: NG fired, 720,450 BTU/hr, AGA-listed gas controls, ring type with aspirating spuds, natural draft.

2. All open flames and fire rings shall be mounted at minimum of 18 inches above the finished floor.

3. Heating coil: vertically-fired; 1 inch OD, hydrostatic-pressure tested; 14,900 PSI burst-rated.

4. Water pump: Triplex water pump with positive displacement, ceramic plungers, brass manifold, and oil bath crankcase.

5. Fabrication: Welded angle iron frame shall have heavy gauge tank and cabinet.

6. Piping: Supplier shall provide piping (schedule 80) from high-pressure wash unit to each trigger gun wand for a complete and operable system.


7. Manufacturer shall supply all necessary soap system equipment including piping, fittings, distribution hose, and connections for a complete and operable soap distribution system.

D. Controls: Adjustable temperature controller, safety pressure relief valve, pressure switch, ON/OFF electric motor switch with overload protection, unloader, water heater switch, detergent valve and automatic, non-contaminating float valve.

E. Accessories:

1. At all trigger gun locations as show on drawings EQ-103, EQ-120, EQ-122 and EQ-131.

a. Trigger gun: Hotsy No. 853010

b. 50 foot hose assembly: Hotsy No. 87391210

c. 36 inch wand: Hotsy No. 87112690

d. Nozzle: Hotsy No. 799021

e. Quick coupler: Hotsy No. 844850

f. Reel: 6 inch hose, Hotsy No. 860203, one each trigger gun location

g. Contractor supplied scabbard for trigger gun: Wall mounted, reference detail on sheet EQ-500

h. Remote starter: Remote control box with soap solenoid and remote, Hotsy No. 89169880

2. Draft diverter: Hotsy No. 87177300, Type “B”

3. Replacement nozzle: Pack of four, 4.5 millimeter with quick disconnect, Hotsy No. 87087180, one pack per trigger gun

4. Contractor supplied replacement nozzle holder: Wall mounted, fabricated

5. Breakthrough© detergent: 55 gallon container

6. Powershine Plus© detergent: 55 gallon container

7. Time delay shut down, 1 minute


1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 25A, 20 HP

2. Plumbing:

a. Water: 3/4 inch to supply, 40 to 60 PSI, 8 GPM minimum (regulate water supply if greater than 60 PSI).

b. Natural gas: 3/4 inch NPT to supply 657 CFH at equipment.

3. Stack size: 10 inches with draft diverter.


2.30 WASHER, PARTS, AUTOMATIC, 30 INCH TURNTABLE, 1,000 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 3781




a. Stingray Manufacturing, St. Louis, MO (314) 447-9000

b. Model: 3040


a. Cuda Cleaning Systems, Calumet, MI (906) 482-1600

b. Better Engineering, Baltimore, MD (410) 931-0000



a. Width: 66 inches

b. Depth: 67 inches


2. Interior working dimensions:

a. Turntable diameter: 30 inches

b. Working height: 40 inches

c. Working volume: 16.4 cubic feet

3. Load capacity: 1,000 pounds

4. Pump performance: Total output - 180 GPM at 75 PSI

5. Sump capacity: 130 gallon

6. Nozzles: 16 Stainless Steel


1. Cabinet construction: the cabinet shall be constructed of mild steel - structural and sheet metal. The thickness of the sheet metal shall be 3/16 inch.

2. Spray blast manifold:

a. Angle of oscillation: 39 degrees

b. Frequency of oscillation: 4 per minute

c. Number of wash nozzles: 16

d. Nozzle type: V-Jet

e. Nozzle material: Stainless steel

f. Nozzle spray pattern: 25 degrees

3. Heating system:

a. Operating temperature: 140-190 degrees Fahrenheit

b. Initial heat-up time: 60-90 minutes


c. Electric heat element size: 30 kW

4. Electrical:

a. Wiring standard: NFPA 79

b. Motor starters: Across the line

c. Motor rating: Continuous duty

d. Motor enclosures: TEFC

e. Electrical enclosures: NEMA 12

f. Wiring conduit: Flex non-metallic

g. Conduit type: Liquidtight NEMA 12

5. Pump system:

a. Motor size: 10 HP

b. Total system flow: 180 GPM

c. Flow per nozzle: 11.3 GPM

d. System pressure: 75 PSI

e. Blast velocity: 105 FPS

6. Fresh rinse cycle:

a. Automatically follows the wash stage.

b. Duration controlled by an adjustable timer inside the control box.

c. Parts sprayed with fresh water (4 GPM).

d. Delay stage in between wash and rinse cycles prevents cross contamination.

7. Automatic steam exhaust:

a. Cast aluminum direct driven fan evacuates steam from the cleaning chamber.

b. 425 CFM at 1/4 inch static pressure.

c. 3 mode selector switch on control panel.

1) On: Steam exhaust fan runs continually (when machine is powered up).

2) Auto: Steam exhaust fan runs during cleaning cycle until door is opened.

3) Off: Steam exhaust fan is off.

d. Condensate return line feeds condensed water back to the wash holding tank, preventing the accumulation of water in the fan housing.

8. Micron filters:

a. Filter housing with micron rated bag installed between pump and spray manifolds.

b. Prevents redeposition of fine particles.

c. Specify 20, 100, or 200 GPM rating and micron size of bag.


d. Pressure gauge indicates when filter has to be changed.

9. Low water shutdown and fill:

a. Protects the pump and heating system by shutting everything down when the water level reaches a critical low point.

b. An indicator light notifies the operator to correct the water level.

c. The float sensor is impervious to sticking or jamming. There are no pivot points or sleeves below the solution level.

d. Includes an automatic water fill system.

e. Whenever the float sensor is not in its’ high position, a solenoid valve opens to fill the tank.

f. Fill solenoid is deactivated during the cleaning cycle and for 30 seconds after the completion of the cleaning cycle to prevent a false “fill” signal.

g. Water is added in small increments (when the water level drops as little as 1/16 inch) preventing a big drop in tank temperature that would otherwise occur if a lot of cold water was added at once.

10. Small parts basket:

a. Rectangular basket 20 inches by 20 inches by 15 inches high.

b. 3/8 inch diameter steel rod frame with 0.080 gauge #2 screen steel mesh liner.

c. 400 pound capacity d. Lifting eyes with steel lifting bar

D. Controls:

1. NEMA 12 control panel and junction boxes

2. 110 volt controls

3. Motorized, 30 minute wash

4. Two channel 24-hour/seven-day timer to automatically control heating system and oil skimmer.

5. Panel mounted thermostat with digital read-out.

6. “Jog” button for turntable.

7. “Wash” and “heat” indicator lights.

8. Door/lid limit switch

9. All control circuits are individually fused.

E. Accessories:

1. Small parts basket

2. Low water shut off

3. Steam exhaust



1. Electrical: Parts washer - 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 10 HP, 111 A

2. Plumbing: Water - 1/2 inch NPT, 5 GPM at 30 PSI

3. Mechanical: Steam exhaust, 8 inch diameter (10 inch diameter flue to outside)

G. Finish: Chemical Resistant Two Part 3 mil Epoxy Coating in manufacturer’s standard color.

2.31 LIFT, PARTS, 3,000 POUNDS Equipment identifier: 5430



a. Pflow Industries, Inc., Milwaukee, WI, 53209, (414) 352-9000

b. Model Series M VRC


B. Capacity/Dimensions:

1. Capacity: The vertical reciprocating lift shall be rated at a live load capacity of 3,000 pounds.

2. Operating levels: Three

3. Operating configuration: “Z” pattern and “C” pattern, front load, rear unload

4. Speed: The vertical reciprocating lift shall have a lifting speed of 25 to 30 feet per minute when loaded to capacity.

5. Vertical travel: 16 feet 6 inches

6. Lift platform: The vertical reciprocating lift platform, also known as usable carriage, shall have steel deck plate and 48 inches high welded handrails and kick plates on non-operating ends and safety chains with snap hooks on operating ends.

7. Effective carriage length: 72 inches

8. Effective carriage width: 42 inches

9. Load height: 84 inches

10. Overall lift height (with 3 inch minimum clearance): 26 feet


1. Support columns: The vertical reciprocating lift shall have a minimum of two, 6-inch wide, roll formed support columns.

2. Deflection under load: When loaded to rated capacity, no portion of the vertical reciprocating lift shall exhibit permanent deformations.


3. Lifting means:

a. Raising and lowering of the carriage shall be provided by dual two-inch ram direct acting hydraulic cylinders. Sheaves, wire ropes, or chains are not to be incorporated in the lifting means.

b. An adjustable mechanical stop and pressure switch act to limit the upward travel of the lift platform to a height flush and level with the upper floor. The pressure switch shall be designed and set to allow full build up of hydraulic pressure to secure the lift platform in place and prevent bounce during loading or unloading.

4. Safety enclosure:

a. Guarding on three sides of the VRC shall be by safety enclosures a minimum of 8 feet high consisting of material which will reject a ball 1/2 inch in diameter/walls to be constructed by the general construction contractor.

5. Floor level gates: Gates are required on all operating sides of the vertical reciprocating lift at each level of operation.

a. The gates shall be single panel swing type.

b. Each gate must be equipped with an electro-mechanical interlock to prevent opening of the gate unless the carriage is present, and to prevent operation of the vertical reciprocating lift unless all gates are closed.

6. Signs: "NO RIDER" signs shall be provided. Lettering shall be a minimum of two inches high for visibility.

D. Controls

1. Controls:

a. Each operating floor level shall be equipped with a momentary contact push button control station with call, send, and mushroom style e-stop operators for manual control of lift operation.

b. An internally pre-wired main control panel shall be provided with step-down transformer and field wiring terminal block.

c. The motor/pump unit shall be pre-wired to the main control panel.

2. Power source: A disconnect shall be installed within 10 feet of the location designated for installation of the vertical reciprocating lift.


1. Electrical:

a. 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 7.5 HP

b. All motors shall be designed for continuous duty at ambient temperatures from 32 degrees to 102 degrees F.

F. Finish: Paint with standard Pflow Blue industrial enamel. Prior to painting, all dirt, mill scale, oil, and grease shall be removed from carbon steel surfaces by a combination of brushing, wiping, and use of solvents. Clean surfaces to SSPC-SPC.


2.32 LIFT, PARTS, 3,000 POUNDS, MATERIALS HANDLING Equipment identifier: 5431



a. Pflow Industries, Inc., Milwaukee, WI, 53209, (414) 352-9000

b. Model: Series 21 VRC


B. Capacity/Dimensions:

1. Capacity: The vertical reciprocating lift shall be rated at a live load capacity of 3,000 pounds.

2. Operating levels: Two

3. Operating configuration: “C” pattern, front load, front unload

4. Speed: The vertical reciprocating lift shall have a lifting speed of 24 feet per minute when loaded to capacity.

5. Vertical travel: 15 feet

6. Lift platform: The vertical reciprocating lift platform, also known as usable carriage, shall have steel deck plate and 48 inches high welded handrails and kick plates on non-operating ends and safety chains with snap hooks on operating ends.

7. Effective carriage length: 72 inches

8. Effective carriage width: 60 inches

9. Load height: 84 inches

10. Overall lift height (with 3 inch minimum clearance): 24 feet


1. Support columns: The vertical reciprocating lift shall have a minimum of two, 6-inch wide, roll formed support columns.

2. Deflection under load: When loaded to rated capacity, no portion of the vertical reciprocating lift shall exhibit permanent deformations.

3. Hydraulic power unit:

a. A pressure compensated flow control valve shall be included to provide for safe lowering of the load.

b. A velocity sensing check valve is required to prevent uncontrolled carriage descent in case of a failure in the hydraulic pressure line.

c. A pressure relief valve shall be provided to protect the hydraulic system from excessive pressure due to overloading or jam situations.


4. Lifting means:

a. Raising and lowering of the carriage shall be provided by two cylinders suitably mounted on the unit. Transmission of the lifting force is achieved via steel roller chain attached to the cylinders and the lift platform. The cylinders are linked together by a heavy torsion bar to insure that the lift platform remains level despite off-center loads.

b. An adjustable mechanical stop and pressure switch act to limit the upward travel of the lift platform to a height flush and level with the upper floor. The pressure switch shall be designed and set to allow full build up of hydraulic pressure to secure the lift platform in place and prevent bounce during loading or unloading.

c. Safety cams shall be mounted on the platform and connected to the lifting chains. The cams are designed to prevent the lift platform from falling more than six inches if tension is lost in the chains.

5. Safety enclosure:

a. Guarding on three sides of the VRC shall be by safety enclosures a minimum of 8 feet high consisting of material which will reject a ball 1/2 inch in diameter/walls to be constructed by the general construction contractor.

6. Floor level gates: Gates are required on all operating sides of the vertical reciprocating lift at each level of operation.

a. The gates shall be manually activated bi-swing type.

b. Each gate must be equipped with an electro-mechanical interlock to prevent opening of the gate unless the carriage is present, and to prevent operation of the vertical reciprocating lift unless all gates are closed.

7. Signs: Special "NO RIDER" signs shall be provided. Lettering shall be a minimum of two inches high for visibility.

D. Controls

1. Controls:

a. Each operating floor level shall be equipped with a momentary contact push button control station with call, send, and mushroom style e-stop operators for manual control of lift operation.

b. An internally pre-wired main control panel shall be provided with step-down transformer and field wiring terminal block.

c. The motor/pump unit shall be pre-wired to the main control panel.

2. Power source: A disconnect shall be installed within 10 feet of the location designated for installation of the vertical reciprocating lift.


1. Electrical:

a. 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 7.5 HP

b. All motors shall be designed for continuous duty at ambient temperatures from 32 degrees to 102 degrees F.


F. Finish: Paint with standard Pflow Blue industrial enamel. Prior to painting, all dirt, mill scale, oil, and grease shall be removed from carbon steel surfaces by a combination of brushing, wiping, and use of solvents. Clean surfaces to SSPC-SPC.

2.33 LIFT, TABLE, 2,000 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 5451



a. Southworth Products Corp., Falmouth, ME (877) 812-7441

b. Model: LSH2-114


a. Advance Lifts, Inc., St. Charles, IL (630) 584-9081

b. American Lifts, Greensburg, IN (812) 663-4085




b. Width: 42 inches

c. Height (not extended): 17 inches

d. Height (fully extended): 131 inches with stops to limit rise at 123 inches

e. Table Travel Distance: 114 inches with stops to limit rise at 106 inches (123 inches less collapsed lift height of 17 inches)

2. Recess dimensions:


b. Width: 44 inches

c. Depth: 17 inches


4. Lift distance: 114 inches

5. Lifting capacity: 2,000 pounds

6. Elevating time: 68 seconds

7. Lowering time: Adjustable with pressure compensated flow control


1. Lift shall be bolted directly to floor of recess with manufacturer provided hardware.


2. Lift shall be flush with ground when not extended; install lift in 17 inch deep recess.

3. All corners of recess shall have imbedded steel edge guard anchored into concrete and finished smooth so that there are no exposed edges to impede rolling carts and tool boxes. Corners shall be securely welded and the recess shall be confirmed to be square and of correct dimensions to accept approved lift.

4. Contractor shall provide a drain in the recess to an oil water separator to prevent standing water in recess.

5. Concrete behind curb angles shall be well compacted with no voids.

6. All pivot points shall be equipped with Teflon-lined bushings.

7. Lift shall include air motor hydraulic pump, valving, and reservoir filled with hydraulic fluid. Location of installed air motor shall not impede access to the lift and shall not be a floor obstruction. Final location must be approved prior to installation.

8. Lift shall include excessive flow protector (velocity fuses).

9. Provide necessary conduit (LEED compliant material similar to PVC) from lift recess to maintenance floor surface for compressed air lines. Lines to be routed to avoid any potential access conflicts.

10. Lift platform surface shall be heavy gauge steel with a smooth finish suitable for rolling carts and tool boxes.

11. Lift shall be equipped with all necessary safety equipment guards and signage. Toe guards to be beveled. Toe Guards and lifting eyes shall be manufactured to be integral with the lift.

12. Lift shall include standard bellows accordion skirt with alternating black and yellow folds. Skirt to be mounted on toe guard.

D. Controls:

1. Unit mounted controls. Locate pneumatic lift operation controls (i.e. hand valves) on safety railing at access gate on main shop floor; run compliant conduit from lift motor to controls.

2. Provide pneumatic gate interlock switches.

E. Accessories: Provide necessary expanded metal mesh enclosure and access panels around lift in lower level to secure the lift operation. Reference Equipment Layout Drawings (EQ Series) for a graphic representation of this enclosure. Exact dimensions and requirements are to be field verified. Contractor is responsible for providing this enclosure and coordinating all aspects with selected lift manufacturer/installer. Enclosure to be securely fastened to the Lower Level Work Area Floor and Ceiling. Enclosure to be finished with durable enamel paint compatible with the low VOC requirements for a LEED project.



1. Plumbing

a. Compressed air - 80 PSI, 80 CFM

b. Floor drain to oil/water separator in lift recess.


2.34 LIFT, TABLE, 15,000 POUNDS, 8 FEET BY 12 FEET PLATFORM, PIT MOUNTED Equipment Identifier: 5454



a. Advance Lifts, Inc., St. Charles, IL (630) 584-9881

b. Model: 4280


a. Southworth Products Corp., Portland, ME (207) 878-0700

b. American Lifts, Greensburg, IN (812) 663-4085


1. Platform:


b. Width: 96 inches

c. Bridge length: 12 inches

d. Bridge width: 72 inches

e. Pit length: 150-1/2 inches

f. Pit width: 98 inches

g. Bridge recess length: 74 inches

h. Bridge recess width: 8-1/4 inches

i. Bridge recess depth: 3/4 inch

2. Capacity:

a. Maximum lifting: 15,000 pounds

b. Axle capacity ends: 12,000 pounds

c. Axle capacity sides: 10,500 pounds

3. Speed: 8 FMP

4. Lift distance: 58 inches

5. Lowered height: 16-1/2 inches


6. Motor: 7.5 HP

7. Shipping weight: 7,200 pounds


1. Lift shall be pit mounted

2. All axles and shafts shall be chrome plated.

3. All rollers and pivot points shall be equipped with Teflon self-lubricating bearings.

4. Lift shall include hinged steel bridge.

5. Lift shall include steel removable handrails with safety chains.

D. Controls: Wall mounted controls shall be up-down weatherproof push button station, pendant type, NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X.

E. Accessories:

1. Wall mounted up-down selector switch/key operated.

2. Electric toe guards.

3. Power unit cover.

F. Utility Requirements: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 7.5 HP


2.35 LIFT, TABLE, SCISSOR, MOBILE, 6,000 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 5561



a. Air Technical Industries, Mentor, OH (440) 951-5191

b. Model: DSL-64878B


a. Material Flow, Donald, OR (503) 684-1613

b. Global Industrial, Port Washington, NY (888) 978-7759


1. Lifting capacity:

a. Platform: 6,000 pounds

2. Platform height:

a. Elevated: 108 inches

b. Lowered: 12 inches



a. Platform length: 78 inches

b. Platform width: 48 inches



b. Width: 48 inches

c. Overall height: 37 inches

5. Net weight: 4,500 pounds

6. Lift motor size: 2 HP

7. Drive motor size: 1 HP belt driven


1. Unit shall be battery powered by four 6 V, 225 A hour deep cycle batteries.

2. Double acting cylinders with operating pressure of 1.7 GPM at 1500 PSI

3. Standard features include:

a. Battery condition indicator L.E.D.

b. 120 V built in battery charger with 6 foot cord

c. Table wheels shall be 8 inch by 2 inch polyurethane

d. Drive wheel shall be 10 inch by 4 inch polyurethane

e. Frame shall be constructed of 3/8 inch A36 mild steel angle iron.

f. Table shall be constructed of 3/8 inch A36 mild steel with a milled finish

g. Cylinder rods shall be made from chrome plated stress-proofed steel

h. Lift table performance and construction shall conform to OSHA, ANSI and UL standards

D. Controls:

1. Drive controls shall be mounted on the steering column

2. Lift controls shall be on a separate pendant

3. Parking brake shall be mechanically controlled and mounted on steering column


1. Electrical: 120 VAC for charging


2.36 LIFT, TABLE, SCISSOR, MOBILE, 2,000 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 5562




a. Air Technical Industries, Mentor, OH (440) 951-5191

b. Model: DSL-23248B


a. Material Flow, Donald, OR (503) 684-1613

b. Global Industrial, Port Washington, NY (888) 978-7759


1. Lifting capacity:

a. Platform: 2,000 pounds

2. Platform height:

a. Elevated: 60 inches

b. Lowered: 12 inches


a. Platform length: 48 inches

b. Platform width: 32 inches



b. Width: 32 inches

c. Overall height: 37 inches

5. Net weight: 2,650 pounds

6. Lift motor size: 2 HP

7. Drive motor size: 1 HP belt driven


1. Unit shall be battery powered by four 6 V, 225 A hour deep cycle batteries.

2. Double acting cylinders with operating pressure of 1.7 GPM at 1500 PSI

3. Standard features include:

a. Battery condition indicator L.E.D.

b. 120 V built in battery charger with 6 foot cord

c. Table wheels shall be 6 inch by 2 inch polyurethane

d. Drive wheel shall be 10 inch by 4 inch polyurethane

e. Frame shall be constructed of 3/8 inch A36 mild steel angle iron.

f. Table shall be constructed of 3/8 inch A36 mild steel with a milled finish

g. Cylinder rods shall be made from chrome plated stress-proof steel

h. Lift table performance and construction shall conform to OSHA, ANSI and UL standards


D. Controls:

1. Drive controls shall be mounted on the steering column

2. Lift controls shall be on a separate pendant

3. Parking brake shall be mechanically controlled and mounted on steering column


1. Electrical: 120 VAC for charging


2.37 STAND, TEST, TRUCK AND ASSEMBLY Equipment Identifier: 5901



a. Railquip, Inc., Atlanta, GA (770) 458-4157

b. Model: Assembly and Test Stand



1. Space requirements:

a. Width: 9 feet

b. Length: 9 feet 8 inches

2. Pressure Test Beam:

a. 30,000 pound capacity

3. Jib Crane:

a. 1,000 pound capacity


1. Main support frame shall be constructed of heavy duty wide flange steel.

2. Unit shall have four truck wheel supports each equipped with two rollers each, including two adjustable truck wheel supports to compensate for worn wheels.

3. Unit shall have two gear box support stands equipped with two hydraulic cylinders of two metric tons of lifting capacity for height adjustment.

4. Unit will include one removable pressure test beam for truck testing at 30,000 pounds equipped with two removable supports. The crossbeam is equipped with two swivel head adjustable pressure heads and two hydraulic cylinders at 7.7 tons capacity.

5. Jib crane mounted to main frame equipped with ½ ton capacity electric lift hoist.



1. Electrical: 120 VAC, 15A

2. Air: 3/8 air outlet with 85 psi


2.38 TURNTABLE, TRUCK ASSEMBLY Equipment Identifier: 5950



a. Whiting Corp., Harvey, IL (708) 331-4000

b. Model: Turntable

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications and documentation requirements set forth in Section 01300 Submittals, equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as equal.

a. Pfaff-Silberblau Canada, Inc., Toronto, Ontario, Canada (416) 218-1115

b. Macton/Joyce, Oxford, CT (203) 267-1500


1. Crossing capacity: 50,000 pounds on service tracks and 18,000 pounds in truck repair area

2. Rotating capacity: 18,000 pounds

3. Rotation: 360 degrees

4. Track gauge: 66 inches

5. Turntable diameter: 10 feet


1. The turntables shall be constructed so that their entire structural assembly may be removed from the pit as a unit.

2. Turntable shall be designed for supporting a crossing load of 50,000 pounds and a rotating load of 18,000 pounds.

3. The table shall provide continuous ground capability of shop rails and turntable rails while also providing 360 degree rotation.

4. Negative return bonding to adjacent embedded rail shall be provided by a 750 volt dc, 500 ampere circuit, using a 360 degree collector ring mounted on the turntable with collector shoes mounted to the base frame.

5. Grounding wiring and insulation from the approach rails to the collector shoes and from rail to rail shall be provided.


6. Turntables shall be capable of being manually rotated to any one of four lockup positions by one man when supporting a two axle transit truck load of 18,000 pounds.

7. The operator shall be able to rotate and lock/unlock the table from a telescoping leverage bar.

8. The deck shall be designated to support a point load of 6,000 pounds anywhere, or a 300 psf uniform load. Vendor shall provide access to bearings and pit drains.

9. The turntable shall be designed with supports so that a deflection of 1/4 inch is not exceeded at the perimeter when the load is rolled on the table. Maximum deflection of any structural element shall not exceed 1/500 of its unsupported span.

10. The basic structural design of the turntables shall include the following:

a. Center post shall provide a center post, containing a heavy-duty bearing assembly designed to carry the entire thrust and moment loading.

b. Structural frame shall be designed so that it provides a support for the transit vehicle running rails and top deck plate.

c. Top deck shall consist of a system of structural steel members spaced to provide adequate support for the diamond plate pattern steel deck plate.

d. Steel curb angle trim system: A rolled steel angle or steel tube shall be provided for embedment in the pit wall. Install in related concrete work as indicated. The gap between the fixed steel angle and the turntable shall not be more than 3/8 inch.

e. Rails: The shop rails shall be made with the turntable rails and shall be AREA Type 115RE or bar stock. The rail gauge shall be 56-1/2 inches. The table top shall be furnished with two sets of rails. The rails shall be centered on the table and intersect one another at 90 degrees.

D. Finish: All equipment shall be rust free and all exposed surfaces shall be painted, with the exception of machined surfaces, with one coat of primer and two coats of paint in manufacturers standard colors

2.39 CART, UTILITY, ELECTRIC, WITH CHARGER Equipment Identifier: 9300



a. EZ-GO, Augusta, GA (706) 798-4311

b. Model: ST400


a. Columbia, Reedsburg, WI (608) 524-8888


b. Yamaha, Newnan, GA (770) 254-4000


1. Motor: 48 volt DC

2. Load capacity: 1,000 pounds

3. Bed size:


b. Width: 44 inches

c. Depth: 10.5 inches


a. Length: 110.5 inches

b. Width: 49.8 inches


5. Speed: 12 to 16 mph

6. Weight: 810 pounds without batteries

7. Wheel Base: 77 inches

8. Turning radius: 22 feet


1. The unit shall include a self-compensating rack and pinion steering.

2. Operator console shall have a battery level indicator.

3. The unit shall have headlights, brake lights, and tail lights.

4. The unit shall have seating for operator and one passenger.

5. Frame and chassis shall be heavy duty to protect equipment from collision and wear during operation.

6. Motor shall be heavy duty 48 volt DC high efficiency series wound, brazed armature, solid copper windings, non-vented, 2.5 HP at 2,700 RPM (1 hour).

7. Drive train shall be a direct motor shaft connected to transaxle pinion shaft.

8. Transaxle shall be high efficiency differential with helical gears, 14.7 percent ratio.

9. Brakes:

a. Dual rear wheel mechanical drum brakes, self adjusting with non-asbestos linings.

b. Automatic parking brake release with self-compensating system.

10. Electrical system shall be 48 volt DC, 6 volt heavy duty, deep cycle storage batteries.

11. Charger shall be U.L. listed, fully automatic line compensating and rear wall mounted.


12. Front and rear suspension shall be heavy duty multiple leaf springs with hydraulic shock absorbers

13. Seating shall be vacuum formed fabric-backed vinyl covers over thick cushion foam.

14. Tires shall be 5.70 by 8, 4-ply.

D. Utility Requirements: 120 VAC, 10.25 A; battery powered, provide receptacle adjacent to equipment storage position.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION


B. Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather.

C. Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all equipment items.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman of Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Authority or designated representative.




3. Anchorage: Attach equipment as directed by Authority or designated representative. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.


3.03 TESTING

A. After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specifications in the presence of the Authority or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANUP





D. Notify Authority or designated representative for acceptance inspection.

3.05 TRAINING


1. 2085 Buffer/grinder, 8 inches, with pedestal; 0.5 hour (minimum)

2. 2090 Buffer/grinder, 10 inches, with dust collector; 0.5 hour (minimum)

3. 2205 Drill press, variable speed, 15 inches; 0.5 hour (minimum)

4. 2220 Drill press, variable speed, 20 inches; 0.5 hour (minimum)

5. 2221 Mounter, steel rail tire, press on; 1 hour (minimum)

6. 2222 Mounter, steel rail tire, bolt on; 1 hour (minimum)

7. 2340 Scrubber, floor, 28 inch path; 0.5 hour (minimum)

8. 2372 Lathe, engine, 15 inches by 50 inches; 1 hour (minimum)

9. 2373 Mill, vertical, 10 inches by 54 inches; 1 hour (minimum)

10. 2380 Machine, lathe, wheel, underfloor; 4 hours (minimum)

11. 2385 Shunter, vehicle, rail, battery operated, 160 tons; 1 hour (minimum)

12. 2410 Lift, pallet, 5,500 pounds; 0.5 hour (minimum)

13. 2415 Pusher, electric; 0.5 hour (minimum)

14. 2600 Press, electric/hydraulic, 100 ton; 0.5 hour (minimum)

15. 2643 Recovery unit, refrigerant, rolling, multiple type; 1 hour (minimum)

16. 2690 Saw, band, horizontal; 1 hour (minimum)

17. 2915 Welder, MIG, portable, with wire feed; 1 hour (minimum)

18. 2920 Welder, oxyacetylene, with cart; 1 hour (minimum)

19. 2940 Welder, TIG; 1 hour (minimum)

20. 3085 Cabinet, abrasive blast, with dust collector, 36 inches; 0.5 hour (minimum)

21. 3086 Cabinet, abrasive blast, with dust collector, 48 inches; 0.5 hour (minimum)

22. 3121 Degreaser, vapor; 0.5 hour (minimum)

23. 3275 Extractor, fume, welding, portable, 1,000 CFM; 0.5 hour (minimum)

24. 3540 Tank, parts, cleaning; 0.5 hour (minimum)


25. 3720 Washer, high pressure/hot water, NG, 8 GPM; 1 hour (minimum)

26. 3781 Washer, Parts, Automatic, 30 Inch Turntable, 1,000 Pounds; 2 hour (minimum)

27. 5430 Lift, parts, 3,000 pounds; 1 hour (minimum)

28. 5431 Lift, parts, 3,000 pounds, materials handling; 1 hour (minimum)

29. 5451 Lift, table, 2,000 pounds; 1 hour (minimum)

30. 5454 Lift table, 15,000 pounds, 8 feet by 10 feet platform, pit mounted; 1 hour (minimum)

31. 5561 Lift, table, scissor, mobile, 6,000 pounds; 1 hour (minimum)

32. 5562 Lift, table, scissor, mobile, 2,000 pounds; 1 hour (minimum)

33. 5901 Stand, test, truck and assembly; 1 hour (minimum)

34. 5950 Turntable, truck assembly; 1 hour (minimum)

35. 9300 Cart, utility, electric, with charger; 1 hour (minimum)




SECTION 11 12 00

PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT



1. Clearance bars.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards to protect parking control equipment.

2. Division 28 security sections for integrating parking control equipment with building intrusion detection system and site security system.

3. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for asphalt driveway and approach paving. 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete driveway and approach

paving. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for parking control equipment. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For parking control equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with

data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT Santa Monica, CA 11 12 00 - 1

B. Source Limitations: Obtain parking control equipment from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Extruded Shapes:

B. Anchorages: Anchor bolts, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M and

ASTM F 2329. 2.02 CLEARANCE BARS

A. Provide extruded aluminum I-bar shaped clearance bars at location shown on Drawings.

1. Size: 4 inches w x 7 inches h x length shown on Drawings. 2. Color: Manufacturer's standard Safety Yellow. 3. Lettering: Reflective tape or stenciled lettering, with the word "CLEARANCE"

followed by the clear height in feet and inches, along with red warning stripes on each end.


A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Authority from manufacturer's full range.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate placement, pattern, and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install parking head clearance signage as indicated on Drawings.


3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust parking head clearance signage as necessary.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished parking head clearance signage, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.



SECTION 11 24 19 VACUUM EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL.

1.01 WORK INCLUDED


1. 3619 Vacuum, stationary, 10 HP (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. 3642 Vacuum system, six station, 3-1/2 inch hose (Ref. Part 2.02)


C. Piping, ductwork, wiring, and switching between equipment and utilities.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 15000 - Mechanical

B. Division 16000 - Electrical


A. Experience: Equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer of established reputation with a minimum of five years experience supplying specified equipment.


1. Installation: Provide a qualified manufacturer’s representative at site to perform work related to equipment installation, check out and start up.

2. Training: Provide technical representative to train Metro’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Restrict submitted material to pertinent data. For instance, do not include manufacturer’s complete catalog when pertinent information is contained on a single page.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual:

1. Provide: Complete parts, operating, and maintenance manual covering equipment at time of installation including, but not limited to:

a. Description of system and components.

b. Layout drawings of piping and equipment locations specific to this project.

c. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing and compressed air systems.

d. Manufacturer’s printed operating instructions.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility VACUUM EQUIPMENT SANTA MONICA, CA 11 24 19 - 1

e. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventative maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

f. List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stockage quantity and local parts and service source.

2. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Foldout diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.





1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warrant work specified herein for one year from acceptance by Authority against defects in materials, function and workmanship.




E. All parts must be readily available locally in the United States.


A. Deliver equipment in manufacturer’s containers, appropriately packaged and/or crated for protection during domestic shipment and in humid, dusty conditions.

B. Indelibly label all containers, including those contained in others, on outside with item description(s) per title of this specification.

C. Provide equipment with materials specified complete in one shipment for each equipment item. Split or partial shipments are not permissible.

1.08 LABELING


A. Manufacturer will securely attach in a prominent location on each major item of equipment a noncorrosive nameplate showing manufacturer’s name, address, model number, serial number, and pertinent utility or operating data.

B. All electrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) in categories for which standards have been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacturer’s plant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 VACUUM, STATIONARY, 10 HP Equipment Identifier: 3619



a. Clean Air Technologies, Chargrin Falls, OH (440) 725-2239

b. Model: SYS-SLHR-182410-4


a. Dustcontrol, Wilmington, NC (910) 395-1808

b. Robertson Air Systems, Dana Point, CA (714) 420-1450


1. The System shall be a central vacuum system designed to handle 2 operators simultaneously cleaning under the rail car.

2. The system shall be capable of handling wet or dry refuse. The system is for cleaning of rappers, leaves, feathers and brake dust for under the rail car.

3. The system shall be complete with one (1) vacuum pump, pre-separator with refuse container, Pulse-Jet filter separator, two (2) manual operated vacuum hose reels, automatic vacuum shut off air valving, piping and programmable logic controller type electrical system with pump start motor starter.

4. The two detail hose reel stations, each with 60 feet x 1-1/2 inch vacuum hoses with cleaning tools.

5. A remote control stop/start station mounted on the wall one provided for each at each location.

6. The contractor shall provide all material, equipment, labor, services and incidentals for a complete operable system. The customer shall approve final layout of all equipment and related structures.


1. Vacuum pump:


a. Motor: 1 x 10 HP, 9.2kW 3600 RPM 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, wash down proof

b. Maximum airflow: 380 SCFM

c. Maximum static pressure 110” inches of water gauge

d. Maximum sound level: 84 dbA at 10 feet

2. Filter unit:

a. Primary cyclone separator: Up to 96% of total dust, nominal

b. Main filter: 99.9% of total dust per DIN 24184/3

c. Filter area: 100 square feet

d. 30 gallon container with bag equalizer

e. 50 plastic sack

3. Cyclone pre-separator:

a. Height: 107 inches

b. Width: 18 inches

c. Length: 22 inches

d. 30 gallon container with bag equalizer

e. 50 plastic sack

4. Hose reels spring return: 1-1/2” diameter hose

a. One and a half inch diameter: 60 feet minimum length

b. 60 feet long suction hose antistatic

D. Features/Construction:

1. Vacuum producer:

a. Direct coupled, low speed turbo - vacuum pumps of branch canal design for producing of high vacuum pressure, rated at 10,000 hours continuous duty without lubrication.

b. A vacuum relief valve shall be included provide cooling air in the event all inlets are restricted or closed. A thermal; safety protector shall be incorporated at a maximum setting of 120 degrees lubrication.

c. The vacuum pumps inlet/outlet diameter shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inches.

d. The pumps shall operate at 575 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

e. Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled with 10,000 hour continuous duty rating.

f. The vacuum pump shall operate at a sound level not to exceed 84 decibels at a distance of 10 feet.

2. Filter separator:

a. The filter unit shall be a Clear Air Technologies Model 40-204 or approved equal.


b. Filter unit: Body of unit shall function as a primary filtration cyclone separator and enclosed main filter. Filter shall be of pleated polyester material suitable for fibrous dust. Service life shall be at least one year. Unit shall be equipped with self-contained reverse pulse filter cleaning.

c. The sack will be located in our steel drum which is fitted with a bag pressure equalizing system.

3. Pre-separator:

a. A high efficiency cyclone pre-separator designed to remove the bulk of dust chips installed ahead of the filter unit. The pre-separator shall be designed with a cylindrical steel body and function to remove heavy dust before reaching the dust extractor filter unit, thus greatly extending filter life. Particulate shall be discharged into a plastic sack for dust free disposal after unit has shut down. The sack will be located in our steel drum which is fitted with a bag pressure equalizing system.

4. Piping and fittings:

a. Manufacture shall provide seamless galvanized steel piping and fittings for both the main and trunk lines. Also provide all joint compression fittings, valves and adapters for a complete and operable system.

b. Pipe diameter at the hose reels outlet shall be a minimum of 2 inches.

c. Minimum duct diameter at the main headers back to the pre-separator shall be 2-1/2 inches per run. All ducting size shall be detailed in the installation drawings. A minimum of 5500 FPM shall be maintained in the main lines to prevent settling of refuge.

d. Seals shall be a three bolt rubber compression coupling type. All joints, valves, couplings, adapters and fittings shall be leak free and grounded.

e. Insulated 3/8 poly tubing, bends and fitting for conveying the cleaning fluid from the heater to the dispensing tool and return line.

5. Workstations:

a. Each dry detail workstation shall be equipped with one spring return vacuum reel with 60 feet minimum 1-1/2 inch antistatic hose with a pneumatic shutter valve to shut the vacuum off when the hose re-tracked back to the home position. (Refer to EQ-120 for exact location).

1) The hoses shall be mounted on a hose reel, Model SRVHR-P20 or approved equal.

2) The reel drum shall be steel fixed to two 16 gauge formed ends, with hose guides.

3) A quick disconnect clean-out shall be provided on the hose reel outlet with a minimum opening of 2 inches.

4) The hose reel shall be mounted on a steel frame engineered to hold the maximum weight of the reel. Reel to be located per drawing under the cleaning platform. Final position to be approved by Authority.

5) The cleaning lances shall be of aluminum or PVC with a minimum inside diameter of 1-1/2 inches for each workstation.


6) The adjustable cleaning lance shall be equipped with a removable quick disconnect tool 39 inches long.

7) Hand tools include a 4-1/2 inch claw tool, 5 inch round brushes, 11 inch crevice tool and a 5 inch square brush tool.

E. Controls:

1. Main electrical control panel

a. Panel shall be a pre-wired, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz NEMA 4R SS rated main electrical control panel containing a soft start motor starter on for the vacuum pump starter, reversing motor starters for hose reels, step down transformer for control 24 volt circuits, digital touch screen display for alarms, timing functions and a PLC ( programmable logic controller).

b. All timing, alarms and logic functions shall be preformed by the PLC; electromechanical relays are not acceptable to control logic. They however can be used to protect against spikes.

c. PLC shall be a heavy duty industrial type and to have a minimum 1K instruction memory, EPROM memory back up.

d. Panel the have a lockable main disconnects. All electrical components in the control panel are to be UL listed. The panel must be UL, ULC, ETL or CSA approved.

2. All motors shall be protected by a circuit breaker or primary fuses and the magnetic motor starter shall be equipped with overload protection on all three phases. Motor starter shall be a heavy duty industrial type NEMA rated and UL listed. Motors shall be wash down proof.

3. Provide a single CAD general system wiring diagram showing all internal panel wiring, external wiring between components, wire size and colors, fuse and breaker rating and terminal designation. Provide a detail installation wiring diagram for the field electrician show all devises to be wired with termination designation.


1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 10 HP single point connection to the main electrical control panel

2. Plumbing: 120 PSI at 5 CFM

2.02 VACUUM SYSTEM, SIX STATION, 3-1/2 INCH HOSE Equipment Identifier: 3642



a. Clean Air Technologies, Chargrin Falls, OH (440) 725-2239

b. Model: SYS-THRD-3048-250-635



a. Dustcontrol, Wilmington, NC (910) 395-1808

b. Robertson Air Systems, Dana Point, CA (714) 420-1450


1. Operation: the system shall be a central vacuum system designed for coarse and fine cleaning of all types of transit train vehicles.

2. The systems shall be capable of handling wet or dry refuse. The systems shall be able to collect course refuse like mud, leaves, sand, papers, wrappers and transfers from grooved floors and train engineers area while preventing fine dust from contaminating electrical or mechanical components.

3. The systems shall be complete with two vacuum pumps, coarse and fine filters, refuse containers (dumpster type), remote controlled hose reels, automatic air valving, piping and programmable logic controller type electrical system.

4. The systems shall have a 3-1/2 inch cleaning lances complete with attachments at the doors of the passenger cars at each of the six workstations.

5. The system shall be sized to handle the simultaneous cleaning operations of six (6) 3-1/2 inch cleaning lances and pneumatically transporting coarse and fine refuse to a central container.

6. Cleaning systems shall be capable of performing the cleaning operation within the normal five (5) to eight (8) minute cleaning cycle time.

7. The Contractor or manufacturer shall provide all material, equipment, labor, services and incidentals for a complete installation.


1. Vacuum pumps:

a. Motor: two (2), 460 VAC, 3 phase, 50 HP

b. Airflow: 1545 CFM at 7.5 inches mercury each pump (operating; not maximum)

c. Inlet diameter: 8 inches, minimum

d. Maximum sound level: 82 dbA at 10 feet

2. Pre-separator:

a. Inlet size – 4 inch minimum

3. Dumpster capacity:

a. 2 cubic yards, self tipping

4. Filter separator:

a. Efficiency: 99.93 percent at 1 micron

b. Area: 420 square feet, minimum

5. Hose reel:


a. Motor: 480 VAC, 3 phase, 3/4 HP

b. 3-1/2 inch hose, length: 60 feet, minimum

D. Features/Construction:

1. Vacuum pump:

a. The Centrifugal multi-stage vacuum pumps shall be two (2) 50 HP, each producing 1545 CFM at 7-1/2 inches of mercury, rated for 1,500 hours continuous duty between lubrication.

b. The pump shall be equipped with an electronic surge control which automatically bleeds air into the system by way of a motorized butterfly damper controlled by a PLC programmable control panel.

c. The vacuum pumps shall have a relief valve on the outlet to eliminate risk of back flow through the pump.

d. A motor thermal safety protector shall be incorporated at a maximum setting of 120ºC.

e. The pumps shall operate at 460V, 3-phase, 60 Hz power.

2. Pre-separator:

a. An in line cyclone pre-separator shall have a clean-out door on the unit for easy inspection and maintenance.

b. The inlet size shall be a minimum of 4 inch diameter.

c. Provide two (2) dumpsters with a minimum capacity of 2 cubic yards self tipping shall be furnished.

d. Permanently connected Pre-Separator to the dumpster lid and provide mechanism with adjustment manifold for centering the dumpster lid to the dumpster body. Dumpster lid shall be attached to the pre-separator with an air operated lift mechanism using four air cylinders controlled by a manually operated valve control to allow the dumpster to be easily and quickly removed. Provide dumpster seal constructed of 100% memory retention material. A viewing window, to determine the level of debris accumulation, shall be provided with a minimum 100sq inches viewing area, no less than 1/4 inch thickness.

e. The dumpster shall be equipped with high-grade steel caster wheels, two fixed and two swivels with locking brakes for easy rolling.

f. A bin in position track locator shall be providing for aligning the bin in position.

g. Dumpster shall withstand a minimum vacuum of 8-1/2 inches of mercury.

3. Filter unit:

a. The filter unit shall be side load filter unit a top mounted explosion relief vent and quencher to meet local and NFPA 68 latest code.

b. Provide a two stages separation system with primary separation through the cyclone and secondary filtration through pleated polyester cartridge filter.


c. The service life of the pleated polyester cartridge filter shall be a minimum of 12 months.

d. The unit shall have a minimum of 680 square foot area. The efficiency of the filter shall be 99.93% efficient to 3 micron DIN24184/3 with aerosol #3 the filter shall be capable of self-cleaning by compressed air, reverse pulse, automatically and manually.

e. The separator to be with a bag equalizer option and 50 plastic 30 gallon waste sacks.

4. Piping and fittings:

a. Piping shall be galvanized carbon steel piping, joints, fittings, valves, coupling seals and adapter for the complete operable installation.

b. Pipe diameter at the gross refuse pickup point shall be a minimum of 4 inches wide.

c. Minimum ducting diameter shall be 4 inch; all ducting size shall be detailed and indicate cleanout locations on the installation drawings. A minimum of 5500 FPM shall be maintained in the main duct lines to prevent any refuge settlement.

d. Seals shall be rubber butt type.

e. All joints, valves, couplings, adapters and fittings shall be leak-free.

5. Workstations:

a. The two (2) train platform cleaning lanes shall be equipped with six hose reel workstations, located at the doors of a typical train passenger car. Final location to be approved by the representatives of the transit authority.

b. Hose reels:

1) The six (6) hose reel workstations located at specific points for convenient access to LRV. Each Reel shall have one sixty (60) foot minimum 3-1/2 inch diameter type heavy-duty vacuum hose. The workstation on the hose reel shall be remote controlled “IN” and “OUT” by a control unit mounted on the cleaning lance with a protective cover to prevent damage. The hose shall be mounted on a motorized hose reel VHR-P35 or approved equal by A/E, powered with a minimum 3/4 HP, 460 volt enclosed gear motor. The reel drum shall be of stainless steel welded to two (2) 16 gauge steel ends, with hose guides. The reel will be equipped with a variable speed in and out setting not to exceed 0-30 RPM for both settings. A quick disconnect clean out shall be provided on the hose reel with a minimum opening of four (4) inches. The hose reel shall be mounted on a tubular steel frame, located 8 feet above floor level, and positioned per drawings layout. Our cleaning wand shall be aluminum with a minimum of 3-1/2 inches diameter, minimum wall thickness of .065 inches and equipped with a replaceable tip. The wand shall be 48 inch long with a 30-degree bend at the hose end and with a 360 degree swivel joint for ease of turning the wand while cleaning under the seats. The wand shall have handles that provide for ease of use by a left or right handled operator. With the


forward handle containing the two button control consul for easy of operating the reel.

2) The hose reel control stations shall be furnished with spring return START and STOP push-button and a green indicating run light for the Vacuum motor, hose reel UP-DOWN, push button selector switches and a red raised mushroom head EMERGENCY STOP push-button. Push buttons, selector switches and indicator lights shall be heavy-duty industrial type or approved equal. The hose reel control station shall be rated NEMA 4/12.

3) Provide all conduit and wire from the vacuum system control panel to pumps and controls for a complete and operable package system.

4) Provide all conduit and wire from the vacuum system control panel to pumps and controls for a complete and operable package system.

5) An automatic gate valve will be mounted at each outlet of the hose reels to open/close access to vacuum airflow. The gate valve will be actuated by a micro switch mounted in the hose reel in/out control module.

E. Controls:

1. Main electrical control panel

a. Pre-wired, 460 volt, 3 phases, 60 Hertz NEMA 4/12 rated main electrical control panel containing motor starters for the vacuum pump motors, full voltage reversing starters for hose reel motors, step-down transformer for control circuits, and digital display for alarm, timing functions and a programmable logic controller (PLC). All timing, alarm and logic functions shall be performed by the PLC; electromechanical relays are not acceptable. PLC shall be heavy-duty industrial type and have a minimum 512 megabytes instruction memory and a flash card memory back up. The main control shall include touch screen operator interface screens. The operator screen enclosure shall display total run hours, run hours between service intervals and current system pressure level. Panel enclosure shall be equipped with a lockout/tag-out type disconnect switch. The panel cover shall include a positive action, red, emergency stop button with oversize head. A white pilot light to indicate power to panel. The panel shall be UL.ULC, CSA or ETL listed with approval labels.

b. Circuit breakers shall protect all motors and the motor starter shall contain overload protection in all ungrounded conductors. Motor starters shall be NEMA Rated heavy-duty industrial types.

c. A single CAD generated system wiring diagram showing all internal panel wiring, external wiring between components, wire sizes and colors and breaker rating and terminal designations shall be provided.

d. Labeled terminal strips shall be provided for all external control wiring and shall correspond to terminal numbers on the CAD system drawing. Nameplates shall be placard engraved lettering.



1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 100 A, 104.5 HP single point connection to the main electrical control panel. 460 VAC, 3 phase, 3/4 HP at each hose reel, provide disconnect.

2. Mechanical: Vacuum pump exhaust ducting, 10 inches each pump

3. Plumbing: 120 PSI at 5 CFM

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION


B. Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather.

C. Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all items.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman or Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect or designated representative.

B. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Positioning: Place equipment in accordance with any noted special positioning requirements generally level, plumb and at right angles to adjacent work.


3. Anchorage: Attach equipment securely to floor, as directed by Architect or designated representative, to prevent damage resulting from inadequate fastening. Installation fasteners shall be installed to avoid scratching or damaging adjacent surfaces.



A. Testing: After final connections are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with specification in the presence of Architect or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANING






3.05 TESTING


B. Testing: The system shall be considered acceptable if it can successfully clean a minimum of 6 vehicles without any failures. The manufacturer shall have a qualified representative present at the site during the test period.

3.06 TRAINING


1. 3619 Vacuum, stationary, 10 HP; 2 hours (minimum)

2. 3642 Vacuum system, six station, 3-1/2 inch hose; 3 hours (minimum)

3. Obtain, from technical representative, a list of Metro’s personnel trained in equipment operations and maintenance.



SECTION 12 24 13

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES



1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including

shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of

material if applicable. 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches

long for each type of roller shade indicated. 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.

F. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


H. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product

manufacturer.

I. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency

J. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Santa Monica, CA 12 24 13 - 1


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the




A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction,

verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Authority of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by MechoShade Systems, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. BTX Window Automation, Inc. 2. DFB Sales. 3. Draper Inc. 4. Hunter Douglas Contract. 5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 6. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company. 7. OEM Shades Inc. 8. Shade Techniques, LLC. 9. Silent Gliss USA, Inc. 10. SM Automatic, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single

manufacturer. 2.02 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS WS-1

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and


clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount

B. Rollers: Extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to

accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with

roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As indicated on Finish Legend.

F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and

shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.

a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and


3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full

range. 2.03 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH DOUBLE ROLLERS WS-2

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently


adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

B. Rollers: Extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to

accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Double-Roller Mounting Configuration: Side by side. 2. Inside Roller:

a. Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.

3. Outside Roller:

a. Drive-End Location: Left side of inside face of shade. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.

4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with

roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated.

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Inside Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.


F. Outside Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.


G. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and



2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of

shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.

4. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.

5. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.04 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Type: Woven PVC-coated fiberglass and PVC-coated polyester 3. Weave: Mesh. 4. Orientation on Shadeband: Railroaded 5. Openness Factor: 10 percent. 6. Color: As indicated on Finish Legend.

C. Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Type: Fiberglass textile with PVC film bonded to both sides. 3. Orientation on Shadeband: Railroaded. 4. Features: Washable. 5. Color: As indicated on Finish Legend

2.05 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,

measured at 74 deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent

possible except as follows:

1. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.02 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to

interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by

Authority, before time of Substantial Completion.



SECTION 12 36 16

STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS



1. Stainless-steel countertops

a. Application: At locations as shown on drawings.


1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry]" for wood blocking for anchoring countertops.

2. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for plastic-laminate and solid-surfacing material countertops.

3. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed gypsum board partitions for anchoring countertops.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For metal countertops. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing

countertops. 2. Indicate hardware locations. 3. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other

building components, and equipment. 4. Indicate locations of seams in stainless-steel countertops.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of exposed hardware indicated.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain countertops through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of countertops.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS Santa Monica, CA 12 36 16 - 1


A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

B. Minimum Nominal Stainless-Steel Thicknesses for countertops:

1. Countertops: 0.0500 inch. 2. Shelves: 0.0375 inch except 0.0500 inch for unreinforced shelves more than 36

inches long. 3. Miscellaneous Components: 0.0375 inch minimum.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels.

B. Adjustable Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned

horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing channels.

C. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as countertops and with hemmed or flanged edges.

2.03 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured finish, free of cross scratches and matching No. 4 finish. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2.04 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOPS

A. Countertops: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Ease exposed edges and corners. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, not less than 0.0625-inch nominal

thickness, with No. 4 satin finish. 2. Extend top down 1 inch at edges with a 1/2-inch return flange under frame.

Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersurface. 3. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface. 4. Provide rolled edge, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing sinks;

pitch two ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving. 6. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or use thicker metal sheet

where necessary to insure rigidity without deflection. 7. Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform,

directionally textured finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.


8. Where field-made joints are permitted, provide welded joints. 9. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt-joints mechanically

bolted through continuous channels welded to underside at edges of joined ends. Keep field jointing to a minimum.


A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of metal medical casework.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Field Jointing: Provide flush welded joints in tops. Grind and polish surfaces to

produce uniform, directionally textured finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

C. Field Jointing: Provide flush hairline joints in tops using adhesives and fasteners

recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field-made joints only where indicated.

D. Fastening: Secure countertops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using

two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

E. Provide chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound for closures at junctures of top, curb, and splash, with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved.


A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Authority.

B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil plastic or other suitable

water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48 inches o.c.



SECTION 12 48 13

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES



1. Hinged rail mats. 2. Recessed frames.


1.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices. 2. Divisions between mat sections. 3. Perimeter floor moldings. 4. Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors.

C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat. 2. Tread Rail: Sample of each type and color. 3. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.

D. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Structural Performance: Provide hinged rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural

& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1.

2.02 FRAMES

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Santa Monica, CA 12 48 13 - 1

A. Recessed frames: manufacturer’s standard extrusion.

1. Architectural Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No.C38500

1.01 RECESSED ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS

A. Aluminum Grille Floor Mat FM-1:

1. Basis of Design: Provide GridLine G6 by C/S Group, with extruded members,

with carpet insert treads, and as follows:

a. Tread Rails: Type 304 Stainless Steel tread rails with Stainless Steel frame. b. Tread Rail Spacing: Manufacturer's standard for model selected. c. Top Surface: Stainless Steel. d. Grille Size: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Aluminum Grille Floor Mat FM-2:

1. Basis of Design: Provide Peditred G1 by C/S Group, with extruded members,

with carpet insert treads, and as follows:

a. Tread Rails: Extruded-aluminum tread rails with extruded-aluminum frame. b. Tread Rail Spacing: 1-1/2 inches o.c. with 1/8- to 3/16-inch wide openings

between treads.

1) Aluminum Finish: Satin Finish

c. Top Surface: Carpet insert.

1) Refer to Drawings for carpet style and color

d. Grille Size: As indicated on Drawings.

1.02 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Provide concrete fill and grout equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness.

1.03 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with

corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.

1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with

manufacturer's standard protective coating.



A. Mill finish.

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.


2.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.

1. For installation in terrazzo flooring areas, provide allowance for grinding and

polishing of terrazzo without grinding surface of recessed frames. Coordinate with other trades as required.

2. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure attachment of frames.

3. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.

B. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at

locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.

1. Anchor fixed surface-type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer.

2.03 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.



SECTION 13 34 23 PREFABRICATED BUILDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED


1. 1377 Building, material, hazardous, 12 feet by 20 feet (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. 1378 Building, materials, hazardous, 10 feet by 30 feet (Ref. Part 2.02)

3. 1379 Building, materials, storage, 10 feet by 30 feet (Ref. Part 2.03)







2. Training: Provide technical representative to provide training to Metro’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:






3. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing and compressed air systems.


5. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility PREFABRICATED BUILDING SANTA MONICA, CA 13 34 23 - 1

information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

6. List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cuts, recommended spare parts stocking quantity and local parts and service source.

7. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Fold out diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1- General Requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with of Division 1 - General Requirements of these specifications.





1.05 WARRANTY










1.07 LABELING




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BUILDING, MATERIALS, HAZARDOUS, 12 FEET BY 20 FEET Equipment Identifier: 1377



a. Safety Storage Inc., Hollister, CA (254) 644-5358

b. Model: 2012FS


a. Haz-Stor, Des Plaines, IL (847) 294-1000


1. Interior overall dimensions:

a. Length: 18 feet, 1 inch

b. Width: 10 feet

c. Height: 7 feet, 1 inch

d. Area: 180 square feet

2. Exterior dimensions (accessories may alter dimensions):

a. Length: 20 feet

b. Width: 12 feet

c. Height: 9 feet


4. Storage capacity: 45 drums, 55 gallon capacity each, single level

5. Design loads:

a. Roof snow load: 40 pounds per square foot

b. Wind load: 110 mph, exposure C

c. Floor live load: 500 pounds per square foot

d. Floor live load storage capacity: 90,000 pounds (uniformly distributed)


e. Seismic condition: Zone 4 or performance category E

6. Doors: 60 inches by 80 inches, one each


1. Building construction:

a. Exterior wall construction shall be weatherproof bi-directional two hour fire-rated noncombustible construction, per Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 263 and ASTM E-119, with multiple layers of UL fire-resistive overlapping gypsum wall board encased between galvanized steel sheets and exterior welded heavy gauge steel sheets.

b. Sump wall construction shall be weatherproof bi-directional two hour fire-rated noncombustible construction, per UL 263 and ASTM E-119, with multiple layers of UL exterior welded heavy gauge steel sheets. Interior and exterior continuously welded heavy gauge steel sheets shall be utilized.

c. Roof and ceiling construction shall be shall be weatherproof bi-directional two hour fire-rated noncombustible construction, per UL 263 and ASTM E-119, with multiple layers of UL exterior welded heavy gauge steel sheets and interior galvanized steel sheets

d. Roof shall be sloped to facilitate rainwater runoff.

e. Roof and ceiling shall be permanently attached to exterior walls.

f. Exterior walls, roof, subfloor, and explosion vent panels shall be equipped with R11 insulation.

2. Doors:

a. Door shall be three hour fire rated in accordance with UL classified and labeled, equipped with UL listed self-closer and UL screened listed exterior security lock(s) with keyless interior safety release lever.

b. Door shall be equipped with a magnetic hold-open and release device on the exterior of the building.

c. Door shall be equipped with a panic exit rim device on the interior of door.

d. Door shall comply with life safety and ADA requirements.

e. Door shall be equipped with R12.5 insulation.

3. Screened air vent(s) shall be equipped with UL classified and labeled 3-hour rated fire dampers with louvers and screens to provide air flow, but to prevent bird and animal entry. Dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel frame, curtain-type galvanized steel blades, and UL listed 165 degree F fusible link.

4. Building base:

a. Building base shall be open channel construction for visual inspection under building.

b. Building base shall be coated with a protective undercoating for maximum corrosion resistance.

c. Building base shall be equipped with a crane/forklift opening for ease in off-loading and relocation.


5. Building shall have a built-in 7 inches deep secondary containment sump with chemical-resistant epoxy coating.

6. The floor of the building shall be constructed of galvanized steel grating.

7. Internal spill containment capacity shall hold 757 gallons (30 percent of total storage capacity).

8. Building shall be equipped with four hold-down brackets (structural steel angles for wind and seismic anchoring.

9. Building shall have a static grounding system which shall be equipped with one exterior grounding connection, one 10 foot long, 5/8 inch diameter copper-clad steel grounding rod, one #4AWG copper conductor, and grounding lug(s).

10. Provide three interior two-foot grounding bars. Each shall be copper–clad steel, which is bonded to the frame of building.

11. Signage for the building shall be permanent all-metal D.O.T. hazard classification placard set(s) with rust-proof aluminum holder and stainless steel clips; and pressure sensitive NFPA 704 hazard rating sign(s).

12. Dry Chemical Fire Suppression System:

a. Building shall be equipped with two exterior means of fire suppression system activation.

b. System shall include adequate numbers of Interior nozzles to provide for total flooding of building.

c. Building shall be equipped with an audible and visual alarm on the exterior of the building (120 VAC).

d. Dry chemical agent storage cylinder and releasing device shall be housed inside an exterior tamper proof enclosure per NFPA 17 requirements.

e. System shall be equipped with remote annunciation with automated system shut down. Remote location to be determined by Metro.

13. Exhaust Ventilation Fume Removal System:

a. System shall be a UL listed totally enclosed explosion-proof motor (120 VAC, 1 phase, 4.5 A, 60 Hz) rated for Class 1, Group D, Division 1, Hazardous Locations.

b. Fan shall be a non-static and non-sparking, 12 inches diameter cast aluminum fan blade (not plastic) to preclude the ignition of hazardous vapors. Fan shall be mounted in the roof of the storage building.

c. Interior fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel, epoxy coated inside and out for maximum chemical resistance.

d. Interior exhaust vent shall be located within 12 inches of the floor, facilitating the extraction of heavier-than-air vapors.

e. Exterior exhaust fan port opening shall be protected with a UL classified fire damper having a three-hour fire protection rating.

f. Fire damper shall have a galvanized steel frame, curtain-type galvanized steel blades, and a UL listed 165 degree F fusible link.


g. Exterior exhaust port shall be equipped with a shutter assembly mounted high on the outside surface of an exterior wall.

h. System shall be activated by an exterior UL listed fan switch.

i. System shall automatically shut down if fire occurs.

j. System shall provide greater than one cubic foot of exhaust ventilation per square foot of floor area, in accordance with the requirements of the model building and fire codes (9UBC, UFC, BNBC, BNFPC, SBC and SFPC).

k. Exhaust ventilation thermostat shall have adjustable temperature settings.

14. Interior lighting:

a. Interior lighting shall be three each UL listed explosion-proof light fluorescent fixture with two 40-watt lamps per fixture.

b. Light switch shall be a non-EP exterior switch.

15. Exterior light shall be an exterior UL listed explosion-proof light fixture (120 VAC, 1.25a), with a UL listed photoelectric switch.

16. Water sprinkler system shall be equipped with UL listed and FM approved sprinkler heads with guards and an exterior 1-1/2 inch NPT fitting.

17. Heating system shall be UL listed explosion-proof fan forced heater (208 VAC, 25,590 BTU).

18. Eye wash unit and safety shower system shall be provided. Water supply: 1-1/2 inch.

19. Building shall have one 60 inch wide by 48 inch long aluminum anti-slip coated ramp with ramp mounting bracket kit.

20. Building shall have free standing, epoxy coated shelving with containment lips. Each shelving unit shall be 16 inches deep by 36 inches wide by 72 inches high with 5 equally spaced shelves. 12 shelving units included.


1. Electrical:

a. 120 VAC, 1.25 A for exterior light

b. 120 VAC, 1.25 A for interior light

c. 120 VAC, 4.5 A for exhaust fan

d. 120 VAC for alarm, 1.25 A

e. 460 VAC, 3 phase, 25,590 BTU for fan forced heater

2. Plumbing:

a. Water: 1-1/2 inch NPT

E. Finish:

1. Interior finish shall be a chemical-resistant epoxy coating in manufacturer’s standard color.

2. Exterior finish shall be a chemical-resistant epoxy undercoat with a heat reflective gloss-white aliphatic polyurethane topcoat.


2.02 BUILDING, MATERIALS, HAZARDOUS, 10 FEET BY 30 FEET Equipment Identifier: 1378




b. Model: 3010FS






b. Width: 8 feet, 1 inch




a. Length: 30 feet

b. Width: 10 feet

c. Height: 9 feet


4. Storage capacity: 56 drums, 55-gallon capacity each, single level

5. Design loads:






6. Doors: 60 inches by 80 inches, one each



a. Exterior wall construction shall be weatherproof unidirectional two hour fire-rated noncombustible construction, per Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 263 and ASTM E-119, with multiple layers of UL fire-resistive overlapping


gypsum wall board encased between galvanized steel sheets and exterior welded heavy gauge steel sheets.

b. Sump wall construction shall be weatherproof unidirectional two hour fire-rated noncombustible construction, per Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 263 and ASTM E-119, with multiple layers of UL exterior welded heavy gauge steel sheets. Interior and exterior continuously welded heavy gauge steel sheets shall be utilized.

c. Roof and ceiling construction shall be shall be weatherproof unidirectional two hour fire-rated noncombustible construction, per Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 263 and ASTM E-119, with multiple layers of UL exterior welded heavy gauge steel sheets and interior galvanized steel sheets

d. Roof shall be sloped to facilitate rainwater runoff.

e. Roof and ceiling shall be permanently attached to exterior walls.

f. Exterior walls, roof, subfloor, and explosion vent panels shall be equipped with R11 insulation.

2. Doors:

a. Door shall be three hour fire rated in accordance with UL classified and labeled, equipped with UL listed self-closer and UL screened listed exterior security lock(s) with keyless interior safety release lever.

b. Door shall be equipped with a magnetic hold-open and release device on the exterior of the building.

c. Door shall be equipped with a panic exit rim device on the interior of door.

d. Door shall comply with life safety and ADA requirements.

e. Door shall be equipped with R12.5 insulation.

3. Screened air vent(s) shall be equipped with UL classified and labeled 3-hour rated fire dampers with louvers and screens to provide air flow, but to prevent bird and animal entry. Dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel frame, curtain-type galvanized steel blades, and UL listed 165 degree F fusible link.

4. Building base:


b. Building base shall be coated with a protective undercoating for maximum corrosion resistance.

c. Building base shall be equipped with a crane/forklift opening for ease in off-loading and relocation.

5. Building shall have a built-in 7 inches deep secondary containment sump with chemical-resistant epoxy coating.

6. The floor of the building shall be constructed of galvanized steel grating.

7. Internal spill containment capacity shall hold 953 gallons (30 percent of total storage capacity).




10. Provide three interior 2 foot grounding bars. Each shall be copper–clad steel, which is bonded to the frame of building.


12. Dry Chemical Fire Suppression System:

a. Building shall be equipped with two exterior means of fire suppression system activation.

b. System shall include adequate number of interior nozzles to provide for total flooding of building.

c. Building shall be equipped with an alarm on the exterior of the building (120 VAC).

d. Dry chemical agent storage cylinder and releasing device shall be housed inside an exterior tamper proof enclosure per NFPA 17 requirements.

e. System shall be equipped with remote annunciation with automated system shut down.

13. Exhaust Ventilation Fume Removal System:

a. System shall be a UL listed totally enclosed explosion-proof motor (120 VAC, 1 phase, 4.5 A, 60 Hz) rated for Class 1, Group D, Division 1, Hazardous Locations.

b. Fan shall be a non-static and non-sparking, 12 inches diameter cast aluminum fan blade (not plastic) to preclude the ignition of hazardous vapors. Fan shall be mounted in the roof of the storage building.

c. Interior fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel, epoxy coated inside and out for maximum chemical resistance.

d. Interior exhaust vent shall be located within 12 inches of the floor, facilitating the extraction of heavier-than-air vapors.

e. Exterior exhaust fan port opening shall be protected with a UL classified fire damper having a three-hour fire protection rating.

f. Fire damper shall have a galvanized steel frame, curtain-type galvanized steel blades, and a UL listed 165 degree F fusible link.

g. Exterior exhaust port shall be equipped with a shutter assembly mounted high on the outside surface of an exterior wall.

h. System shall be activated by an exterior UL listed fan switch.

i. System shall automatically shut down if fire occurs.


j. System shall provide greater than one cubic foot of exhaust ventilation per square foot of floor area, in accordance with the requirements of the model building and fire codes (9UBC, UFC, BNBC, BNFPC, SBC and SFPC).

k. Exhaust ventilation thermostat shall have adjustable temperature settings.


a. Interior lighting shall be three each UL listed explosion-proof light fluorescent fixture with two 40-watt lamps per fixture.


15. Exterior light shall be an exterior UL listed explosion-proof light fixture (120 VAC, 1.25A), with a UL listed photoelectric switch.

16. Water sprinkler system shall be equipped with UL listed and FM approved sprinkler heads with guards and an exterior 1-1/2 inch NPT fitting.

17. Heating system shall be UL listed explosion-proof fan forced heater (208 VAC, 25,590 BTU).

18. Eye wash unit and safety shower system shall be provided. Water supply: 1-1/2 inch

19. Building shall have one 60 inch wide by 48 inch long aluminum anti-slip coated ramp with ramp mounting bracket kit.

20. Building shall have free standing, epoxy coated shelving with containment lips. Each shelving unit shall be 16 inches deep by 36 inches wide by 72 inches high with 5 equally spaced shelves. 12 shelving units included.


1. Electrical:



c. 120 VAC for alarm, 1.25 A

d. 120 VAC, 4.5 A for exhaust fan

e. 460 VAC, 3 phase, 25,590 BTU for fan forced heater

2. Plumbing:

a. Water: 1-1/2 inch NPT

E. Finish:



2.03 BUILDING, MATERIALS, STORAGE, 10 FEET BY 30 FEET Equipment Identifier: 1379





b. Model: 3010S






b. Width: 8 feet, 1 inch




a. Length: 30 feet

b. Width: 10 feet

c. Height: 9 feet


4. Design loads:






5. Doors: 60 inches by 80 inches, two each



a. Exterior wall construction shall be weatherproof unitized noncombustible steel construction fabricated from welded & corrosion-protected structural and heavy gauge steel sheets for maximum durability, weather resistance and rigidity.

b. Roof and ceiling construction shall be shall be weatherproof unitized noncombustible steel construction, same as exterior walls, fabricated from continuously welded heavy gauge steel roof sheets for maximum durability, weather resistance and rigidity.

c. Roof shall be sloped to facilitate rainwater runoff.


d. Roof and ceiling shall be permanently attached to exterior walls.

2. Doors:

a. Door shall be steel double doors located on the front wall of building. Active door leaf (36 inches by 80 inches) is equipped with an exterior UL listed keyed security lock and passive door (24 inches by 80 inches) is equipped with manually operated top and bottom UL listed surface bolts. Both door leafs equipped with hold open door latches.

3. Screened air vent(s) shall be equipped with louvers and screens. The vent openings are arranged to provide air movement and prevent accumulation of hazardous vapors.

4. Building base:


b. Building base shall be equipped with a crane/forklift opening for ease in off-loading and relocation.



7. Provide three interior 2 foot grounding bars. Each shall be copper–clad steel, which is bonded to the frame of building.



a. Interior lighting shall be three each UL listed light fluorescent fixture with two 40-watt lamps per fixture.


10. Exterior light shall be an exterior UL listed explosion-proof light fixture (120 VAC, 1.25A), with a UL listed photoelectric switch.


1. Electrical:



E. Finish:




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION


B. Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and exposure to weather. Compare delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure receipt of all equipment items.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman of Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect.






3.03 TESTING


3.04 CLEANUP





3.05 TRAINING



1. 1377 Building, material, hazardous, 12 feet by 20 feet; 1 hour (minimum)

2. 1378 Building, materials, hazardous, 10 feet by 30 feet; 1 hour (minimum)

3. 1379 Building, materials, storage, 10 feet by 30 feet; 1 hour (minimum)

B. Obtain, from technical representative, a list of Metro’s personnel trained in equipment operations and maintenance.



Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

Santa Monica, CA 14 24 23 - 1

SECTION 14 24 23 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR FOR O&M FACILITY

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hydraulic Elevators designed in compliance with the most recent version of Metro Design Standards as indicated in the Project Specifications and Drawings:

1. Hydraulic Passenger Elevators: Metro Car Number(s) as indicated.

B. Engineering, equipment, labor, and permits required to satisfactorily complete elevator installation required by Contract Documents.

C. Preventive maintenance as described herein.

D. Additional equipment or finishes furnished under other sections, installed under this Section:

1. In-car Firefighters’ telephone jacks, if required

2. CCTV system

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures

B. Section 01 43 10: Project Quality Program Requirements – Design/Build or Section 01 43 20: Project Quality Program Requirements – Design/Bid/Build (As applicable)

C. Section 01 43 38: Field Samples and Mock-ups

D. Section 01 66 00: Product Storage and Handling Requirements

E. Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data

F. Section 01 78 43: Spare Parts and Replacement Materials

G. Section 05 05 33: Basic Welding Requirements

H. Section 07 81 00: Sprayed-On Fireproofing

I. Section 09 91 00: Painting

J. Section 10 44 13: Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets

K. Section 21 13 13: Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. ASME A17.1 – Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

2. ASME A17.2 – Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving



Walks

C. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A36 – Carbon Structural Steel

2. ASTM A240 – Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,

Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

3. ASTM A568 – Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low- Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for

4. ASTM A1008 – Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

5. ASTM B209 – Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

6. ASTM B221 – Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

7. ASTM B151 – Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloy (Nickel Silver) and Copper- Nickel Rod and Bar

8. ASTM C1172 – Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

D. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. Title 8 – Industrial Relations

a. Chapter 4 - Division of Industrial Safety; Subchapter 6 - Elevator Safety Orders

b. Division of Occupational Safety and Health – Cal/OSHA

2. Title 19 – Public Safety Code

3. Title 24 – Building Standards Code

a. Part 2 – California Building Code (CBC)

b. Part 3 – California Electrical Code (CEC)

E. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC):

1. 16 CFR Part 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA Standard 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)

G. U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT):

1. Federal Transit Administration (FTA) – ADA Standards for Transportation Facilities

H. Underwriters’ Laboratory, Inc. (UL)

I. CSA International (CSA)



J. American Welding Society AWS D1.1

K. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. IEEE 260.1 - Standard Letter Symbols for Unit of Measurements (SI Customary Inch-Pound Units and certain Other Units)

L. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD):

1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 – Architectural Coatings


A. Comply with Project Quality Program Requirements (see 1.02 above).

B. Manufacturer and Applicator/Installer (Contractor) Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing of specified materials/products, with record of successful in-service performance.

2. Applicator/Installer (Contractor) Qualifications: Engage applicator/installer with minimum 5 years experience in installation, repairing and servicing elevators of types specified and materials/products similar in material, design, and to extent indicated for this Project.

a. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer, certifying that installer is approved by, licensed, or certified by manufacturer for installation of elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances, signal equipment, buffers, machines, basic controller, and specified materials/products or systems.

b. Provide list of minimum 5 projects similar in nature and size to that of this Project, where specified elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances, signal equipment, buffers, machinery , basic controllers and other required materials/products have been successfully installed/used.

c. Other Parts and Appurtenances - By elevator manufacturer or firms specializing in types of components required and acceptable to elevator manufacturer.

C. Elevator Contractor - Currently C-11 licensed.

D. Safety - Conform to requirements of ASME A17.1 and Supplements and ASME A17.2 and Supplements for safety devices, running clearance, testing and maintenance methods.

E. Environmental Operational Requirements

1. Provide elevators capable of operating with full specified performance while exposed to following climatic and environmental conditions:

2. Design exterior installations which open directly to street or courtyard level, or are otherwise exposed to outdoor environment, to operate in dry bulb temperatures ranging from minus 25F to 120F while exposed to sunlight, rain and airborne dust.

3. Elevator Equipment Rooms - Design machinery to operate in underground temperatures ranging from 55F to 90F dry bulb and all conditions of relative humidity while exposed to airborne dust.



4. Elevator Pit Floor - Paint pit floor and, for hoistways enclosed in concrete and masonry walls, paint pit walls up to level of hoistway door sill. For hoistways enclosed in glass and metal partitions, paint pit walls up to bottom of wall base.

5. Noise Levels - Do not exceed 50 dBA steady-state noise produced by elevators or associated equipment, excluding entrance door operations in public spaces three feet or more from elevator or associated equipment or within elevator cab at any location five feet above floor and one foot or more from any wall. Noise produced by operation of elevator door - Do not exceed 60 dBA three feet or more from elevator door inside and outside elevator cab; measure using fast meter response.

F. Corrosion Protection

1. Design elevator assemblies to prevent corrosion by galvanic action due to physical contact between dissimilar metals or other causes.

2. Where use of adjoining dissimilar metal is required, submit description of protective measure to be employed to prevent corrosive damage.

G. Hours of operation: 24 hours per day, seven days per week

H. Allowable Tolerances for Elevator Travel - Plumb and secure guide rails within overall tolerance of 1/16 inch maximum deviation (measured with no wind or solar load on building) and within 0.01 inch joint offset on rail surfaces.

I. Laboratory Testing - Comply with Code for laboratory testing of elevator component parts, including buffers, interlocks, door contacts, entrances, connectors, fasteners and other materials and products used in elevator Work. Label products and materials to indicate testing and certification by laboratory.

J. Design, fabricate and install elevator parts subject to repair and replacement to be readily and easily removable and replaceable without requiring modification of hoistway structure, equipment room or elevator equipment.

K. Machine, Controller, electrical control panel, automatic door operator, operating fixtures, signals, limit and safety switches and other parts subject to wear shall be standard interchangeable production items.

L. Precisely identify replacement parts, whether produced in Contractor's factories or secured from commercial factories and distributors. Make replacement parts, maintenance methods, technical information, wiring diagrams, testing procedures, design and performance criteria, and other publications related to elevator equipment provided available to Metro or its designee without prejudice or delay. Required quantities, uniform price and delivery time of replacement parts - On same basis as Contractor's most favored maintenance consumer.

M. Reliability/Maintainability

1. Elevator - Capable of operating at full load under normal modes of operation with Mean-Time-Between-Failure (MTBF) of 350 hours, where MTBF is determined by following formula:

MTBF = Operating Time "T" (all elevators)

Number of failures in time "T"



2. Elevator - Mean-Time-To-Repair (MTTR) of two hours, where MTTR is defined as average time required to repair elevator to operate after failure occurs and is calculated as follows:

MTTR = T (t) Where T (t) = total active repair time

f (t) to repair failures occurring in time (t)

f (t) = the total number of failures occurring in time (t)

3. In lieu of demonstrating MTBF, Contractor may elect to demonstrate compliance with reliability criteria by Mean-Cycles-Between-Failures (MCBF). One operating cycle will be considered as consisting of 44 seconds of travel time, in UP and DOWN directions, plus two door open/close cycles. MCBF: 30,000 cycles.

N. Store critical safety related repair parts in Metro’s designated location.

O. The elevator specifications are intended to cover the complete installation of the elevator and to outline broadly the equipment required, but not to cover the details of construction. Such details are recognized to be the exclusive responsibility of the Manufacturer and Installer. It is hereby recognized that Metro or its designee did not invent or develop any part of the elevator systems, but has only made selections of capacities, speeds, control systems, materials, from choices made available by the manufacturers.

P. Seismic Criteria - Provide equipment capable of withstanding seismic shock equivalent to 1g horizontal and 1g vertical acceleration, without adverse effect on performance, operation or life expectancy

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal requirements and procedures.

B. Within 60 calendar days after award of contract and before beginning equipment fabrication, submit shop drawings and required materials for review as outlined in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. Allow 30 calendar days for response to initial submittal.

1. Fully Dimensioned Layout: Plan of pit, hoistway, remote piping, and machine room indicating equipment arrangement, elevation section of hoistway, details of car enclosures, car and hoistway entrances, car/hall signal fixtures, and firefighters’ control panel (if required).

2. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, and design information on layouts including ventilation requirements.

3. Power Confirmation Information: Include motor horsepower, code letter, starting current, full-load running current, and demand factor.

4. Hall, Car and Firefighters’ Control Fixtures: Cuts, samples and shop drawings.

C. Acknowledge and respond to review comments within 14 calendar days of return. Promptly incorporate required changes due to inaccurate data or incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not affected. Manufacturer’s revision response time is not justification for equipment delivery or installation delay

D. Samples:



1. Required metal finishes acceptable low and high range of variation in color and finish - Governed by control samples in Metro’s or its designee's office.

2. Hall lanterns and call buttons.

3. Car finish materials

a. Floor covering: 12 inches square

b. Glazing panel: 12 inches square

c. Ceiling panel: Six inches square

d. Light fixture lens: Six inches square

e. Sill Section: Four inches long.

4. Tactile and visual control indicators including Braille message plates. Sample will be returned to Contractor.

5. Star of life plate, and floor designation signs. Sample will be returned to Contractor.

E. Shop Drawings - Complete detailed drawings for each elevator system, and fabricated Work. Detail following:

1. Outlet locations in hoistways, for connection of traveling cable for car lights, fire detectors, communication and control systems.

2. Plan view of pit and hoistway showing car, guide rails, buffers and other components located in hoistway for each elevator.

3. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions.

4. Refuge space on top of car and in pit.

5. Car rail bracket spacing and maximum horizontal seismic forces on guide rails.

6. Reactions at points of support.

7. Weight of principal parts.

8. Elevation/Section of hoistway showing, top and bottom clearances and over-travel of cars.

9. Loads on hoisting beams.

10. Plan view and wall elevations of each elevator equipment room, at scale of 1/2 inch equals one foot. Show arrangement of equipment.

11. Electrical drawings showing location of circuit breakers, switchboard panels or disconnect switches and feeder extension points in equipment rooms.

12. Complete wiring diagrams of elevator systems and subsystems and parts catalogues, using IEEE standard symbols and details of signal fixtures.

13. Electrical drawings showing electrical and mechanical details of elevator controller, power door operators, door interlocks including electrical protective devices and electrical contacts for communication system. Provide equipment ventilation requirements.

14. Detail drawings of each elevator car, elevator platform and elevator hoistway entrance, at the scale of three inch equals one foot. Include interior car



elevations; floor plan, reflected ceiling plan and complete details of doors, frames, controls, fixtures, and accessory equipment.

15. Full scale detail drawings of graphics.

16. Provide record set of drawings with the changes made during installation of Work. At completion of Work submit for Metro use a complete set of "AS-BUILT" plans and wiring diagrams.

17. Power equipment including machine/pump unit and a diagram of hydraulic feed line routing and accessories.

18. Buffers and other pit equipment.

19. Guide rails connection details

20. Car construction details.

21. Removable glazed panels including details of glazing construction and mounting method.

22. Floor and base details.

23. Plenum chamber and ceiling details.

24. Car lighting, fan and public address speaker details.

25. Car doors, transom, vision panel and entrance column details.

26. Door operator, operator support and car entrance sill details.

27. Handrail and pad hook details.

28. Cut-outs for service cabinet, telephone, and car operating buttons.

29. Hoistway entrance details including strut angles, jamb strut alignment and anchorage, sill assembly, sill support and transom.

30. Header, hanger pocket, hanger cover, fascia and toe guard details.

31. Hoistway doors and glazed panel details.

32. Metal gauges and finishes.

33. Approximate car weight.

34. Motor size and horsepower criteria.

35. Elevator capacity and speed.

36. Machine loads, motor loads, calculations showing over design and factors of safety.

37. Elevator parts to be painted.

F. Manufacturer's Literature - Catalog cuts, manuals, illustrations, wiring diagrams and configuration drawings. Include configuration drawings to be used to cross reference, locate and identify hardware, components and systems submitted.

G. Drawings - Indicate manufacturer's unit assembly number or component part number as it appears in submitted literature. If component or subsystem is furnished by subcontractor, indicate name of subcontractor and subcontractor's part number, component, or subsystem identification number.



H. Configuration Drawings - Include pit, hoistway, and equipment room, typical layouts in plan and elevation, and elevator car and entrance typical layouts in plan, elevation and detail

I. Replacement parts, technical information, test procedures, design criteria, and other publications related to elevator equipment supplied.

J. Test Procedures.

K. Certificates and Test Reports - Certified reports for required tests; record dates performed, test method, test results, interpretation of results and recommended action; include:

1. Manufacturer's certificates of rated load test of safeties, and buffers.

2. Contractor's standard field test and data report.

3. Certificate of inspection by the authority having jurisdiction.

4. Operating permit issued by authority having jurisdiction.

L. Prior to installation, submit three preliminary sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for approval six weeks after Notice to Proceed. The submittal shall consist of complete sets of maintenance and operating instructions as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

M. Maintenance Program - Detailed, showing functions to be performed and scheduled frequency, not less than 90 days before acceptance tests and final inspection. Provide field operational and maintenance data for equivalent operating system for minimum of one year.

N. Spare Parts List - Not later than 120 days before completion of Work, provide to Metro or its designee spare parts list; include description, part numbers and unit prices.

O. Reliability and Maintainability Demonstration - Report, demonstrating and documenting compliance with seismic criteria verifiable by prediction analysis, testing, or analysis of field operational data. If demonstration is accomplished by prediction analysis or testing, submit report not later than 90 days prior to start of revenue service. If demonstration is accomplished by analysis of field operational data submit report not later than 90 days prior to end of warranty period.

P. Welding procedures and qualifications of welders in accordance with Section 05 05 33, Basic Welding Requirements.

Q. Comply with Project Quality Program Requirements (see 1.02 above).

R. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) Manufacture’s Safety Data Sheets for each type of material used in Work.

S. Elevator Interface Schedule showing requirements of interface work between Contractor and Elevator Contractor.

1. Include only Work to be performed by Contractor. Incorporate interface schedule in submittal required by Section 01310, Cost/Schedule Integration System.

2. Coordinated layout of standard elevator pit.



T. Within 60 days after Notice to Proceed, submit a detailed comprehensive maintenance control program in compliance with the requirements of section 1.11.

1.06 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms used are defined in the latest edition of ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

B. Reference to a device or a part of the equipment applies to the number of devices or parts required to complete the installation.

C. Provisions of this specification are applicable to every elevator unless identified otherwise.

D. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound, as defined in SCAQMD Rule 102 – Definition of Terms:

1. Any volatile compound of carbon, excluding methane, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides or carbonates, ammonium carbonate, and exempt compounds.

E. SCAQMD: South Coast Air Quality Management District.

F. Defective is defined to include, but not limited to operation or control system failures, car performance below required minimum, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unsatisfactory conditions.

1.07 RELATED WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Available Site:

1. Access route available to elevator hoistway and equipment room, clear and free of construction materials and debris, to permit delivery of elevator materials and equipment to hoistway and equipment room.

2. Area in and around elevator hoistway, pit and equipment room is clear and free from construction materials and debris, to permit unloading and installation of rigging required for elevator materials and equipment.

3. Hydrocarbon-resistant elevator well casing in place with accessories as indicated in Metro’s structural standard drawing SS-037; casing plumb, sealed and watertight; pipe sleeves for hydraulic fluid lines and conduit in-place; and embedded hydraulic lines and conduit in-place.

4. Embedded conduits, junction boxes, outlets and switches, installed.

5. Hoistway area dry and covered for protection from exposure to elements.

6. Elevator hoistway area constructed with rough openings for doors in concrete walls, hoistway door sill supports, embedded conduit and outlet boxes in place.

7. Elevator hoistway finished with plumb walls and rough openings for elevator doors, guide rail support, hoistway door sill supports, conduit and outlet box for car lights, conduit and pull box for communication, telephone and security circuits in place.

8. Elevator equipment foundation and overhead beam support in place.

B. Elevator Hoistway and Pit:



1. Clear, plumb, substantially flush hoistway with variations not to exceed 1 inch at any point.

2. Bevel cants not less than 75 degrees from the horizontal on any rear or side wall ledges and beams or mullions that project or recess 2 inches or more into the hoistway.

3. Supports at each floor for car guide rail fastening. Intermediate car guide rail support as designated on contract drawings. Building supports not to deflect in excess of 1/8 inch under normal conditions, 1/4 inch under applicable seismic conditions.

4. Continuous vertical car guide rail support between floors as shown on Contract documents, full height of hoistway.

5. Installation of guide rail bracket supports in concrete. Inserts or embeds, if used, will be furnished under this Section.

6. Wall blockouts and fire rated closure for control and signal fixture boxes which penetrate walls.

7. Cutting and patching walls and floors.

8. Opening in hoistway wall or pit wall for hydraulic piping. Trench and backfill underground piping.

9. Erect front hoistway wall after elevator entrances are installed.

10. Grout floor up to hoistway sills.

11. Pit access ladder for each elevator.

12. Structural support at pit floor for buffer impact loads, guide rail loads, and cylinder loads.

13. Waterproof Pit: Indirect waste drain or sump with flush grate and pump. If pump is not employed, provide piping to sump and accessible connection outside of hoistway for Metro pump truck.

14. Protect open hoistways and entrances during construction per Cal/OSHA Regulations.

15. Protect car enclosure, hoistway entrance assemblies, and special metal finishes from damage.

16. Hoistway venting if required.

17. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking.

18. Glass Enclosed Hoistways: Laminated glass meeting specified requirements of ANSI Z97.1, ASME A17.1, CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201, and ASTM C1172. Interior ledges created by glass mullions not to exceed 2 inches.

19. Provide 3'-0" square hole in pit floor to facilitate installation of protective secondary containment casing by Elevator Contractor. Fill hole with concrete after jack installation. Seal pit with non-permeable epoxy.

C. Machine Room and Machinery Spaces:

1. Enclosure with access.



2. Self-closing and locking access door.

3. Ventilation and Heating: Maintain minimum temperature of 55° F, maximum 90° F. Maintain maximum 80% relative humidity, non-condensing.

4. Paint walls and ceiling. Comply with requirements of Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

5. Class “ABC” fire extinguisher in each elevator machine room. Comply with requirements of Section 10 44 13 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets.

6. Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking in accordance with requirements of Section 07 81 00, Sprayed-On Fireproofing.

7. Fire sprinklers where required, complying with requirements of Section 21 13 13, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems.

8. Coordinate secondary containment of pump unit oil reservoir with Elevator Contractor.

D. Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices:

1. Lighting and GFCI convenience outlets in pit and machine room. Provide one additional non-GFCI convenience outlet in pit for sump pump and oil return pump.

2. Three-phase 60 Hz mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each elevator controller in the machine room with protected, lockable “open,” disconnecting means

3. Minimum 10 foot candles illumination at elevator landings.

4. Single-phase copper power feeder to each elevator controller for car lighting and exhaust blower with individual protected, lockable “open,” disconnecting means located in machine room.

5. Emergency telephone line to each individual elevator control panel in elevator machine room.

6. Fire alarm initiating devices in each elevator lobby, for each group of elevators or single elevator and each machine room to initiate firefighters’ return feature. Device at top of hoistway if sprinklered. Device must be accessible from outside of hoistway. Provide alarm initiating signal wiring from hoistway or machine room connection point to elevator controller terminals. Device in machine room and at top of hoistway to provide signal for general alarm and discrete signal for Phase II firefighters’ operation.

7. Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust elevator equipment, as necessary.

8. Wiring, conduit and/or phone lines from elevator machine room junction box to remote monitoring panels or consoles as required by Metro.

9. Firefighters’ telephone jack and announcement speaker in car with connection to individual elevator control panels in elevator machine room and elevator control panel in firefighters’ control room, as required.

10. Conduit from the closest hoistway of each elevator group or single elevator to the remote interface panel, firefighters' control room and main control console.



Coordinate size, number, and location of conduits with Elevator Contractor, as required.

11. Means to automatically disconnect power to affected elevator pump unit and controller prior to activation of machine room fire sprinkler system, and hoistway fire sprinkler system. Manual shut-off means shall be located outside bounds of machine room.

12. When sprinklers are provided in the hoistway, electrical equipment, located less than 4'-0" above the pit floor shall be identified for use in wet locations. Exception, seismic protection devices.

13. Single-phase power feeders to main control console and firefighters’ control panel, as required.

14. Single-phase power feeders to controller(s) for closed circuit television (CCTV) with lockable “open” disconnecting means.

15. Wire shall be copper and exposed conduit shall be Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS).

E. Standby Power Provision: (If available)

1. Standby power of normal voltage characteristics via normal electrical feeders to run each elevator at the same time at full-contract car speed and capacity.

2. Conductor from auxiliary form “C” dry contacts, located in the standby power transfer switch to a designated elevator control panel in each elevator unit. Provide a time delay of 30 - 45 seconds for pre-transfer signal in either direction.

3. Standby single-phase power to each elevator controller for car lighting, exhaust blower, emergency signaling device, intercom amplifier.

4. Standby power to machine room ventilation or air conditioning.

5. Standby power to emergency communications devices.


A. Refer to Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements, for general requirements for product delivery, storage, and handling procedures.

B. Transport, handle, and store material in manner to ensure preservation of material quality and fitness for incorporation in Work.

C. Deliver material in Manufacturer’s original, unopened protective packaging.

D. Store material in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage, or moisture damage. Store materials in a manner to facilitate inspection.

E. Protect equipment and exposed finishes from damage and stains during transportation, erection and construction period against damage and stains.

F. Erection Equipment - Subject to Metro or its designee's approval upon delivery to Worksite. Promptly bring to acceptable condition, or remove from Worksite equipment that proves unacceptable or hazardous to personnel and property. Obtain approval from Metro or its designee prior to use of heavy moving and erection equipment supported by station structures.



G. In event of notice of delay for access to construction Worksite, storage at Contractor's facility will be required.

1.09 RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR

A. Document Verification:

1. In order to discover and resolve conflicts or lack of definition which might create problems, Manufacturer must review Contract Documents for compatibility with its product prior to submittal of quotation. Metro will not pay for change to structural, mechanical, electrical, or other systems required to accommodate Manufacturer’s equipment.

B. Verify dimensions of hoistways and stub-outs for conduit in equipment rooms at site by accurate field measurements so that the elevator Work will be accurately fabricated to fit into hoistways and equipment rooms. Elevator Contractor - Review Working Drawings and verify by field observation that clearances and alignments are proper for installation of equipment. In event of major discrepancy, immediately notify Metro or its designee.

C. Coordinate elevator Work with Work of other trades and provide items to be placed during installation of other Work at proper time to avoid delays in overall Work. Place such items, including inserts and anchors, accurately in relation to final location of elevator components. Use Metro Facility Contractor's bench marks. Provide technical assistance to other contractors in connection alignment of elevator hoistway framing.

D. Temporary Use - Do not use elevators during construction period without written permission from Metro or its designee. Provide temporary enclosures or hoistway opening protection, protection against damage to machine room equipment, cars, doors or door frames, if temporary use is permitted. Repairs or replacement to restore elevator equipment to original condition at User's expense.

1.10 PERMIT, TEST AND INSPECTION

A. Obtain and pay for permit, license, and inspection fee necessary to complete installation.

B. Perform tests required by Governing Authority in accordance with procedure described in ASME A17.1 and ASME A17.2 Guide for Inspection of Elevators and Escalators in the presence of Metro’s Authorized Representative.

C. Supply personnel and equipment for test and final review by Metro or its designee, as required.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Within sixty days after Notice to Proceed, and prior to installation, Contractor shall submit detailed interim and warranty Maintenance Control Programs, showing functions to be performed and their scheduled frequency.

1. Program shall reflect requirements for elevators for use in an industrial park environment at the job specific location.

B. Perform preventive maintenance and 24-hour emergency callback service during the Interim and Warranty Maintenance periods. Callback service shall be provided at no additional cost to Metro or its designee. All callbacks are included.



C. The interim and warranty maintenance agreement shall also cover repairs and damage above and beyond regular maintenance including any vandalism or nuisance calls for the period of the agreement at no additional cost to Metro or its designee.

D. Interim and warranty maintenance shall be performed at a level sufficient for elevators in an industrial park environment.

E. Interim Maintenance:

1. When one or more of the elevators are near completion and ready for service, Metro may accept one or more elevators for interim use and place in service prior to substantial completion and Final Acceptance by Metro.

2. During this period, prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the elevators and Metro will compensate Contractor at the fixed monthly rate, as bid and set forth in this Contract.

3. Temporary acceptance form must be acceptable to Metro and signed prior to use.

4. Interim maintenance shall be performed at the same level as maintenance during the warranty period. Response times and liquidated damages will apply during interim maintenance the same as during the warranty period.

F. Warranty Maintenance (Maintenance during Warranty Period):

1. Provide preventive maintenance and 24-hour emergency callback service for one year commencing on date of Final Acceptance by Metro. Required maintenance shall be of the same standard as other Metro elevators and shall include Metro’s standard maintenance check chart and Manufacturer’s O&M criteria. Systematically examine, adjust, clean and lubricate all equipment. Repair and replace defective parts using parts produced by the manufacturer of installed equipment.

2. Use competent personnel, acceptable to Metro, supervised and employed by Contractor.

3. Repair or replace defective parts using parts produced by the manufacturer of installed equipment.

4. Perform warranty maintenance in compliance with Title 8 and ASME A17.1. Provide a minimum of four mechanic hours per unit, per month of preventive maintenance. Required testing, major repairs exceeding one and one half (1.5) hours, and callbacks shall not be considered a part of the four hours of preventive maintenance. Equipment shall be adjusted to meet specified performance criteria.

5. Provide support for State Inspector and Metro or its designee’s annual inspection at no extra cost to Metro or its designee.

6. Contractor shall respond to trouble calls, first, with onsite personnel. If Contractor personnel are not on site, response between 6:00am and 9:00 pm shall be within 45 minutes, 90 minutes between 9:00 pm and 6:00 am. Contractor shall coordinate maintenance work with Metro and Metro’s ROC or BOC.



7. During the interim maintenance and warranty maintenance periods, in the event the elevator is out of service for more than 24 hours, liquidated damages in the amount $500.00 shall be assessed against the Contractor. Such an assessment shall be made for every 24 hours of downtime per unit. When the elevator is reported as out of service by Metro to the Contractor, failure to arrive at the affected unit within 45 minutes between 6:00 am and 9:00 pm and 90 minutes between 9:00 pm and 6:00 am will result in liquidated damages to be assessed against the Contractor in the amount of $200.00 per every late response for a callback. Liquidated damages will be withheld from payment for monthly maintenance.

8. The warranty maintenance period specified in Item 1 above shall be extended according to the Elevator Performance Condition at no additional cost to Metro.

9. Include the cost of warranty maintenance as described herein in the base bid price for the project. Metro shall remit twelve equal installments minus assessed liquidated damages during period in which maintenance is being performed. The cost of warranty maintenance will not be prepaid by Metro.

G. Elevator Performance Condition:

1. During the final 30 days of the warranty maintenance period, the elevator shall run reliably and safely with no more than three similar trouble calls within a 96-hour period; and there shall be no failure of any component that causes the elevator to be out of service for more than 24 consecutive hours during the 30 day observation period (the “Elevator Performance Condition”). If at the end of the 30 day observation period, the elevator has operated as provided above, then “Elevator Performance Condition” shall be deemed satisfied. However, if at any time during the 30 day observation period the elevator does not meet the Elevator Performance Condition, Metro shall provide Contractor with written or electronic notice of the elevator’s failure and a request for immediate repair and written confirmation of the repair. Once the repairs are made, the 30 day observation period shall reset and the repaired elevator must then meet the Elevator Performance Conditions in the next 30 days. This process shall be repeated until the Elevator Performance Condition has been met.

1.12 SPARE PARTS AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS

A. Refer to Section 01 78 43, Spare Parts, Illustrated Parts Catalog, and Replacement Materials for general requirements.

B. Contractor shall deliver to Metro’s designated location, the following expendable (spare) parts for each elevator. Parts shall become Metro’s property. Parts may be used by the Contractor for maintenance but shall be restocked within two weeks of their use at no additional cost to Metro. Parts shall be delivered prior to Final Acceptance of the elevators.

1. One spare pump

2. One set of belts for pump to motor

3. One set jack packing

4. One door operator motor

5. One set of door operator belts



6. One set of door operator rectifiers, each kind

7. Six control relays, each size

8. One motor starter contact kit

9. One motor starter

10. One set motor starter overloads

11. One hoist way door interlock

12. Six interlock rollers

13. Six car door hanger rollers

14. One complete set of electronic printed circuit boards for each type on controller and door operator

15. One diagnostic service tool – microprocessor systems

16. Four rollers for roller guides

17. Three sets of each car and hall button assemblies

1.13 WARRANTIES

A. Material and workmanship of installation shall comply in every respect with Contract Documents. Correct defective material or workmanship which develops within one year from date of final acceptance of Work to satisfaction of Metro or its designee at no additional cost, unless due to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care by Metro. Perform preventive maintenance and include cost of 24-hour emergency callback service during warranty period.

1.14 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Compliance with Regulatory Agencies: Comply with most stringent applicable provisions of following Codes, laws, and Authorities having jurisdiction, including revisions and changes in effect:

1. Requirements of CCR, Title 19 and 24, and other Codes, Ordinances and Laws applicable within governing jurisdiction.

2. Local Fire Authorities

3. Metro Rules and Regulations

4. Accessibility requirements of FTA and ADA Standards.

1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. After Metro approval and prior to beginning of acceptance testing, three final hard copy sets of the approved manuals and one electronic copy shall be provided to Metro by the Contractor. The manuals are due no more than 30 days after substantial completion and shall include the following:

1. Complete Table of Contents

2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of equipment. Included will be complete illustrated, exploded views of all assemblies, and a complete, illustrated, exploded view for identifying all system parts.



3. Complete nomenclature, lead time and location of replaceable parts, Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) and installer part numbers, current cost, and source. If product source is another vendor, contractor shall include name and address of other vendor.

4. Copies of approved preventive maintenance plan.

5. Descriptions of safety devices.

6. Safety rules, tests, and procedures, including testing of all systems and subsystems.

7. Troubleshooting techniques.

8. Detailed lubrication and cleaning schedule indicating weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual lubrication; and a description of each lubrication point, lubrication type, and specification.

9. Comprehensive list of error and fault codes with explanation of the fault and procedures to resolve the problem.

B. As-built drawings shall include:

1. Control and schematic electrical wiring diagrams of controller, including wiring of safety devices to connections with remote indication and control panels for each elevator and group of elevators.

2. Electrical layout showing placement of lighting, light switches, receptacles, light fixtures, disconnect switches, and convenience outlets in machinery room and pits.

3. Complete detailed drawings and wiring diagram of elevator fault finding device and connection to annunciator panel.

4. Electronic and hard copies of ladder diagrams, logic and program.

C. Certification

1. The OEM shall provide certification that Metro or its designee has been provided with copies of all documents related to maintenance, safety, operations, design changes, modifications, retrofits, and like items, which relate to any part, component, equipment, system, subsystem, or material and services applicable to the elevator provided.

2. All of the above referenced shall be provided by the installer as it pertains to the original installation through the end of the warranty period.

3. The referenced material shall be provided within thirty (30) days of publication or internal distribution by the OEM. The material, even if labeled PROPRIETARY, shall be delivered to Metro or its designee without prejudice or delay and at no additional cost.

D. Electronic Material:

1. Provide all material on CD-ROM in a format approved by Metro. Submit Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and product data sheets with an index listing each product, along with the application method of the product, approximate quantity of product per elevator, and the component the product is applied to or associated with. Allow six weeks for review of SDS by Metro or its designee.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PASSENGER ELEVATORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Alternate Manufacturers must receive approval of Metro or its designee.

1. Hydraulic Elevators: CEMCOlift Elevator Systems, Fujitec, KONE, Minnesota Elevator, Mitsubishi, Otis, Schindler, ThyssenKrupp,.

2. Car Enclosure: City Lift, Eklund's Inc., Forms + Surfaces, Fujitec, Globe Architectural Metal, Gunderlin, Ltd., Hauenstein & Burmeister, KONE, Mitsubishi, Otis, Schindler, Sterling, ThyssenKrupp, Travertine, Tyler Gunderlin, Winter and Bain.

3. Hoistway Entrance: Fujitec, Hauenstein & Burmeister, KONE, Mitsubishi, Otis, Schindler, Swiss Dane, ThyssenKrupp, Tyler, Winter and Bain, Gunderlin.

B. Hydraulic Elevator(s):

NUMBER: CAR NUMBERS AS INDICATED

CAPACITY: 3,500 lbs PER ASME A17.1

CLASS LOADING: PASSENGER

CONTRACT SPEED: 150 FPM

MACHINE: HYDRAULIC PUMP

MACHINE LOCATION: REFER TO CONTRACT DRAWINGS

OPERATIONAL CONTROL: SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM, NON-PROPRIETARY

MOTOR CONTROL: SINGLE SPEED AC WITH SCR SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE START

POWER CHARACTERISTICS: 480 VOLTS, 3 PHASE, 60 HERTZ (VERIFY)

STOPS: PER CONTRACT DRAWINGS

OPENINGS: PER CONTRACT DRAWINGS

FLOORS SERVED: PER CONTRACT DRAWINGS

TRAVEL: PER CONTRACT DRAWINGS

PLATFORM SIZE: PER CONTRACT DRAWINGS

MINIMUM CLEAR INSIDE CAR: PER CONTRACT DRAWINGS

ENTRANCE SIZE: MINIMUM 42” WIDE X 84” HIGH

ENTRANCE TYPE: SINGLE SPEED, CENTER OPENING

DOOR OPERATION: HIGH SPEED, HEAVY-DUTY, DOOR OPERATOR, MINIMUM OPENING SPEED 2-1/2 FEET PER SECOND (F.P.S.) GAL-MOVFRW (ALL FEROUS MATERIAL ZINC PLATED)

DOOR PROTECTION: THREE DIMENSIONAL INFRARED, FULL SCREEN DEVICE, WITH DIFFERENTIAL TIMING, NUDGING AND INTERRUPTED BEAM TIME



HYDRAULIC TYPE: DIRECT PLUNGER

GUIDE RAILS: PLANED STEEL TEES

BUFFERS: SPRING

CAR ENCLOSURE: CUSTOM CAR WALLS AS SPECIFIED AND AS DETAILED ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS

CAR INTERIOR FINISHES PROVIDED UNDER THIS SECTION

8'-0" CLEAR HEIGHT UNDER CANOPY

CAR DOOR INTERLOCK TO DELETE NEED FOR HOISTWAY FASCIA IF FRONT HOISTWAY WALL IS GLASS TO MEET CODE REQUIREMENTS. OTHERWISE PROVIDE PAINTED OR STAINLESS STEEL HOISTWAY FASCIA LINING.

BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY CAR LIGHTING. PROVIDE SEPARATE CONSTANT PRESSURE TEST BUTTON IN CAR SERVICE PANEL COMPARTMENT. ILLUMINATE PORTION OF NORMAL CAR LIGHTING

SIGNAL FIXTURES: LED ILLUMINATION

CUSTOM DESIGN

VANDAL RESISTANT ASSEMBLY.

HALL AND CAR PUSHBUTTON SINGLE HALL PUSHBUTTON RISER CAR

STATIONS: OPERATING PANEL WITH FLUSH HAIRLINE FIRE SERVICE OPERATION AND SERVICE CABINET DOORS.OPERATING PERMIT BEHIND FLUSH LENS IN SERVICE CABINET DOOR

VANDAL RESISTANT CAR AND HALL PUSHBUTTONS.

POSITION INDICATOR: CAR MULTI-LIGHT VANDAL RESISTANT WITH DIRECTION ARROWS AND LED ILLUMINATION, TRANSOM MOUNTED.

SECURITY CONTROL PANEL, (IF REQUIRED)

FIREFIGHTERS’ CONTROL PANEL, (IF REQUIRED)

HALL LANTERNS: AT FLOORS WITH VOLUME ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC CHIME OR TONE. SOUND TWICE FOR DOWN DIRECTION. VANDAL RESISTANT ASSEMBLY.

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: COMPLY WITH CODE AND METRO REQUIREMENTS FOR REMOTE CONTROL

SELF-DIALING, VANDAL RESISTANT, PUSH TO CALL, TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH RECALL, TRACKING AND VOICELESS



COMMUNICATION PER METRO REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE METRO STANDARD MODEL T2100 PHONE OR APPROVED EQUAL

ADDITIONAL FEATURES: CAR ROLLER GUIDES

CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION.

FIREFIGHTERS’ SERVICE PHASE I AND II, INCLUDING ALTERNATE FLOOR RETURN.

KEY TO MATCH EXISTING ELEVATORS IN METRO FACILITIES

STANDBY POWER TRANSFER (AUTOMATIC TO DESIGNATED FLOOR) WITH STATUS INDICATORS IN FIREFIGHTERS' CONTROL PANEL (IF STANDBY POWER AVAILABLE)

BATTERY LOWERING OPERATION (IF STANDBY POWER NOT AVAILABLE)

ACCESSIBILITY AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES SIGNAGE. ELEVATOR IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE

ELEVATOR IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE AT DESIGNATED FLOOR ENTRANCE PER CODE AND METRO REQUIREMENTS

STATIONARY CAR RETURN PANEL WITH SWING SECTION ARRANGED FOR INTEGRAL CAR OPERATING PANEL. STATIONARY AUXILLIARY PANEL ARRANGED TO ACCEPT METRO APPROVED FLUSH MOUNTED TELEPHONE/ COMMUNICATION INSTRUMENT WITH FACEPLATE

HOISTWAY ACCESS SWITCHES TOP AND BOTTOM FLOORS. KEYSWITCH TO MATCH OTHER ELEVATORS IN METRO FACILITIES.

PLATFORM ISOLATION, JACK TO PLATEN CONNECTION

INDEPENDENT SERVICE FEATURE

CCTV PROVISIONS AND ASSISTANCE WITH INSTALLATION BY OTHER CONTRACTOR

METRO INTERFACE PANEL AND REMOTE WIRING

FIREFIGHTERS’ CONTROL PANEL AND REMOTE WIRING (AS REQUIRED)

HYDRAULIC PUMP UNIT AND CONTROLLER SOUND ISOLATION



TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS FOR FASTENINGS EXPOSED TO THE PUBLIC

ONE YEAR WARRANTY MAINTENANCE WITH 24-HOUR CALL-BACK SERVICE. PROVIDE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST

FIREFIGHTERS’ TELEPHONE JACK (IF REQUIRED)

EMERGENCY PAGING SPEAKER INSTALLATION

SEISMIC SAFETY VALVE

COMPONENT ENCLOSURES, FIXTURES, SWITCHES, CONDUIT, FITTINGS.

JACK HOLE, OUTER STEEL CASING WITH HDPE LINER AND WATERTIGHT PVC INNER CASING

WATERTIGHT PVC SLEEVE FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING

SEISMIC DEVICES

SIGNAGE ENGRAVING FILLED WITH BLACK PAINT PER CODE AND METRO REQUIREMENTS

NO VISIBLE COMPANY NAME OR LOGO

WIRING DIAGRAMS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MEANS AND INSTRUCTIONS

NON-PROPRIETARY CONTROL SYSTEM AND DIAGNOSTICS PROVISIONS

ALL KEYED SWITCHES TO MATCH EXISTING METRO ELEVATORS.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. Sheet Steel for Exposed Work: Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1008, matte finish.

2. Sheet Steel for Unexposed Work: Hot-rolled, commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A568.

3. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Type 316 complying with ASTM A240, with standard tempers and hardness required for fabrication, strength and durability. Apply mechanical finish on fabricated work in the locations shown or specified, complying with NAAMM



finish nomenclature, with texture and reflectivity required to match Metro’s sample. Protect with adhesive paper covering.

2. Satin No. 4 finish: Graining directions as shown or, if not shown, in longest dimension.

3. Textured: 5WL as manufactured by Rigidized Metals Corporation, or equivalent as manufactured by Rimex Metals Group, or approved equivalent, with 0.050 inches mean pattern depth with Satin No. 4 finish.

4. Burnished: Non-directional, random abrasion pattern.

C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.

D. Nickel Silver: ASTM B151 extrusion, alloy UNS #C74500, polished finish.

E. Trademarks – Do not display manufacturer’s name, logo or trademark on exposed surfaces of materials and components visible to passengers.

F. Paint: Clean exposed metal parts and assemblies of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter and factory paint one shop coat of standard rust-resistant primer conforming to requirements of Section 09 91 00 - Painting. After erection, apply one finish coat of industrial enamel paint conforming to requirements of 09 91 00 - Painting. Galvanized metal need not be painted.

G. Prime Finish: Clean metal surfaces specified to receive baked enamel paint finish, of oil, grease, and scale. Apply one coat of rust-resistant primer conforming to requirements of Section 09 91 00 - Painting, followed by a filler coat over uneven surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of primer.

H. Baked Enamel Finish: Prime finish per above. Unless specified “prime finish” only, apply and bake three additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color, conforming to requirements of Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

I. Glass: Laminated safety glass, minimum 9/16" thick, conforming to ANSI Z97.1, ASME A17.1, CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201, and ASTM C1172.

J. Anti-Graffiti Film: Apply to exposed glass surfaces. Water based, clear, non-sacrificial film forming, non-glossy, non-darkening, non-yellowing, non-flammable, non-toxic, coating. Meet SCAQMD VOC equivalent.

K. Wiring and Electrical Interconnections – Comply with governing codes. Insulated wiring – flame retardant and moisture proof outer covering, and run in conduit, tubing or electrical wireways.

2.03 CAR AND GROUP PERFORMANCE

A. Car Speed: ± 10% of contract speed under any loading condition.

B. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold 125% of rated load.

C. Car Stopping Zone: ±1/4" under any loading condition.

D. Door Opening Time: 2.2 Seconds from start of opening to fully open.

E. Door Closing Time: 2.7 Seconds from start of closing to fully closed.

F. Car Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: 16.2 Seconds from start of doors closing until doors are 3/4 open (1/2 open for side opening doors) and car level and stopped at



next successive floor under any loading condition or travel direction (20 feet typical, floor height).

G. Pressure: Fluid system components shall be designed and factory tested for 500 lbs./sq. in. Maximum operating pressure shall be 400 lbs./sq. in.

H. Car Ride Quality:

1. Horizontal acceleration within car during riding and door operating conditions. Not more than 15 mg peak to peak (adjacent peaks) in the 1 - 10 Hz range.

2. Acceleration and Deceleration: Smooth constant and not more than 3 feet/second² with an initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second.

3. Sustained Jerk: Not more than 8 feet/second³.

I. Noise and Vibration Control:

1. Airborne Noise: Measured noise level of elevator equipment during operation shall not exceed 50 dBA in elevator lobbies and 60 dBA inside car under any condition including door operation and car ventilation exhaust blower on its highest speed.

2. Vibration Control: Elevator equipment provided under this contract, including power unit, controller, oil supply lines and their support shall be mechanically isolated from the building structure and electrically isolated from the building power supply and to each other to minimize the possibility of objectionable noise and vibrations being transmitted to occupied areas of the building.

3. Mechanically isolate elevator equipment (including machines, solid-state components, AC conversion units, and support equipment) from structure and electrically isolate from building power supply and each other to prevent noise and vibration in occupied areas of building.

2.04 OPERATION

A. Selective Collective Microprocessor Based: Operate car without attendant from pushbuttons in car and located at each floor. When car is available, automatically start car and dispatch it to floor corresponding to registered car or hall call. Once car starts, respond to registered calls in direction of travel.

1. Do not reverse car direction until car call has been answered, or until hall call ahead of car.

2. Slow car and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls, in the order in which they are approached in either direction of travel. As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, automatically cancel hall call. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Hold car at arrival floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer.

3. Illuminate appropriate pushbutton to indicate call registration. Extinguish light when call is answered.

B. Other Items:

1. Low Oil Control: In the event oil level is insufficient for travel to the top floor, provide controls to return elevator to the main level and park until oil is added.



2. Independent Service: Provide controls for operation of each car from its pushbuttons only. Close doors by constant pressure on desired destination floor button or door close button. Open doors automatically upon arrival at selected floor.

C. Firefighters’ Service: Provide equipment and operation in accordance with Code requirements of ASME A17.1 and CCR Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 6.

D. Automatic Car Stopping Zone: Stop car within 1/4 inch above or below the landing sill. Maintain stopping zone regardless of load in car, direction of travel or distance between landings.

E. Passenger Door Operation: Automatically open doors when car arrives at main floor. At expiration of normal dwell time, close doors.

F. Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each controller with standard ports, interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault finding diagnostic, monitoring computers, keyboards, modems and programming tools. The system shall be capable of driving remote color CRT monitor(s) that continually scan and display the status of each car and call.

1. Metro’s Remote Monitoring System: Provide on-site and remote monitoring and diagnostic capability. Display status of each elevator and each registered call at ROC/BOC.

G. Motion Control: AC type with unit valve suitable for operation specified and capable of providing smooth, comfortable car acceleration and retardation. Limit the difference in car speed between full load and no load to not more than ±10% of the contract speed in either direction of travel. Provide closed transition SCR soft start.

H. Metro’s Remote Monitoring System: Provide the means via remote control panel key switch for each elevator to return to a designated floor. Return elevator nonstop after answering registered car call and parking with doors closed until reset to normal operation.

I. Standby Power Operation (If Standby Power is available): Upon loss of normal power, adequate standby power will be supplied via building electrical feeders to simultaneously start and run each car at contract car speed and capacity.

1. Automatically return each car, nonstop to designated floor, open doors for approximately 3.0 seconds, close doors and park car. During return operation, car and hall call pushbuttons shall be rendered inoperative. After car completes designated floor return, system shall immediately select car to start and run upon demand.

2. Provide “Standby Power” indicator lights (one per car) in firefighters’ control panel and at main floor landing or as directed by Metro. Indicator light illuminates when corresponding car is selected to operate on standby power.

J. Battery Standby Power Transfer (If standby power is not available): Upon loss of normal power, provide controls to automatically lower the car(s) nonstop to the lowest landing. Upon arrival at the lowest landing, the elevator doors shall open automatically and remain open until regular door time has expired. The elevator shall then become deactivated. The standby power source shall be provided via 12-volt D.C. battery units installed in machine room, including solid-state charger and testing



means mounted in a common metal container. Battery to be rechargeable lead acid or nickel cadmium with a 10-year life expectancy.

K. Upon restoration of normal power, the elevator shall automatically resume normal operation.

L. Emergency Features:

1. Emergency operation: Equip elevators with control system to operate and recall elevators to a designated or alternate designated floor in fire or other emergency condition. Provide terminals on controller for connection of signal from sensors provided under other Sections of Work. Operation - Similar on all elevators and operate visual/audible signal until return is complete or automatic operation restored. This mode of operation, when activated manually or automatically - Override other operations except car top operation.

2. Standby lighting and alarm: During power failure, supply car lighting, car alarm, and exhaust blower with standby power over same feeders supplying normal power to elevator controllers. In addition, provide car mounted battery unit to operate alarm bell and lighting only. Include solid-state charger and testing means enclosed in common metal container. Battery - Rechargeable lead acid or nickel cadmium with 10-year minimum life expectancy.

3. Elevator-to-lobby switches: Provide switch for each elevator in central control panel to return cars to secure floor. Activating switch - Return elevator to lobby level non-stop after answering preregistered car calls and park with doors open until switch is returned to normal position.

4. Car sound powered emergency telephone jacks and emergency paging speakers - Provide sound powered emergency telephone jack in elevator cars and in fire control room panel. Provide shielded wires from each jack to each elevator controller in elevator machine room. Provide emergency paging speakers on board each elevator. Provide pair of shielded wires from each speaker to each controller in elevator machine room.

2.05 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT

A. Arrange equipment in spaces shown on drawings.

B. Pump Unit: Assembled unit consisting of dry type positive displacement pump, induction motor, master-type control valves combining safety features, holding, direction, bypass, stopping, manual lowering functions, shut off valve, oil reservoir with protected vent opening, oil level gauge, outlet strainer, drip pan, muffler, mounted on isolating pads. Provide external oil cooling unit or comparable means to maintain oil at operating temperature. Enclose entire unit with removable sheet steel panels lined with sound-absorbing material. Provide SCR soft start with closed transition. Design unit for a minimum of 120 upstarts per hour.

C. Landing System: Solid-state, optical, digital type.

D. Controller: UL/CSA labeled.

1. Compartment: Securely mount assemblies, power supplies, chassis switches, relays, on a substantial, self-supporting steel frame. Completely enclose equipment with covers. Provide means to prevent overheating.



2. Relay Design: Magnet operated with contacts of design and material to insure maximum conductivity, long life and reliable operation without overheating or excessive wear. Provide wiping action and means to prevent sticking due to fusion. Contacts carrying high inductive currents shall be provided with arc deflectors or suppressors.

3. Microprocessor-Related Hardware:

a. Provide built-in noise suppression devices which provide a high level of noise immunity on solid-state hardware and devices.

b. Provide power supplies with noise suppression devices.

c. Isolate inputs from external devices (such as pushbuttons) with opto-isolation modules.

d. Design control circuits with one leg of power supply grounded.

e. Safety circuits shall not be affected by accidental grounding of any part of the system.

f. System shall automatically restart when power is restored.

g. System memory shall be retained in the event of power failure or disturbance.

h. Equipment shall be provided with Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) shielding within FCC guidelines.

4. Wiring: CSA labeled copper for factory wiring. Neatly route wiring interconnections and securely attach wiring connections to studs or terminals.

5. Permanently mark components (relays, fuses, PC boards,) with symbols shown on wiring diagrams.

6. Monitoring System Interface: Provide controller with serial data link through RJ45 Ethernet connection and install all devices necessary to monitor items outlined in Section 2.13. Elevator contractor is responsible to connect monitoring system interface to control room monitoring compartment and LAN. Wiring from the LAN to the control room monitoring compartment by others.

7. Provide controller or machine mounted auxiliary, lockable “open” disconnect if mainline disconnect is not in sight of controller and/or machine.

E. Muffler: Provide in discharge oil line near pump unit. Design shall dampen and absorb pulsation and noise in the flow of hydraulic fluid and meet the requirements of Item 2.05 H.

F. Piping and Oil: Provide piping, connections and oil for the system. Buried piping (if required) shall be secondarily contained with watertight Schedule 40 PVC sleeves between elevator machine room and pit. A minimum of two sound isolation couplings shall be provided between the pump unit and oil line and the oil line and jack unit. Provide isolated pipe stands or hangers as required.

G. Noise/Vibration Isolation: Elevator equipment provided under this contract including power unit, controller, oil supply liners and their supports and fastenings electrically isolated from building, shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the building structure and main line power feeders, building power supply and each other to



minimize objectionable noise and vibration transmission to car, building structure, or adjacent occupied areas of building.

H. Sound Isolation:

1. Limit noise level in the machine room relating to elevator equipment and its operation to no more than 80 dBA.

2. Take dBA readings three feet off the floor and three feet from the equipment using the “A” weighted scale.

2.06 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT

A. Guide Rails: Planed steel T-sections for car of suitable size and weight for the application, including seismic reactions, including brackets for attachment to building structure. Provide rail backing to meet Code requirements, if required. Provide bracketing, at top and bottom of floor beams, if required. No additional structural points of rail attachment, other than those shown on the Contract Documents, will be provided.

B. Buffers: Spring type with blocking and support channels.

C. Hydraulic Jack Assembly:

1. Cylinder: Seamless steel pipe. Design head to receive unit-type packing and provide means to collect oil at cylinder head and return automatically to oil reservoir. Provide scavenger pump to return oil to the oil reservoir in the machine room. Provide secondary containment/cylinder protection.

2. Plunger: Polished seamless steel tubing or pipe. If plunger length exceeds 24 feet, provide two or more sections not exceeding 16 feet in length, or coordinate installation of longer unit at the jobsite. Join sections by internal threaded couplings. Multiple section jack units shall be factory polished while assembled and marked for proper future reassembly. Isolate plunger from car frame.

D. Jack Support and Fluid Shut-Off Valves: Provide steel pit channels to support jack assembly and transmit loads to building structure. Provide intermediate stabilizers as required. Provide manual on/off valve in oil line adjacent to pump unit and jack unit in pit adjacent to jack unit.

E. Well Hole Casing:

1. Well hole is to be provided by Elevator Contractor. No additional compensation will be allowed for unforeseen conditions of any kind or spoil removal.

2. Install outer steel casing and HDPE liner per structural standard drawing SS-037. Install watertight PVC inner casing over jack assembly for secondary containment prior to insertion into the outer casing. Extend PVC inner casing through pit floor slab to underside of jack support beams and seal with non-permeable membrane. Inside diameter of PVC inner casing shall be capable of containing 110% of system fluid capacity. Seal well opening at the pit floor with hydraulic quick setting cement. Provide PVC vision/access ports.

F. Overspeed Valve(s): Provide a pressure sensitive, mechanically-actuated seismic safety valve, conforming to ASME A17.1. Connect valve directly to jack assembly inlet.

G. Terminal Stopping: Provide normal and final devices.



H. Electrical Wiring and Wiring Connections:

1. Conductors and Connections: Copper throughout with individual wires coded and connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splices or similar connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control compartments, or junction boxes. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Run spare wires from car connection points to individual elevator controllers in the machine room. Provide eight pairs of spare shielded communication wires in addition to those required to connect specified items. Tag spares in machine room.

2. Conduit: Galvanized steel threaded rigid conduit, or duct. Conduit size, 3/4" minimum. Flexible heavy-duty service cord may be used between fixed car wiring and car door switches for door protective devices.

3. Traveling Cables: Type ET Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Prevent traveling cable from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or equipment within hoistway. Provide two RG-59 coaxial CCTV cables within traveling cable from car controller to car top, plus 3'-0" excess loop at both ends. Provide two pair 14 gauge wire for CCTV power.

4. Auxiliary Wiring: Connect fire alarm initiating devices, emergency two-way communication system, firefighters’ control panel (if required), paging speaker, CCTV, intercom, and announcement speaker and Metro Remote Monitoring/Control devices in each car controller or designated point in machine room.

I. Entrance Equipment:

1. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment.

2. Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel tracks with smooth roller contact surface.

3. Door Interlocks: Operable without retiring cam. Paint interlock box flat black.

4. Door Closers: Spring, spirator or jamb/strut mounted counterweight type. Design and adjust to insure smooth, quiet mechanical close of doors.

5. Hoistway Access Switches: Mount in wall at top and bottom floor. Provide switch with faceplate. Key to match existing elevators in the station.

J. Floor Numbers: Stencil paint 4 inch high floor designations in contrasting color on inside face of hoistway doors or hoistway fascia in location visible from within car.

2.07 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Complete entrances bearing fire labels from a nationally recognized testing laboratory approved within the governing jurisdiction.

B. Frames: Provide 14 gauge steel hollow metal at floors. Bolted and lapped head to jamb assembly. Provide Arabic floor designation/Braille plates, centered at 60" above finished floor, on both side jambs of entrances. Floor designation shall be a minimum of 2" and on a contrasting background. Provide plates at main egress landing with “Star” designation. For designated emergency car, provide “Star of Life” designation plates at height of 78" – 84" above finished floor on both side jambs at floors. Braille indications shall be below Arabic floor designation. Provide cast floor



designation/Braille plates as manufactured by SCS, Vision Mark, Entrada or approved equivalent.

C. Transom Panels: Sheet, offset labeled. Same construction and finish as hoistway door panels. Refer to Contract Drawings.

D. Door Panels: 16 gauge steel, sandwich construction without binder angles. Provide leading edges of doors with rubber astragals. Provide a minimum of three gibs per panel, one at leading and one at trailing edge with gibs in the sill groove entire length of door travel. Construct door panels with interlocking, steel stiffening ribs. Provide high doors if necessary to keep door related equipment from being exposed to view.

E. Sight Guards: Provide 14 gauge, same material and finish as hoistway entrance door panels. Construct without sharp edges.

F. Sills: Extruded nickel silver.

G. Sill Supports: Formed steel designed to support door sill based upon car loading classification. Mount to eliminate need for grout under the sill. Provide 5 inch x 5 inch x 1/2 inch stainless steel angle, extending full width of hoistway. Fasten to building structure at maximum 18 inches on center.

H. Fascia, Toe Guards and Hanger Covers: Provide 14 gauge painted or stainless steel. Provide car door interlock in order to negate the need for front fascia for express hoistway travel if glass front hoistway wall is provided. Otherwise, provide 14 gauge painted or stainless steel front fascia on the hoistway wall. Provide hoistway toe guards, and hanger covers. Fascia above entrance shall be beveled to front hoistway wall at 75 degrees.

I. Struts and Headers: Provide for vertical support of entrances and related material. Provide door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts.

J. Finish of Frames and Doors:

1. Frames: Per Contract Drawings.

2. Door Panels: Per Contract Drawings.

2.08 CAR EQUIPMENT

A. Frame: Welded or bolted, rolled or formed steel channel construction to meet load classification specified.

B. Platform: Isolated type, constructed of steel.

C. Platform Apron: Minimum 14 gauge painted or stainless steel, reinforced and braced to car platform. Stencil car number on apron.

D. Guide Shoes: Roller type with three or more spring dampened, sound-deadening rollers per shoe. Maximum roller rotation speed, 350 revolutions per minute (rpm).

E. Finish Floor Covering:

1. Per contract drawings. Finished floor shall not be of carpet or ceramic tile or other brittle material.

F. Sills: One piece extrusion nickel silver with extruded extension between car entrance columns to face of car front return. Extruded extension to match finish of sill.



G. Doors: Provide as specified for hoistway entrance doors, including glass door panels. Apply anti-graffiti protection film if glass panels are used.

H. Door Hangers: Two-point hanger roller with neoprene roller surface and suspension with eccentric upthrust roller adjustment.

I. Door Track: Bar or formed, cold-drawn removable steel track with smooth roller contact surface.

J. Door Header: Construct of minimum 12 gauge steel, shape to provide stiffening flanges.

K. Door Electrical Contact: Prohibit car operation unless car door is closed.

L. Door Interlock: Provide door interlock to negate the need to provide hoistway fascia, as allowed by ASME A17.1 and CCR Title 8.

M. Door Clutch: Heavy-duty clutch, linkage arms, drive blocks and pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operation. Design clutch so car doors can be closed, while hoistway doors remain open. Clutches and pick-up rollers, shall not be visible through glass door panels if glass doors are installed.

N. Restricted Opening Device: Restrict opening of car doors outside unlocking zone.

O. Door Operator: High speed, heavy-duty door operator capable of opening doors at no less than 2-1/2 feet per second (f.p.s.). Accomplish reversal in no more than 2-1/2 inches of door movement. Provide solid-state door control with closed loop circuitry to constantly monitor and automatically adjust door operation based upon velocity, position, and motor current. Maintain consistent, smooth and quiet door operation at floors, regardless of door weight or varying air pressure.

P. Acceptable closed-loop door operators:

1. G.A.L.: MOVFR or approved equivalent.

Q. Door Control Device:

1. Infrared Reopening Device: Black, fully enclosed device with three dimensional full screen infrared matrix or multiple beams extending vertically along leading edge of each door panel to minimum height of 7'-0" above finished floor. Device shall prevent doors from closing and reverse doors at normal opening speed if beams are obstructed while doors are closing, except during nudging operation. In event of device failure, provide for automatic shutdown of car at floor level with doors open. Device shall be of weather resistant construction. Provide a one-piece full door height protective lens cover designed to be completely waterproof and to withstand impact, abrasion and vandalism.

2. Nudging Operation: After beams of door control device are obstructed for a predetermined time interval (minimum 20.0 - 25.0 seconds), warning signal shall sound and doors shall attempt to close with a maximum of 2.5 foot pounds kinetic energy. Activation of the door open button shall override nudging operation and reopen doors.

3. Interrupted Beam Time: When beams are interrupted during initial door opening, hold door open a minimum of 3.0 seconds. When beams are interrupted after the initial 3.0 second hold open time, reduce time doors remain open to an



adjustable time of approximately 1.0 - 1.5 seconds after beams are reestablished.

4. Differential Door Time: Provide separately adjustable timers to vary time that doors remain open after stopping in response to calls.

a. Car Call: Hold open time adjustable between 3.0 and 5.0 seconds.

b. Hall Call: Hold open time adjustable between 5.0 and 8.0 seconds. Use hall call time when car responds to coincidental calls.

R. Car Operating Panel:

1. One car operating panel without faceplate, consisting of a metal box containing vandal resistant operating fixtures, mounted behind the car enclosure front return panel. Provide stationary front return with integral swing panel. Fire Service and Service Cabinet doors to be hairline flush fit.

2. Suitably identify floor buttons, alarm button, door open button, door close button and emergency push-to-call button with SCS, Visionmark, Entrada or approved equivalent cast tactile symbols rear mounted. Configure plates per local building Code accessibility standards including Braille. Locate operating controls no higher than 48 inches above the car floor; no lower than 35 inches for emergency push-to-call button and alarm button. Braille plates shall include 5/8 inch floor designation with Braille located immediately below the floor designation. Spacing between floor buttons and Braille plates shall be a minimum of 3/8 inch. The raised floor designations shall be white on a black background. The call button for the main entry floor shall be designated by a raised star at the left of the floor designation.

3. Provide minimum 3/4 inch diameter raised floor pushbuttons, vandal resistant type which illuminate to indicate call registration.

4. Provide alarm button to ring bell located on car, and sound distress signal at Metro Remote control panel. Illuminate button when actuated.

5. Provide keyed stop switch (EPCO-1 key) in locked service cabinet. Mark device to indicate "run" and "stop" positions.

6. Provide “door open” button to stop and reopen doors or hold doors in open position.

7. Provide “door close” button to activate door close cycle. Cycle shall not begin until normal door dwell time for a car or hall call has expired, except firefighters’ operation.

8. Provide firefighters’ Phase II key switch in locked Phase II compartment with engraved instructions filled red. Key shall match Innovation #EX515. Include light jewel, buzzer, manual stop switch, and call cancel button.

9. Install firefighters’ telephone jack with approved mounting. (If required)

10. Provide lockable service compartment with recessed flush door located a minimum of 36 inches above the finished floor. Door material and finish shall match car return panel or car operating panel faceplate. Inside surface of door shall contain an integral flush window for displaying the elevator operating permit.



11. Include the following controls in lockable service cabinet with function and operating positions identified by permanent signage or engraved legend:

a. Inspection switch.

b. Light switch.

c. Two Speed Blower. Three-position exhaust blower switch.

d. Independent service switch.

e. Constant pressure test button for battery pack emergency lighting.

f. 120-volt, AC, GFCI protected electrical convenience outlet.

g. Stop switch.

h. Switch to select either floor voice annunciation, floor passing tone, or chime.

12. Provide black paint filled (except as noted), engraved signage as follows with approved size and font:

a. Phase II firefighters’ operating instructions on inside face of Phase II compartment door, filled red.

b. Car number over main and auxiliary car operating panel.

c. 3/16 inch “Push for Alarm” and telephone usage instructions engraving. Per Metro requirements.

d. Car capacity in pounds and persons on main car operating panel.

e. “No Smoking” above main car operating panel.

S. Car Top Control Station: Mount to provide safe access and utilization while standing in an upright position on car top.

T. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: GFCI protected outlet at top and bottom of car. Include on/off switch and lamp guard. Provide additional GFCI protected outlet on car top for installation of car CCTV.

U. Communication System:

1. “Push to Call,” two-way communication instrument in car with automatic dialing, tracking and recall features with shielded wiring to car controller in machine room. Provide dialer with automatic rollover capability with minimum two numbers. Provide enclosure. Provide Model T2100 instrument or approved equal to be compatible with Metro system.

a. “Push to Call” button or adjacent light jewel shall illuminate and flash when call is acknowledged. Button shall match car operating panel pushbutton design. Provide uppercase "PUSH TO CALL." "HELP ON THE WAY" engraved signage adjacent to button.

b. Provide “Push to Call” button tactile symbol, engraved signage, and Braille adjacent to button mounted integral with car front return panel.

2. Public Address Speaker: Provide cab ceiling mounted speaker and wiring via the elevator travelling cable, originated from the speaker to the respective



controller in the elevator machine room for interconnection in accordance with the public address system.

3. Provide two-way communication between car and machine room if required.

2.09 CAR ENCLOSURE

A. Car Enclosure: Custom Cars per Contract Drawings consisting of:

1. Side and Rear Walls: Durable, graffiti resistant surfaces. No plastic laminate.

2. Glass (if used): Per ANSI-Z97.1, CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201, and ASTM C1172.

3. Canopy: Reinforced 12 gauge steel with escape hatch opening.

4. Ceiling: Per contract drawings. Emergency lighting shall be incorporated into the overhead lights.

5. Front Return, columns and transom: Stainless steel satin No. 4 finish.

6. Doors: Per contract drawings.

7. Handrail: Continuous 1-1/2 inch outside diameter (O.D.) round tube, stainless steel finish with wall mounted brackets. Return handrail ends to wall. Locate mounting brackets a maximum of 18 inches on center. Mount with backing plates and captive nuts.

8. Base and panel reveals: Stainless steel No. 4 satin finish, with vent slots.

9. Finish Flooring: Per contract drawings. No carpet, ceramic tile or other brittle materials.

10. Steel Pad buttons on front returns and walls, cars. One set of protective car pads.

2.10 LANDING CONTROL STATIONS

A. Pushbuttons: Provide one riser with flush mounted faceplates. Include pushbuttons for each direction of travel which illuminate to indicate call registration. Include approved engraved message and pictorial representation prohibiting use of elevator during fire or other emergency situation as part of faceplate. Pushbutton design shall match car operating panel pushbuttons. Provide vandal resistant pushbutton and light assemblies.

B. Faceplate Material and Finish: Stainless steel, Satin No. 4 finish.

C. Hoistway Access Switches – Mount in entrance frame side jamb at top terminals. Mount in entrance frame at bottom terminals where walk-in pits are not provided. Provide fixture with faceplate as detailed on architectural drawings of 11 gauge satin No. 4 finish, stainless steel.

2.11 SIGNALS

A. Hall Lantern: Provide fixture at each entrance to indicate travel direction of arriving car. Locate as detailed on architectural drawings. Illuminate up or down LED lights and sound tone once for up and twice for down direction prior to car arrival at floor. Sound level shall be adjustable from 20 - 80 dBA measured at 5'-0" in front of hall control station and 3'-0" off floor. Illuminate light until the car doors start to close. Provide advanced hall lantern notification to comply with ADA hall call notification time. Car direction lenses shall be arrow shaped with faceplates. Lenses shall be



minimum 2-1/2 inches in their smallest dimension. Provide vandal resistant lantern and light assemblies consisting of series of lines for maximum visibility.

B. Car Position Indicator: Multi-light indicator containing floor designations and direction arrows a minimum of two inches high to indicate floor served and direction of car travel. Locate fixture in transom above car entrance. When a car leaves or passes a floor, illuminate indication representing position of car in hoistway. Illuminate proper direction arrow to indicate direction of travel. Provide multi-numeral vandal resistant indicator and light assemblies.

C. Faceplate Material and Finish: 11 gauge stainless steel, Satin No. 4 finish.

D. Floor Passing Tone: Provide an audible tone of no less than 20 decibels and frequency of no higher than 1500 Hz, to sound as the car stops at a floor served.

E. Voice Synthesizer: Provide electronic device with easily reprogrammable message and female voice to announce car direction, floor, emergency exiting instructions and other standard messages. Comply with ADA requirements.

2.12 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL OF CAR OPERATION

A. Provide remote monitoring and control as directed by Metro

1. Provide remote control capabilities for both emergency and routine operation. Originate remote control from system central control and from station emergency management panels via the Metro Emergency Management Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Others to provide telephone line modem or Ethernet connection, conduit and wiring from elevator machine rooms to the ROC/BOC. Provide terminals in each elevator controller for the following functions:

a. Send to top floor control

b. Send to bottom floor control

c. Home elevator control (From Emergency Management Panel. Does not override fireman key switch operation). Elevator remains in the home position while contact is closed.

d. Top floor lockout control (disables top floor hall call only; cab remains operable)

e. Bottom floor lockout control

f. One trip control (Allows one hall call during a lockout. Times out in 5 minutes if no call)

g. Emergency service call indication

h. Bottom floor hall call indication

i. Top floor hall call indication

j. Car at top floor indication

k. Car at bottom floor indication

l. Car alarm button indication

m. Low oil indication



n. Trouble indication

2. Duplex Operation: Where elevators are indicated to be Duplex Operation individual control and indication for each car.

3. Electrical:

a. Elevator contractor shall coordinate with the contractor and appropriate trades in relation to the CCTV, communication systems, public address, smoke detectors, shunt trip breakers, power and cab lighting requirements.

b. All indication contacts shall have a minimum rating of 24 VDC at 2 amps.

c. All indication contacts shall be normally open.

d. Adjacent terminal block locations shall be assigned for each indication Common (C) and Normally Open (NO) contact. It shall be possible to insert a jumper bar to connect each common terminal.

e. Adjacent terminal block locations shall be assigned for each control. Each control shall be isolated and provide two terminals.

f. All controls shall be momentary contact closures and activate on rising edge of a minimum 250ms pulse with the exception of the HOME function which shall be active while the associated contact is closed.

g. Contractor supplied control voltage shall not exceed 24VDC and shall be current limited to 2 amps.

B. Firefighters’ Control Panel: (If required) Locate in building fire control room as shown on Contract drawings. Fixture faceplate, stainless steel Satin No. 4 finish, including the following features:

1. Car position and direction indicator (digital-readout or color SVGA display type). Identify each position indicator with car number.

2. Indicator showing operating status of car.

3. Manual car standby power selection switches and power status indicators. (If Required)

4. Two-position firefighters’ emergency return switches and indicators with engraved instructions filled red.

5. Firefighters’ telephone jack. (If Required)

C. Fixtures and monitor shall be located as directed by Metro. Where applicable, identify indicators and manual switches with appropriate engraving. Provide wiring to control panel. Coordinate size and location with Building Console Supplier.

D. Firefighters’ Key Box: Flush-mounted box with lockable hinged cover. Engrave instructions for use on cover per local Fire Authority requirements.

1. Firefighter keys to match existing Metro elevator keys or replace existing keys to match new elevator keys, to meet Code requirements.

2.13 ENHANCED ELEVATOR SYSTEM MONITORING

A. Elevator trouble indication shall alarm for any system trouble or for the enhanced monitoring described in this section.



B. The elevator controller shall activate the enhanced trouble alarm indication anytime a car is not detected to change to a valid floor position for 20 or more minutes when hall calls can normally be serviced.

C. The elevator controller shall clear the enhanced trouble alarm indication anytime a car successfully transitions to a valid floor position.

D. The elevator controller shall periodically and automatically call a car as required during periods of low activity to test the operation and prevent false trouble alarms while hall calls can normally be serviced.

2.14 ENHANCED REMOTE MONITORING

A. The elevator controller shall support Ethernet based monitoring for service maintenance personnel.

B. The monitoring shall not allow any remote control or configuration.

C. The monitoring shall provide detailed system status, diagnostic and performance information including event logs as required for efficient and effective preventive, predictive and unplanned maintenance.

D. The monitoring shall only require network connection and a standard web browser. No special client software shall be required.

E. It shall be possible to set a password to prevent unauthorized access.

F. The Contractor shall provide an industrial firewall (Phoenix Contact MGUARD-RS or Metro approved equivalent) to block all outside traffic except valid HTTP/HTTPS requests from authorized networks/clients.

G. Network connection and configuration will be performed by Metro.

2.15 SEISMIC OPERATIONS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Provide design, components and operation per governing Code and as specified.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION

A. Prior to beginning installation of equipment, examine hoistway and machine room areas. Verify that no irregularities exist which affect execution of Work specified. Particularly, note:

1. Hoistway size and plumbness.

2. Sill supports and pockets.

3. Support areas for brackets, beams, and like items.

4. Divider beams.

B. Do not proceed with installation until Work in place conforms to project requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions, referenced Codes, specification and approved submittals.

B. Install machine room equipment with clearances in accordance with referenced Codes and specification.



C. Install equipment so it may be easily removed for maintenance and repair.

D. Install equipment for ease of maintenance.

E. Install equipment to afford maximum accessibility, safety, and continuity of operation.

F. Provide elevator car enclosure as detailed on architectural Drawings and specified. Elevator Contractor - Supervise and coordinate drawings and materials specified, install cars, and be responsible for following:

1. Furnish and install electrical controls and signal fixtures, lighting fixtures, and wire complete. Provide minimum ten foot candle illumination at car sill with doors closed. Provide temporary lighting as required.

2. Furnish and install emergency lighting incorporated into the overhead lighting. Locate to provide minimum 0.2 foot candle illumination 12 inches in front of main car station measured 48 in. above finish floor.

3. Furnish and install on-board conduit and wiring to lighting and ventilating fixtures, as required.

4. Furnish and install hangers and gibs on car doors and hang doors.

5. Furnish and install car fixtures complete.

6. Furnish and install communication system as specified.

7. Furnish and install two-speed squirrel cage 350 cfm exhaust blower. Blower - Isolate from car steel canopy on rubber grommets.

8. Provide vent slots per ASME A17.1

G. Remove oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter from the following equipment and apply one coat of field-applied machinery enamel.

1. Exposed equipment and metal work installed as part of this work which does not have architectural finish.

2. Machine room equipment, hoistway equipment including guide rails, guide rail brackets, and pit equipment.

3. Neatly touch up damaged factory-painted surfaces with original paint color. Protect machine-finish surfaces against corrosion.

4. Equipment and metal work installed as part of this Work which does not have special architectural finish and is exposed in hoistway.

5. Machine, motor generator, controller and selector.

6. Machine surfaces – Protect machine finished surfaces against corrosion.

7. Natural metals – stretcher leveled, re-squared sheets 0.063 inch minimum for door facings, and 0.074 inch minimum for entrance frames and front returns. Run grain of belting in direction of longest dimension. Satin finish – remove tool and die marks and then finish with No. 80, 100, and 120 grit sanding belts. Surfaces – smooth and without oil canning.




A. Work will be checked during course of installation. Full cooperation with reviewing personnel is mandatory. Accomplish corrective work required prior to performing further installation.

B. Have governing code authority acceptance inspection performed and complete corrective work.

3.04 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Install hydraulic jack assembly and guide rails plumb and align vertically with tolerance of 1/16 inch in 100'-0". Secure guide rail joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface.

B. Statically balance car to equalize pressure of guide shoes on guide rails.

C. Lubricate equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Adjust motors, valves, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocks, and safety devices to achieve required performance levels.

E. Fabricate and assemble various parts in shop to greatest extent practicable; minimize field assembly. Parts which cannot be shop assembled and require close field fit – trial assemble in shop and mark for field erection.

3.05 CLEANUP

A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project. Remove packaging materials on a daily basis.

B. Remove loose materials and filings resulting from work.

C. Clean machine room equipment and floor. Paint machine room floor deck gray. Paint pit floor and walls deck gray.

D. Clean hoistways, car, car enclosure, entrances, operating and signal fixtures.

3.06 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTS

A. Manufacturer shall perform review and evaluation of every aspect of its Work prior to requesting Metro or its designee’s final review. Work shall be considered ready for Metro or its designee’s final contract compliance review when Manufacturer’s tests are complete and elements of Work or a designated portion thereof are in place and elevators are deemed ready for service as intended.

B. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for review. Notify Metro or its designee a minimum of five working days in advance when ready for final review of elevator or group.

C. Metro or its designee’s written list of observed deficiencies of materials, equipment and operating systems will be submitted to Manufacturer for corrective action. Metro or its designee’s review shall include as a minimum:

1. Workmanship and equipment compliance with Contract Documents.

2. Contract speed, capacity, floor-to-floor, and door performance--comply with Contract Documents.

3. Performance of following is satisfactory:

a. Starting, accelerating, running



b. Decelerating, stopping accuracy

c. Door operation and closing force

d. Equipment noise levels

e. Signal fixture utility

f. Overall ride quality

g. Performance of door control devices

h. Operations of emergency two-way communication device

i. Operations of firefighters' service

j. Operation of SCADA/remote monitoring interface signals

4. Test Results:

a. In test conditions, obtain specified contract speed, performance times, stopping accuracy without re-leveling, and ride quality to satisfaction of Purchaser and Consultant. Tests shall be conducted under both no load and full load condition.

b. Temperature rise in motor windings limited to 50° Celsius above ambient. A full-capacity, one hour running test, stopping at each floor for ten seconds in up and down directions, may be required.

D. Performance Guarantee: Should Metro or its designee’s review identify defects, poor workmanship, variance or noncompliance with requirements of specified Codes and/or ordinances, or variance or noncompliance with the requirements of Contract Documents, Manufacturer shall complete corrective work in an expedient manner to satisfaction of Metro or its designee at no cost as follows:

1. Replace equipment that does not meet Code or Contract Document requirements.

2. Perform work and furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary to meet specified operation and performance.

3. Perform retesting required by Governing Code Authority, Metro or its designee.

E. A follow-up final contract compliance review shall be performed by Metro after notification by Manufacturer that deficiencies have been corrected. Provide Metro with copies of the initial deficiency report marked to indicate items which Manufacturer considers complete. If additional reviews are required due to the Manufacturer’s gross non-compliance with initial and follow-up deficiency reports, Metro or its designee shall bill Manufacturer at normal billing rates plus expenses, and the Manufacturer acknowledges it will pay for additional compliance reviews.

3.07 PURCHASER’S INFORMATION

A. Non-Proprietary Equipment Design: Provide five sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment for equipment within 30 days following final acceptance. Also provide an electronic version of data on a CD. Final retention will be withheld until data is received and reviewed by Metro or its designee. Include the following as minimums:



1. Straight-line wiring diagrams of “as-installed” elevator circuits, with index of location and function of components. Provide one set reproducible master. Mount one set wiring diagrams on panels, racked or similarly protected, in each elevator machine room. Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain drawing sets with addition of subsequent changes. These diagrams are Metro’s property. A legend sheet shall be furnished with each set of drawings to provide the following information:

a. Name and symbol of each relay, switch or other apparatus.

b. Location on drawings, drawing sheet number and area and location of contacts.

c. Location of apparatus, whether on controller or on car.

2. Printed instructions explaining operating features.

3. Complete software documentation for installed equipment.

4. Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.

5. Parts catalogs listing replaceable parts including Manufacturer’s identifying numbers and ordering instructions.

6. Four sets of keys for switches and control features properly tagged and marked.

7. Diagnostic test devices together with comprehensive supporting information necessary for interpretation of test data and troubleshooting of elevator system and performance of routine safety tests.

8. The elevator installation shall be a design that can be maintained by any licensed elevator maintenance company employing journeymen mechanics, without the need to purchase or lease additional diagnostic devices, special tools or instructions from the original equipment Manufacturer.

a. Provide on site capability to diagnose faults to the level of individual circuit boards and individual discrete components for the solid state elevator controller.

b. Provide a separate, detachable device, as required to Metro as part of this installation if the equipment for fault diagnosis is not completely self-contained within the controller. Such device shall be in possession of and become property of Metro.

c. Installed equipment not meeting this requirement shall be removed and replaced with conforming equipment at no cost to Metro.

9. Provide upgrades and revisions of software during the progress of the Work, warranty period, the term of the ongoing maintenance agreement between Metro and Manufacturer and for a 60 month period following expiration of any warranty or ongoing maintenance agreement between Metro and the manufacturer/installer.


SECTION 14 45 00 VEHICLE LIFTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED


1. 5871 Hoist, car, with body supports, 100,000 pounds (Ref. Part 2.01)

2. 5880 Hoist, truck repair, 12,000 pounds (Ref. Part 2.02)




A. Experience: Equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer of established reputation with a minimum of five years experience supplying specified equipment.

B. Quality standards shall meet or exceed ISO-9001.

C. Manufacturer’s Representative:


2. Training: Provide technical representative to provide training to Metro’s maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.

3. Quality standards shall meet or exceed ISO-9001.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Product Data in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications.




3. Engineered floor plan drawings with a detailed equipment layout.

4. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing, and compressed air systems.


6. Printed listing of periodic preventive maintenance items and recommended frequency required to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for validation of warranties.

Expo Rail Operations and Maintenance Facility VEHICLE LIFTS SANTA MONICA, CA 14 45 00 - 1

7. List of original manufacturer’s parts, including suppliers’ part numbers and cutsheets, recommended spare parts stock quantity, and local parts and service source.

8. Assemble and provide copies of manual in 8-1/2 by 11 inch format. Fold out diagrams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by dry copy method. Provide copies per provisions of Division 1.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1.





1.05 WARRANTY









1.07 LABELING




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HOIST, CAR, WITH BODY SUPPORTS, 100,000 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 5871



a. Whiting Corp., Monee, IL (708) 587-2000

b. Model: Shallow Pit Car Hoist and Body Support

2. Alternate manufacturers: Contingent upon compliance with these specifications and documentation requirements set forth in Section 01300 Submittals, equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may be considered as equal.

a. Macton Corporation, Oxford, CT (203) 267-1500

b. Railquip, Inc., Atlanta, GA (770) 458-4157


1. Contractor shall verify all critical lift dimensions based on field dimensions of Metro’s existing fleet and specifications for new vehicles. Any dimensions specified herein shall be modified based on such field dimensions and specifications.

2. Car hoist:

a. Three hoists per rail car position

b. Motor: 30 HP (per individual hoist)

c. Lift capacities: 40,000 pounds (per individual hoist)

d. Lifting speed: 4 feet per minute (minimum)

e. Hoist rise: 5 feet, 4 inches

f. Track gauge: 56-1/2 inches

g. Truck wheel base: 70.86 inches

h. Cross over capacity: 20 tons

3. Body supports:

a. Motor: Two at 5 HP (per hoist)

b. Lift capacities: 14,000 pounds (per individual support)

c. Lifting speed: 6 feet per minute (minimum)

d. Hoist rise: 78 inches


C. Car Lift Systems And Body Supports:

1. Provide shallow pit electric mechanical screw-type lift system equipment as oriented and where indicated on the drawings. Equipment lift system shall include body stand arrangement for supporting the car body after the trucks have been removed. Provision for wheel spinning must also be provided. Equipment pit depth excluding screw jack caissons to be not greater than 54 inches. Hydraulic systems are not acceptable.

2. LRV Lift Systems: Fabricate lift system to provide complete access to the truck above; no structure between the supporting rails will be permitted. Fabricate each car lift system to lift and lower a minimum of 40 percent of the total weight of a transit vehicle, including the trucks. Provide four jacking screws per lift system.

3. Body Supports: Provide four pairs of screw jack type body stands per vehicle. Design body stands to support a minimum of 17 percent weight of a transit vehicle body and truck assembly. Body Supports shall not be capable of lowering and lifting the vehicle body with without the truck assembly. An individual motor shall drive each pair of body supports.

4. Floor Plates: Close lift system equipment opening in floor with steel plates to permit uninterrupted travel over the floor when the lift system is in a full up or full down position. When the steel plates are in position, do not exceed maximum 1/2 inch opening. Design deck plates to support a uniform load of 300 pounds per square feet or a 6000 pound concentrated load. With lift system equipment in full down position, lift system area shall be completely free of obstructions to movement of rubber-tired vehicles.

5. Controls: Provide controls to operate necessary components for lifting, supporting, and lowering a complete transit vehicle. Equip mechanical lift system for raising and lowering transit vehicle with upper and lower limit switching to stop lift system at normal limits of travel. Include two additional limit switches to prevent overtravel and undertravel in event of normal limit switch malfunction. Provide overtravel and undertravel switches for body stands. Include load sensitive body stand plates to cause any pair of body stands to stop on contact with a load at any increment of travel. Interlock car lift system controls with the body stand system to prevent raising any body stand until total car is fully supported in a raised position by car lift system.

D. Operational Characteristics:

1. Furnish mechanical lift systeming equipment actuated by electric motor with self-locking screw jacks with bronze lifting nuts and steel follower nuts for raising and lowering the transit vehicle, and for holding the transit vehicle body at any intermediate height, for the purpose of performing repair work or changing complete trucks. Raise transit vehicle by sections of rail at each truck. After raising entire transit vehicle by means of car lift systems, raise body stands into position to support transit vehicle in a raised position. Remove truck by lowering desired individual car lift system section utilizing appropriate interlocks to ensure body stands are in place prior to lowering an individual truck

E. Performance Requirements:


1. Car hoists, body supports and equipment pit covers shall be steel fabrications utilizing materials conforming to the ASTM and/or SAE requirements. Allowables used for the design of mechanical components shall utilize a design factor of 5 based on the average ultimate strength of material. Structural allowables shall be based upon those provided in the AISC Steel Construction Manual, 9th edition (ASD) with the appropriate dynamic factors applied.

2. Car Lift system design locations: Car lift system locations are to be based upon existing transit rail vehicles, or a nominal average dimension of the transit vehicles truck centerlines.

3. Design lift system units to lift and lower the weight of the transit vehicle including the trucks at a minimum of 110 percent of total weight.

4. Design car body stands to support the respective car body design, including trucks with automatic locks when in a stationary position. Design car body stand locations to be compatible with existing transit rail vehicles.

5. Design body stands to support not less than the 110 percent of the weight of a transit vehicle body and truck assembly.

6. Total vertical travel of car lift system: 64 inches with automatic self-locking at any height up to 64 inches.

7. Design total vertical travel of car body stand to extend to the car mounted body stand pads when the total vehicle is at the maximum vertical travel of the car lift system of 78 inches air suspension inflated. Vehicle drawings to be supplied by the Contractor. The vertical travel of body stands shall be designed with automatic self-locking at any height throughout the entire travel distance.

8. Lifting and lowering speeds of lift systems and supports:

a. Car Lift System: Minimum 4 feet per minute

b. Body Supports: Minimum 6 feet per minute

9. Provide lifting eyes for each equipment pit cover to facilitate the installation and removal of the units. The lifting eyes shall be rated for the dead weight of the pit cover and stowed below the top surface when not in use.

10. Provide 5 feet of LED white industrial rated lights on the inside of each car host rail assembly beam that activate once the car hoist is in an elevated position. Provide a toggle switch for each set of lights that can be used to turn on/off the lights at the operator’s discretion. The lights shall automatically turn off when the car hoist lifting frame is in its normal low position.

11. Provide one laptop computer of sufficient memory and storage capacity with the latest version of the Microsoft Windows operating system. Include one copy of the control system software and one copy of the final control system PLC program (with ladder diagram/logic) installed on the computer for Metro’s maintenance personnel’s use. Include provisions to connect the laptop computer directly to the control system to facilitate troubleshooting and maintenance activities.

F. Lift Systems Alignment And Deflection Requirements: The following are maximum variations in levels between lift systems supporting a transit vehicle through a complete lifting and lowering cycle:


1. Car Lift System: 1/4 inch with respect to the adjacent lift system, and 1 inch with respect to any other lift system in the group.

2. Body Supports: 1/4 inch with respect to the body supports on opposite side of transit vehicle, and 1 inch with respect to body stands at opposite end of transit vehicle or with respect to any other body support in group.

3. Allowable Variation from Level: The maximum variation from horizontal for body or car lift systems shall be 1/4 inch end-to-end of rails or center-to-center of rails, respectively.

4. Allowable Deflection With Vehicle Lifted: The following are maximum horizontal deflections of extended lift systems with full load, plus 1,200 pound applied horizontally in any direction at loading point for a single transit vehicle lifting:

a. Car Lift systems: 1/4 inch at top of rail

b. Body Supports: 1/4 inch normal to track at body contact point, and 1/4 inch parallel to track at body contact point.

G. Safety Requirements:

1. Provide visual and audible indication that car lift systems or body stands are in operation.

2. Provide lift system assemblies with high and low limit switches and auxiliary mechanical stop and run-out provisions to protect lift system mechanism, if low limit switch fails. In addition, provide an emergency high limit switch on each lift system that will stop all lift systems within a given system when the switch is activated. Drive motors to be electrically interlocked so that breakdown of one will automatically stop all motors in active lift system group. Design lift system to sustain load without collapse if both high limit and emergency high limit switches malfunction.

3. Provide each lifting nut with nut wear switch. Nut wear switch shall measure pre-set gap between load nut and follower nut. When nut wears a pre-determined amount, lift shall only be allowed to be lowered. Once lift is lowered, it cannot be raised until nut is inspected and switch is reset.

4. Prevent longitudinal truck and car movement during the lift system operation.

5. Install combination reversing motor starters and disconnect switches for the car lift systems and body stands above shop ground level.

6. Car hoists and body supports supplied under this specification shall be assembled and undergo a manufacturers shop functional and load test to the rated capacity of the unit. Shop testing of the equipment shall conform to the manufacturers documented plan and procedures. Results of the shop tests shall be documented and submitted to Metro or record.

7. During the manufacturers shop tests, items found to be nonconforming or faulty shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer’s quality system requirements and the equipment shall be retested to demonstrate its ability to meet the acceptance criteria prior to the equipment shipment. Records of the manufacturers shop tests and results including the acceptance criteria and certification the equipment meets the requirements of the sop testing plan shall be provided to Metro for record.


H. Electrical Requirements:

1. Features: Provide electrical equipment consisting of motors, starters, disconnect switches, controls, interconnecting wiring and devices necessary for safe operation of the car lift system. Terminate control and power wiring internally for single power feed to controls. A single 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz supply will be brought to the master car lift system apparatus control panel. Provide industrial duty wireless remote push button stations for raising and lowering lift systems to allow truck removal/replacement. House control panels in NEMA 12 gasketed enclosures. Pre-wire panels before delivery for installation.

I. Controls Requirements: Incorporate the following operational and control features into the car lift system, as well as previously described performance features:

1. System Main Operator Station (digital display acceptable for non-emergency alarms, controls, and signals).

a. Keyed main power ON/OFF switch

b. Indicator light (white) – main power ON

c. LED monitor screen providing operator control system information including fault identification, car hoist system status – car hoists elevated or retracted, body supports elevated or retracted, car hoist synchronization fault: identify car hoist in synchronization fault condition and its status relative to the group, car hoist elevation, body support elevation.

d. Indicator light (red) – FAULT

e. Multi-position selector switch for SYSTEM or LOCAL car hoist operation – select the desired car hoist for local operation, unit 1, 2, or 3.

f. Indicator light (amber) showing local car hoist operation.

g. Indicator light (green) showing all body supports in contact with the vehicle jacking support pads.

h. Momentary push button – RAISE CAR HOIST.

i. Momentary push button - LOWER CAR HOIST.

j. Momentary push button – RAISE BODY SUPPORTS.

k. Momentary push button – LOWER BODY SUPPORTS.

l. E-stop button – Mushroom type.

m. Receptacle to accept a plug-in pendant for local car hoist operation.

2. Remote Operator’s Station

a. Provide three remote hand held operator’s pendants for each car hoist system to facilitate local control of a selected car hoist. The pendant can only be activated when selected at the main operator’s console station.

b. Each handheld pendant shall include the following controls:

1) Momentary push button – CAR HOIST RAISE

2) Momentary push button – CAR HOIST LOWER

3) E-Stop button – Mushroom type


c. Include a plug with each pendant station that will allow the unit to be plugged into a dedicated wall or operator station mounted receptacle to facilitate local operation of a car hoist.

d. Provide two associated receptacle and enclosures to receive a pendant and act as local control. Each receptacle shall be house in a NEMA 4 enclosure.

e. Each pendant shall be industrial type, rated to meet NEMA 4, oil and water resistant.

f. Supply each hand held station complete with pendant, plug and 35 foot cable.

g. Interlock the control system in such a manner that only one local pendant station can be active at a time.

3. Motor Control Center (MCC).

a. Provide one MCC complete for each car hoist system housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure that contains the control system PLC and all required control system elements including starters, contractors, terminal blocks and circuit breakers to provide power and control to all car hoists and body supports within a system. All wires and terminal block locations shall be clearly labeled in accordance with the electrical schematic drawings. Include a lockable disconnect switch on the exterior of the enclosure. Include a light mounted to the enclosure to signal main power is “ON”. Furnish the MCC complete to the site with provisions for final conduit and wire hook-up.

b. Include a work shelf, as part of the MCC enclosure, of sufficient size to support a laptop computer and include a 120 volt outlet. Include provision to allow the laptop computer to be directly connected to the PLC to facilitate control system maintenance activities. Provide a data logger in the control system that records and stores up to 50 fault messages to facilitate troubleshooting activities.

4. Provide negative return bonding from the movable rails to the adjacent embedded rails to provide a return path for the shop power 750 V (dc), 500 A current, based upon location provided by car lift system manufacturer (if required). Grounding shall be as required in Electrical Specification Section Grounding 16450

J. Motors:

1. General Description: Supply extra heavy-duty motors; (totally enclosed, non-ventilated), NEMA Design D; Class F insulation; with overload protection; foot mounted, double end shafts, and double-shielded anti-friction bearings.

2. Torques: Design motors for full voltage starting with starting torque capable of accelerating their respective WK2 loads as required. Running torque characteristics and speed are to be compatible with the load to be driven.

K. Utility Requirements:

1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 130 HP (30 HP per hoist, 5 HP per body support) - main control panel. 120 VAC, 60 Hz - control system.

L. Finish: All equipment shall be rust free and all exposed surfaces shall be painted, with the exception of machined surfaces such as the guide rail, jack screw and


pistons on the body supports, with one coat of primer and two finish coats of paint in manufacturer’s standard colors.

2.02 HOIST, TRUCK REPAIR, 12,000 POUNDS Equipment Identifier: 5880



a. Whiting Corp., Monee, IL (708) 587-2000

b. Model: Truck Repair Hoist


a. Macton Corporation, Oxford, CT (203) 267-1500

b. Railquip, Inc., Atlanta, GA (770) 458-4157


1. Motor: 15 HP

2. Lift capacities: 12,000 pounds

3. Lifting speed: 4 to 5 feet per minute

4. Hoist rise : 60 inches

5. Track gauge: 56-1/2 inches


1. Hoist shall be a shallow pit design with two rails without cross member, and with two post guide rails.

2. Hoist shall have two electrically activated, mechanical screw jack drive systems featuring splash lubricated spiral bevel gear screw jacks or approved equal.

3. Drive systems shall be a 15 HP NEMA D design heavy-duty electric motor with 1.0 service factor, which drives the jacks through either a heavy-duty worm gear reducer or a bevel gear case.

4. Hoist shall have 5 feet of LED white industrial lights on the inside of each hoist rail assembly that activate once the hoist is in an elevated position. Provide a toggle switch for each set of lights that can be used to turn on/off the lights at the operator’s discretion. The lights shall automatically turn off when the truck repair hoist lifting frame is in its normal position.

5. Pit shall be covered with non-skid diamond steel pit covers.

6. Provide one laptop computer of sufficient memory and storage capacity with the latest version of the Microsoft Windows operating system. Include one copy of the control system software and one copy of the final control system PLC program (with ladder diagram/logic) installed on the computer for Metro’s maintenance personnel’s use. Include provisions to connect the laptop computer


directly to the control system to facilitate troubleshooting and maintenance activities.

D. Controls:

1. All motor controls shall be housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure.

2. Push-button station shall have the following controls and legend:

a. Keyed main power ON/OFF switch

b. Indicator light (white) – main power ON

c. LED monitor screen providing operator control system information including fault identification, truck repair hoist system status – hoists elevated or retracted, etc.

d. Indicator light (red) – FAULT

e. Momentary push button - RAISE TRUCK HOIST

f. Momentary push button – LOWER TRUCK HOIST

g. E-stop button – Mushroom type


1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 15 HP

F. Finish: All equipment shall be rust free with one coat of primer and two finish coats of paint in manufacturer’s standard colors

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION



C. Report in writing to the Architect, any damaged, missing or incomplete scheduled equipment and improper rough-in or utility stub-outs.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work under direct supervision of Foreman of Construction Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment with Architect or designated representative.






4. Upon completion of work, finish surfaces shall be free of tool marks, scratches, blemishes, and stains.

3.03 TESTING

A. Upon the completion of installation and prior to acceptance by Metro, the lifting systems shall undergo field testing per the manufacturers approved field testing plan. Metro shall provide vehicle transit cars and bogie trucks for use in conducting the start-up, testing and commissioning of the equipment. The general contractor shall notify Metro 14 days before the equipment acceptance is to take place. The contractor shall secure the services of a manufacturer’s representative to conduct the start-up, commissioning and acceptance testing of the equipment. Upon completion of acceptance testing, the equipment shall be wiped clean and all surfaces marred during acceptance testing touched-up with manufacturers supplied paint and items noted during the testing resolved. Records of the acceptance test results shall be provided to Metro for record.

3.04 CLEANUP





3.05 TRAINING


1. 5871 Hoist, car, with body supports, 100,000 pounds; 2 hours (minimum)

2. 5880 Hoist, truck repair, 12,000 pounds; 1 hours (minimum)

B. Demonstrate each lift operation utilizing each of the vehicle types operated by Metro.

C. Obtain, from technical representative, a list of Owner’s personnel trained in equipment operations and maintenance.

